0% found this document useful (0 votes)

399 views

Analysts Notebook PDF

But gerai said he

Uploaded by

Dranseika Algirdas

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

399 views

Analysts Notebook PDF

But gerai said he

Uploaded by

Dranseika Algirdas

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 298

Version 9 Release 2

IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook

User Help

IBM
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page
293.

This edition applies to version 9, release 1, modification 0 of IBM® i2® Analyst's Notebook and to all subsequent
releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions. Ensure that you are reading the appropriate
document for the version of the product that you are using. To find a specific version of this document, access the
Release materials section of the IBM Knowledge Center, and ensure that you select the correct version.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2018.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook 9.2.1 user help
Welcome to the IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook® documentation, where you can find information about
how to use IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook in your investigations.
Getting started
“Analyst's Notebook data” on page 7
To build up a full picture of an investigation, Analyst's Notebook can access data from a range of
sources. Within Analyst's Notebook, data is stored as entities, links, and properties.
“Charts” on page 19
Charts display the intelligence that relates to an investigation. You can create charts both manually
and automatically by using information from various sources. This information might be personal
knowledge, written reports, photographs, video clips, spreadsheets, email, word-processing files, and
databases.
“Working with an Information Store” on page 69
An Information Store is a centralized data store that holds large volumes of analysis-ready data. If
you are using Analyst's Notebook Premium with Opal services, you can connect to i2 Analyze and log
in to an Information Store.
IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook Release Notes
IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook Premium Release Notes
Common tasks
“Add information to a chart” on page 39
To represent the information that you receive, you can add entities and links to your chart, then add
information to chart items. Items can store information in properties such as identity and date and
time, in attributes, and in cards.
“Import data” on page 44
Data in formats such as text files or spreadsheets can be directly imported into Analyst's Notebook
using import specifications. You can run imports using existing specifications or create your own
designs by using the step-by-step import wizard. Import designs give you control over how Notebook
converts data into entities and links that are placed on the chart surface for analysis.
“Search for information” on page 127
To find chart items that might be of interest to your investigation, you can search item properties for
specific information. Different search tools on the Analyze tab fulfill different needs.
“Find networks” on page 133
You can find the connections and intermediaries between items of interest, discover what is linked to
a specific entity, and find groups of interlinked entities. These networks might contain entities and
relationships that support the activity of items of interest.
“Modify item appearance” on page 225
After you add an item to the charting surface, you can modify its appearance from the default style
that is specified by the chart. You can emphasize items on the charting surface, and present only the
most crucial data on the charting surface.
“Arrange items” on page 231
You can automatically move chart items so that their presentation suits the data, and so that items
are uniformly positioned. You can improve the clarity of the chart, for example by shaping links so that
they do not obscure other chart items.
“Present and publish charts” on page 251

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 1

To present the data on your chart effectively, you can build a sequence of chart items to step through,
and you can zoom into multiple areas of the chart. If you publish the chart, you can save the chart in a
format that is appropriate for the recipients, and you can print the chart.
Troubleshooting and support
IBM Software Support home page
More information
IBM Security Skills Gateway
IBM training

2 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Notices and contact information

All rights reserved. May only be used pursuant to an IBM software license agreement. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated
into any computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical,
chemical, manual, or otherwise, without prior written permission of IBM Corporation. IBM
Corporation grants you limited permission to make hardcopy or other reproductions of any machine-
readable documentation for your own use, provided that each such reproduction shall carry the IBM
Corporation copyright notice. No other rights under copyright are granted without prior written
permission of IBM Corporation. The document is not intended for production and is furnished “as is”
without warranty of any kind.
All warranties on this document are hereby disclaimed, including the warranty of non-
infringement and the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights — Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corporation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 3

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the
publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s)
described in this publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not
in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not
part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate
without incurring any obligation to you.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this
one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM United Kingdom Limited
Hursley House
Hursley Park
Winchester, Hants, SO21 2JN
UK
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some
cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are
provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License
Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the
results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may
have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements
will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the
applicable data for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their
published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and
cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM
products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of
those products.
All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without
notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To
illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies,
brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses
used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.

4 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle
and/or its affiliates.
ArcGIS, EDN, StreetMap, @esri.com, and www.esri.com are trademarks, registered trademarks, or
service marks of Esri in the United States, the European Community, or certain other jurisdictions.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. Other company, product, and service
names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Contacting IBM Support

IBM Support provides assistance with product defects, answers FAQs, and helps users to resolve
problems with the product.

About this task

After trying to find your answer or solution by using other self-help options such as technotes, you
can contact IBM Support. Before contacting IBM Support, your company or organization must have an
active IBM software subscription and support contract, and you must be authorized to submit
problems to IBM. For information about the types of available support, see the Support portfolio topic
in the Software Support Handbook.

Procedure
To contact IBM Support about a problem:
1. Define the problem, gather background information, and determine the severity of the problem.
For more information, see the Getting IBM Support topic in the Software Support Handbook.
2. Gather diagnostic information.
3. Submit the problem to IBM Support in one of the following ways:
• Online through the IBM Support Portal at Support Portal. You can open, update, and view all of
your service requests from the Service Request portlet on the Service Request page.
• By phone. For the phone number to call in your region, see the Directory of worldwide contacts
web page at https://www.ibm.com/planetwide/

Results
If the problem that you submit is for a software defect or for missing or inaccurate documentation,
IBM Support creates an Authorized Program Analysis Report (APAR). The APAR describes the
problem in detail. Whenever possible, IBM Support provides a workaround that you can implement
until the APAR is resolved and a fix is delivered. IBM publishes resolved APARs on the IBM Support
website daily, so that other users who experience the same problem can benefit from the same
resolution.

Notices and contact information 5

How to send your comments
Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and highest quality information.
To submit any comments about this book or any other documentation, send your comments by email
to [email protected]. Be sure to include the name of the book, the part number of the book, the
version of the software, and, if applicable, the specific location of the text that you are commenting on
(for example, a page number, table number, or a heading)

6 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Analyst's Notebook data
To build up a full picture of an investigation, Analyst's Notebook can access data from a range of
sources. Within Analyst's Notebook, data is stored as entities, links, and properties.
Analyst's Notebook entities represent real world objects such as bank accounts and telephones, or
events such as meetings or appointments. Links represent the relationships between entities, such as
associations between people, ownership of vehicles, transactions between bank accounts, or
meetings between people. In Analyst's Notebook, entities and links are known as items.
Properties are used to store information that is known about an item, such as whether a person has a
criminal record, or the date and time of a meeting. It is important to think about where to store each
piece of information. The choices that you make affect the type of analysis that you can do or how you
present the information. For example, you might choose to store information, such as the date of birth
of a person or model of a vehicle, as an attribute rather than in a card. You can then display that
property on the chart surface and use it in your analysis.
You can also add annotation to your chart in the form of a label or legend. Labels are used to add
annotation, such as adding a title for a presentation. They are not used for analysis. Legends provide a
key for the information on the chart surface.

Entities
Entities represent real-world objects such as a people, locations, and bank accounts, or they
represent events such as meetings.
Each entity has a representation to determine how it is displayed on the chart surface and a type to
categorize it. An entity contains properties, which store information about the object or event. For
example, a person might have a name, date of birth, and eye color and a meeting might have date,
time, and duration.

Representation
You can choose how to display entities on your chart surface by using different entity representations,
for example icon, event frame, or theme line.

Table 1. Different entity representations.

Representation Description
Icon An image or picture.
Theme line A line that is used to represent a key element of
an investigation, such as a suspect, or bank
account. Theme lines are often used with event
frames to represent a sequence of events over
time.
Event frame A representation of an occurrence that is used to
emphasize date and time information, such as a
meeting, or an appointment. Event frames are
often used with theme lines.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 7

Table 1. Different entity representations. (continued)
Representation Description
Circle Typically used for textual intelligence on the
chart surface or to indicate an organization or a
group visually. A circle is sometimes used to
enclose other entities.
Box Typically used to enclose other entities on a
chart to indicate an organization or group
visually.
Text block Any piece of information. Often used for textual
intelligence on the chart surface.
OLE object An object that is created in another application
and incorporated into your chart, for example a
spreadsheet, word-processor document, video
clip, or graphic file.

Type
Each entity has a type to categorize it, for example Person, Bank Account, Meeting, or Vehicle. This
type categorization means that you can locate and analyze information more efficiently.
The template that is used to create the chart contains a set of entity types. If you need an alternative
entity type, you can create your own by customizing your chart. However, before you create a new
entity type, make sure that a suitable one does not exist. You can merge any new entity type that you
create back into the standard template.
Entity types have characteristics that define the type such as icon image and name.

Table 2. Analyst's Notebook entity type characteristics.

Characteristic Description
Icon The image that is used on the chart, when the
entity is represented as an icon, theme line, or
event frame. You can load custom icons into the
system for specialized entities.
Name The name that is used to identify the entity type.
Line color For representations that use a border, the color
of the line that is used for entities of this type.
You can also change the line color on a per entity
basis.
Shade color The dominant color of the icon that is used for
entities of this type when represented as icons,
event frames, or theme lines. You can also
change the shade color on a per entity basis, for
example, to show if a particular car is red.

8 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Table 2. Analyst's Notebook entity type characteristics. (continued)
Characteristic Description
Semantic type A category that defines the real-world meaning
of data, and therefore defines how applications
interpret that data. For example, Person is a
semantic type that might be assigned to entity
types such as Male, Offender, and Subscriber.
You can search for entities that are assigned a
Person semantic type. Using this search criteria,
Analyst's Notebook finds entities that have an
entity type of Male, Offender, Subscriber, and
any other types that have the semantic type
Person assigned. You can also change the
semantic type on a per entity basis.
User palettes The palettes that contain the entity type.

Related tasks
Adding items
You can add entities and links to your chart. The items on your chart represent real world objects and
relationships.
Related reference
Item type definitions
Entity types and link types categorize the information on your chart and are part of a chart's
properties. If the existing item types are not suitable for your data, you can add or edit entity types
and link types.

Links
A link represents a relationship between two entities, such as ownership of a vehicle by a person or a
transaction between two bank accounts. It is represented on the chart surface by a line between the
two entities.
Links might have an arrow for direction to indicate a flow of commodities or transaction, or they can
be without direction, representing some general association.
All links have the same representation of a line between the two related entities. The style of the line
can indicate confidence in the relationship. For example, a solid line might represent an established
relationship such as the documented ownership of a vehicle. The template that is used to create the
chart contains a set of line strengths that associate a confidence level with a line style. For example, a
solid line to represent confirmed information, a dashed line to represent unconfirmed information,
and a dotted line to represent tentative information. You can also create your own by customizing the
chart.
If there are several relationships or transactions between the same two entities, you can choose to
display them as one single link, a link for each direction, or as separate links. This link multiplicity
setting is part of a link's style.
A link contains properties, which store information about it. For example, a transaction might have an
amount and a date and time.

Analyst's Notebook data 9

Type
Each link has a type to categorize it, such as Owner, Transaction, or Subscriber. This type
categorization means that you can locate and analyze information more efficiently. For example, if a
chart contains vehicles and their owners, you can use an owner link type. You can then search for the
owner of a vehicle by specifying an owner link type in Visual Search.
Note: If you are adding a link of a specific type to a data source, for example if you are using IBM i2
Analyst's Notebook® Premium to add a link to an analysis repository, there might be restrictions on
the types of entity that can be linked.
The template that is used to create the chart contains a set of link types. If you need an alternative
link type, you can create your own by customizing your chart. However, before you create a new link
type, make sure that a suitable one does not exist. You can choose to merge any new link type that
you create back into the standard template.
Link types have characteristics that define the type such as name and color.

Table 3. Analyst's Notebook link type characteristics.

Characteristic Description
Name The name that is used to identify the link type.
Color The color of the line that is used to represent
links of this type. You can also change the color
on a per link basis.
Semantic type A category that defines the real-world meaning
of data, and therefore defines how applications
interpret that data. For example, Organization
Link is a semantic type that might be assigned to
link types such as Employee or Director. When
you search for a link with an Organization Link
semantic type, Analyst's Notebook search the
types Employee, Director, and any other types
that have the semantic type Organization Link
assigned. You can also change the semantic type
on a per link basis.
User palettes The palettes that contain the link type.

Related tasks
Adding items
You can add entities and links to your chart. The items on your chart represent real world objects and
relationships.
Related reference
Item type definitions

10 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Entity types and link types categorize the information on your chart and are part of a chart's
properties. If the existing item types are not suitable for your data, you can add or edit entity types
and link types.

Properties
Entities and links contain properties, which are used to store information about that entity or link.
Selecting the correct type of property to store information is essential for both visualization and
analysis.
Properties can describe the following characteristics of a chart item:
• Information that is known about the chart item such as its label and description.
• Provenance details, such as the source or reliability of the chart item or of an individual piece of
information.
• Settings to do with how the chart item is displayed such as line strength, fill color, and other visible
elements.
Information about an item might come from multiple sources, such as databases, witness
statements, or external documents. This information can be stored in cards, attributes, or when it
comes from a connected data source, in data records.
Note: By default, only the item label is displayed on the chart surface. Apart from information that is
held on cards or data records, all other properties can be selected for display.

Identities
An identity uniquely identifies an item on a chart or provides a unique link back to entity or link
information in a data source.
Two types of identities apply in different situations:
• An Analyst's Notebook identity uniquely identifies entities in the chart (entities only).
• For items created from one or more connected data sources, database identities uniquely identify
the original source records (entities and links).
An entity can have an Analyst's Notebook identity, one or more database identities, or both.
Alternatively, an entity can have no identity.
Identities are used to match items when you add new items to the chart by copying and pasting,
importing, or adding them from a data source. If the item that is being added has an identity that
matches the identity of an item that is already on the chart, the items are merged. The item that you
are adding to the chart might have more than one identity, for example two database identities, so it
might match more than one item on the chart. You can decide what to do, based on information that
Analyst's Notebook provides.

Analyst's Notebook identity

Typically, an entity has a label and an identity. By default, the label is the same as the identity but can
be changed. The label is displayed on the chart and does not need to be unique, whereas an entity's
identity, if it has one, must be unique within a chart.
Note: Analyst's Notebook identities are case-sensitive.
It is important to use an identity that uniquely identifies an item, such as a car's license plate, or a
person's name together with their date of birth. An entity's identity means that you can copy entities
back and forth between charts without unwanted duplication.

Analyst's Notebook data 11

If you do not have enough information to uniquely identify an entity, you can leave its identity blank.
For example, you might receive several reports that each involve a John Smith but that include no
further identifying information. In this situation, you might add several entities to your chart that are
labeled John Smith and have a blank identity.
Links do not have Analyst's Notebook identities.

Database identity
Entities and links can have one or more database identities. The database identity uniquely identifies
the item in the data source. When you are connected to the data source, you can view the live
database information that is associated with the item.
If you chart an item from a connected data source, the Analyst's Notebook identity might be set to
blank because a database identity is assigned to the item. Whether the identity is set to blank
depends on how the connection to the data source is configured.
Related tasks
Setting the identity
An entity's identity uniquely identifies it on the chart, regardless of how it is displayed. Analyzing
charts is typically based on the identity of entities.
Displaying data records
Depending on the data source, data records are attached to items when you add data from a data
source. Data records contain data that is copied from the source record, so that you can view any
copied data that is not displayed on the charting surface.
Related reference
Label behavior
Behavior options determine how labels are handled when links are created or items are merged. Set
the behavior for your needs within your standard template.

Data records
When you chart information from a data source, Analyst's Notebook creates a reference back to the
information in the data source. It can also create a record that contains a copy of the item's data from
that data source.
The creation of a data record is controlled by the product that you are charting from. For example, if
you are charting from IBM i2 iBase, this option is configured in the charting scheme.
The data record that is created forms part of the item. It contains the information that was in the data
source at the time that the item was created on the chart.
You cannot edit the content of a data record. If the original data source is updated after the data
record was created, the record is not updated to reflect those changes.
If an item contains information from more than one connected data source, it has a data record for
each data source. For example, two data sources might contain different information about the same
person. When you view a data record, it indicates which data source the information is from.
An item that is charted from a data source has a database identity that links back into the data
source. When you are connected to the data source, you can view the data in the data source from
within Analyst's Notebook. Depending on the data source and the connection to it, in some cases you
can also edit the data to update the data source. When you edit the data source in this way, the item
on the chart is charted again and the data record in the chart is refreshed.

12 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Style
To highlight key aspects of your investigation or key pieces of information on your chart, you can
configure the style or appearance of an item.
The style of an item controls how it is displayed on the chart surface. By modifying style properties,
you can:
• Set the shade color of an entity. For example, you can set the color of a vehicle icon.
• Set the line color of a link.
• Display a picture in place of an icon. For example, you can display a photo of a person.
• Add a frame around an entity to draw attention to it.
• Choose which pieces of information are displayed on the chart surface. For example, you can
display item grades and source type information.
• Indicate the confidence of an item's data by making the displayed line dashed or solid.
• Set the properties of an item's font.
• Select the link multiplicity of a connection between two entities. For example, you can emphasize
that there are several associations between two entities by showing the connection as multiple
links rather than a single link.

Display
What information you can choose to display for an entity and how you display it on the chart surface
depends on which representation you use.

Table 4. Available information for display on a chart surface

Display Used by
Date & Time All items
Description All items
Grades All items
Label All items
Link Area Diverting event frames
Picture Icons, theme lines, and event frames
Frame Icons and theme lines
Pin All entities and any links that link 2 theme lines
Source Reference All items
Source Type All items
Type Icon Event frames only. Always displayed for icons
and theme lines.
Type Name Event frames only

Fonts
You can set the font type, size, style, color, and shading for a chart item. For event frames, text blocks
and text labels, you can also set the text alignment.

Analyst's Notebook data 13

Changing the font of an item updates:
• Label text
• Description text
• Grade and source information text
• Date and time text
You cannot change the font of an individual word or phrase.
Note: A font change does not apply to attribute text. Attribute text properties are specified per
attribute class in the Edit Attribute Class page of the Chart Properties window.

Link multiplicity
When multiple links are present between two entities, link multiplicity determines how these links are
displayed. Link multiplicity can be:
• Single: The connection between two entities is shown as a single link. This single link represents an
association between two entities, which might in reality, comprise many different instances of that
association.
• Directed: The connection between two entities is represented by one link for each possible
direction. A directed connection has therefore a maximum of four links. Each of those links might
represent several instances of the association, all in that same direction such as several
transactions from one bank account to another.
• Multiple: Each link between two entities is displayed individually.
Related tasks
Setting the default style
When you add new items to your chart, Analyst's Notebook uses the default style to display the item.
You can set the default style for links and for each different entity representation. For example, you
can set a default appearance for new theme lines or icons.

Cards
You can add descriptive unstructured information to items by putting the information into cards and
add provenance information to them. Typically one card is used for each piece of supplementary
information. You can use information in cards during analysis, such as searching.
Card information cannot be displayed on the chart surface.
You can store the following information on a card:
• A single line of text that summarizes the information.
• The main information that you want to include about the entity or link.
• Date and time, including a time zone. Use the date and time that the event or information in the card
occurred, the date and time that the information was obtained, or the date and time that you added
it to the chart item. Your organization might have guidelines for you to follow. You can choose to add
a description of the date and time if the exact date or time is not known such as about 4 pm or
around lunchtime. Alternatively you can also use the description to indicate what is represented by
the date and time that you entered.
• Provenance information such as the source, reliability of the source, reliability of the information, or
its privacy rating.
To make it easier to manage cards or assign provenance information, add one card per piece or
information or one card for each set of information from a specific source. The choice that you make

14 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

depends on, for example, whether you want to assign different grades to different pieces of
information.

Provenance information
The ability to track information to the original source and to assess the reliability of the information or
the source is important in investigations.
Some examples of the types of information are listed:
• The source and type of the information such as a witness statement that has a document reference
number. When you chart an item from a data source, it contains a database identity that links it
back to the original data source.
• The reliability of the source that provided the information or the reliability of the information itself.
For example, you might request information from an agency that concerns the registered owner of a
vehicle. This information might be considered reliable whereas an overheard conversation that
leads you to believe that a relationship exists between two suspects might not be accurate.
• The privacy rating or classification of the information, that is, who is allowed to know about the
information.
You can add provenance information to chart items and to individual pieces of information in cards.
For example, you might have several pieces of information about a specific person. You can add each
piece of information to a card and include provenance information on each card.
The chart template controls what rating scale is used. Many organizations adopt their own grading
system. You can customize the rating scales to meet your requirements.
Related tasks
Setting the description & grades
All chart items are given grading information. Grades on an item classify or provide an evaluation of
some quality of the information that is represented by that item. For example, if the information is
reliable, confidential or from a trustworthy source.

Attributes
You can store specific discrete pieces of information on chart items as attributes. Attributes are often
displayed as part of the item on a chart surface for presentation purposes and are also used in
analysis, such as filtering.
Analyst's Notebook has two types of attributes:
• Attributes store information about an item such as a person's date of birth or the make of a
particular item. You can add attributes manually or you can import information into attributes from
a file or a data source.
• Analysis attributes are automatically generated and store calculated information such as the day of
the week that an event occurred or whether an item has any cards.
Attributes are useful during analysis. For example, you can filter on attributes to choose which items
to display on the chart surface. When you list the items on the chart, you can sort based on attributes.

Attributes that are imported or created manually

You can use attributes to show specific characteristics about items on your chart. Attributes are
typically displayed below a chart item as a symbol and value.
An attribute has three key components:
• An attribute class: Defines the kind of information that is stored. Each attribute class has a name,
symbol, and a type that defines the kind of information that the attributes can contain.

Analyst's Notebook data 15

• An attribute value: The actual information.
• A semantic type: Allows information to be classified to give a real-world meaning.

Attributes that are automatically calculated

Analysis attributes contain calculated, dynamic information that is taken from an item's context in the
chart. Analysis attributes provide useful statistical information about chart items, which might help
your analysis. For example, which entity has the most links, which item has the earliest date and time,
or which transactions occurred on a Friday. You cannot edit analysis attributes.
Analysis attributes cannot be displayed on the chart surface in the same way as other attributes but
you can choose to include them in Infotips.
Related reference
Attribute definitions
Attribute classes categorize the information that is stored as attributes on chart items and are part of
a chart's properties. If the existing attribute classes are not suitable for your data, you can add or edit
attribute classes. Attribute entries are preset values for attributes of a specific attribute class. For
values that you reuse regularly, define attribute entries and add them to the appropriate palettes.

Semantic types
To benefit from the visualization and analysis capabilities of Analyst's Notebook, assign semantic
types to items or attributes to identify their meaning.
Analyst's Notebook recognizes the semantic types that are assigned to data, enhancing the amount of
analysis that is available. Item types that have a common semantic parent type are recognized as
being related and might be returned in search results.
IBM provides the IBM i2 Semantic Type Library, which consists of a set of entity, link, and property
semantic types. These semantic types can be assigned to the entity types, link types, and property
types. Some of these semantic types are used specifically by Analyst's Notebook to match entities,
for example a national identifier for a person, or a license plate for a vehicle.
If you cannot locate a suitable semantic type, you can derive your own custom semantic type from
the appropriate generalized semantic type. A custom semantic type is treated as a specialization of
its recognized parent semantic type.

How to chart data

The decisions that you make on how to model your data and where to store it in Analyst's Notebook
affect how you can present and analyze the information.

Entities or properties
When you put your data into Analyst's Notebook, it is important to decide when to create separate
entities and when to store information in a single entity. For example, you might have the following
information about a person:
• Name
• Date of birth
• Nationality
• Address
• Bank account details

16 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

• Name of the organization where they work
Name, date of birth, and nationality are characteristics of a specific person and can therefore be
stored as properties on an entity that represents a person.
An address is a separate real-world object. Several people might live at the same address. Add it to
the chart once as a separate entity and link each person who lives there to that address. This method
avoids including the same information several times on the chart and reduces the potential for
entering the same information inconsistently.
A bank account is also a separate real-world entity. By creating a separate bank account entity and
linking the person to it, you can then show transactions between specific bank accounts rather than
between the bank accounts' owners. This model leads to more effective analysis, particularly if the
person has more than one bank account.
The organization where the person works is again a separate real-world entity. You can enable
analysis of which people work at various organizations by creating links between the people and the
organizations where they work. However, for presentation purposes, sometimes it is sufficient to
represent an organization as a box that encloses the people who work at that organization.

Example charts
Several example charts are provided with Analyst's Notebook. They show examples of how you might
want to chart and store information. The charts are typically in C:\Users\<username>\Documents
\i2\i2 Analyst's Notebook 9\Example Charts. They include examples of:
• Storing and charting financial data in different ways.
• The use of types and styles to highlight differences in the data.
• The use of different entity representations to present your information, such as event frames when
you want to display the date, time, and description of events.
• Storing and charting geographical data.
• Handling data that contains hyperlinks, pictures, and different language alphabets.
• Combining different chart styles (association and timeline) in a single chart.
If you open these charts in Analyst's Notebook, they contain annotation that helps you to understand
more about storing and charting data.

Analyst's Notebook data 17

18 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Charts
Charts display the intelligence that relates to an investigation. You can create charts both manually
and automatically by using information from various sources. This information might be personal
knowledge, written reports, photographs, video clips, spreadsheets, email, word-processing files, and
databases.
Analyst's Notebook displays and analyzes this information in visual form. Charts can depict:
• Associations between entities such as people, places, vehicles, and organizations
• The flow of data such as telephone calls and financial transactions
• How related events unfold over time

Creating a chart
A new Analyst's Notebook chart is based on a template. When you create a chart, you can choose
between the standard template and other templates.

About this task

A template provides entity types, link types, and attribute classes for you to use in your chart. A
template also contains preset values for chart settings such as background color, page setup, and
default item style.
The standard template contains a wide range of item types and attribute classes, and is suitable for
general use. When you start Analyst's Notebook, it automatically creates a blank chart that is based
on the standard template. To make the template more suitable for your needs, you can customize it.
Other templates can provide a smaller or more specialized set of item types and attribute classes that
are appropriate to a specific domain. To ensure that a specific logo or box of standard text is present
on charts, you can use a template that includes them as items on the charting surface.

Procedure
• To create a chart that is based on the standard template, click File > New > New Standard Chart.
• To create a chart that is based on a different template:
a) Click File > New > New from Template.
The New From Template window opens.
b) In the Create a area, click Chart.
c) In the Based on area, select a template from the list. To use a template that is not in the list,
click Browse, locate then select the template, then click Open.
Note: To create a chart that contains no entity types, link types, or attribute classes, select
Empty Template from the list.
d) Click OK.
Analyst's Notebook creates a chart that is based on the chosen template.
Related reference
Viewing and maintaining chart summary properties

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 19

Opening charts
Analyst's Notebook can open Analyst's Notebook charts (.anb), Analyst's Notebook Exchange charts
(.anx), and Text Chart visualizations (.tcv).

Procedure
To open a chart, use the following steps:
1. Click File > Open.
2. In the Open window, navigate to the directory that contains the chart you want to open.
3. Double-click the chart that you want to open. You can select multiple files to open several charts
at the same time.
If a chart is closed abnormally, for example as a result of a power failure, Analyst's Notebook
might save recovery files. These charts are recovered next time that you start Analyst's Notebook.
Related concepts
Share details about charts
You can add information about a chart to its cover sheet. The cover sheet can help recipients of the
chart to understand the purpose of the chart and identify the author.

File types that can be opened in Analyst's Notebook

You can open charts and templates that are created with Analyst's Notebook or IBM i2 Text Chart.
Charts that are created in XML format can also be opened.
The different file types that can be opened in Analyst's Notebook are listed in the following table.

Table 5. File types that can be opened in Analyst's Notebook.

Extension Description
.anb A chart that is created in Analyst's Notebook.
.ant A chart template that is created in Analyst's
Notebook.
.anx A chart in XML format that can be opened in
Analyst's Notebook and IBM i2 Chart Reader.
.tcv A chart that is created in Text Chart.
.tct A chart template that is created in Text Chart.
Templates that are created in Text Chart can be
viewed (but not edited) in Analyst's Notebook.

20 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Copying charts
When you copy a chart, all of the chart items are copied along with the legend. You might want to
create a copy of a chart and then add more information to it.

Procedure
To copy charts, complete the following steps:
1. Click anywhere on the background of the chart that you want to copy to clear any selected items.
2. Click the Home tab, and then in the Clipboard group, click Copy > Copy Chart.
3. Open a new blank chart. Right-click anywhere on the chart background and click Paste.
4. You can paste the chart into a different application as an OLE object.

Share details about charts

You can add information about a chart to its cover sheet. The cover sheet can help recipients of the
chart to understand the purpose of the chart and identify the author.
Viewing the contents of a chart or its file name is not always a reliable way of establishing the
sensitivity of a chart. Recipients of your chart might use the information on the cover sheet to assess
whether they are cleared to view the chart before they open it.
The cover sheet contains the following types of information:

Summary Standard information about the chart. The cover sheet contains the following
property summary properties, which you can add information into:
• Title
• Subject
• Author
• Keywords
• Category
• Comments

Custom Information about the chart that is not included in the summary properties. You can
property use custom properties to store chart characteristics that are specific to your
organization.
Two custom properties are created automatically when you create a chart from the
Standard.ant template. These custom properties are Case and Classification. You
can enter values for these properties and add your own custom properties.

The headers and footers of your printed chart can contain information from the cover sheet. For
example, if your chart runs over a number of pages you might stamp each page with a security
classification, chart title, and publication status such as 'draft'.

Editable cover sheet

To prompt you to enter information, Analyst's Notebook can display the cover sheet in an editable
state when you save charts. You can choose whether the editable cover sheet is displayed only when

Charts 21
you first save a chart, or every time you save, or never. To choose an option, click File > Options, and
then on the Save page select the appropriate option in the Cover Sheet area.
To open the editable cover sheet of an open chart at any time, click File > Cover Sheet. You can edit
the same information on the Summary > Description and Origin pages of the Chart Properties
window.

Read-only cover sheet

You can choose to display a read-only cover sheet to recipients of the chart when they open it. To turn
on this feature, select the On Open check box on the editable cover sheet.
The read-only cover sheet is displayed before the chart loads. After the recipient reads the cover
sheet they can proceed to open the chart, or they can cancel the operation.
Related tasks
Opening charts
Analyst's Notebook can open Analyst's Notebook charts (.anb), Analyst's Notebook Exchange charts
(.anx), and Text Chart visualizations (.tcv).

Adding information to the cover sheet

You can add information to the cover sheet, and configure it to open when the chart is opened. You
can edit the cover sheet when you create or edit a chart.

Procedure
To add information to the cover sheet of a chart:
1. Click File > Cover Sheet.
The Cover Sheet window opens.
2. Add information to the summary properties.
Tip: To help other users to find the chart in repositories such as the Analysis Repository, enter
information that they might search for. For example, you might enter the name of the investigation
in the Subject property.
3. To create a custom property, click New in the Custom area.
4. To configure the cover sheet to open when the chart is opened, select the On Open check box.
5. Click OK.

Saving charts
Analyst's Notebook can save any open chart in Analyst's Notebook (.anb) format. The option to
include and customize a cover sheet is available when you save the chart. The cover sheet provides a
brief overview of the chart's contents and purpose. Properties of the cover sheet can be customized
just before the chart is saved.

About this task

It is good practice to save your chart with a meaningful file name when you first create a chart and
add something to it. You can then search for and view the charts that are related to an investigation.

Procedure
To save a chart:
1. Click File > Save, or Save As.

22 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

2. If the Cover Sheet window is displayed, click OK on the Cover Sheet.
3. In the Save As window, navigate to the directory where you want to save the chart.
4. Type a file name in the File name box.
5. Click Save.
Note: If a chart with the same name exists in the specified location, the application asks whether
to overwrite the previous chart. If you click No, you must specify a new location or name for the
saved chart.

Results
When you save a chart, it is validated for any significant compatibility issues with earlier versions. If
the application finds a problem, a relevant warning is displayed.

Saving a chart as a template

To reuse the chart settings in other charts, save the chart as a template. Saving charts as a template
can help save time and improve work efficiency if data used in multiple charts is similar and do not
require different chart specifications.

Procedure
To save a chart as a template:
1. Click File > Save As.
The Cover Sheet might be shown.
2. If the Cover Sheet is shown, click OK to save the Cover Sheet details, or click Cancel to close the
Cover Sheet.
The Save As window is shown.
3. Select the folder to save the template and type a file name in the File name box.
4. Select Analyst's Notebook Template (*ant) from the Save as type list.
5. Click OK.

Results
All of entity types, link types, attribute classes, and any chart items on the chart are saved in the
template.
Related tasks
Creating a template
A template contains preconfigured chart properties, and lists of permitted entity types and link types.
When you base a chart on a template, the appearance and meaning of data in the chart are consistent
with other charts based on that template.

Chart and application settings

When you save a chart, either as a chart or as a template, many of the definitions, options, and
settings are also saved.

Saved with the chart

The following are all saved with the chart:
• All the settings in the Chart Properties window:
– Display settings: chart background color, grid size, theme line wiring options
– Behavior options: label paste and merge rules, blank link labels

Charts 23
– Definitions: entity types, link types, attribute classes, attribute entries and their semantic type
assignments, grading system, line strengths, and date and time formats
– Time Bar display settings
• All the default styles for each entity representation and for links
• User palettes and their membership
• The legend
• Snapshots
• Page setup settings
• Whether entity types and attribute entries, or both are available in the palette bar
• Display of the grid and page boundaries

Not saved with the chart (application settings)

The following settings are application settings. Application settings persist in Analyst's Notebook until
changed, regardless of which chart is opened.
• All the settings in the analysis tools:
– Visual Search criteria
– List Items Options settings
– Find Linked and Find Path Setup options
– Find Text criteria
– List Cards Options settings
• Layout settings, unless saved by using the Save Layout Setup to Chart command.
• Zoom settings (for example, the last zoom level). The initial view of a chart is always fits the chart in
the window.
• Insert from Palette pane and Add Links pane set up
• Keyboard shortcuts

Managing user palettes

User palettes are used to group item types and attribute classes. You can modify existing user
palettes or add new ones to match the type of data you work with.

About this task

The default user palettes contain types and attributes that are commonly used in particular kinds of
investigation. For example, the finance palette contains all the relevant entity and link types that
might be used in a financial investigation. You can quickly choose the required type from the limited
set in the palette.
You can create a user palette and assign all the relevant entity and link types to this palette.

Procedure
To manage user palettes:
1. Click File, point to Chart Properties, and then click User Palettes. The User Palettes window
opens. This window shows the name of the user palette, and whether it contains:
• Entity types

24 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

• Link types
• Attribute classes
• Attribute entries
2. Modify a user palette in one of the following ways:
Option Description
New Creates a user palette.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the user palette that is selected. A copy of this palette is created
which includes all assigned item types, attribute classes, and attribute entries.
Rename Rename a user palette. Double-click the name of a user palette to rename it.
Delete Deletes the user palette.
Note: When you delete a user palette, you do not delete the entity types, link types,
or attributes that belong to that palette. A user palette just displays a subset of the
types and attributes that the chart contains.

3. Click OK.

Modifying user palettes

User palettes contain item types, attribute classes, and attribute entries. You can change the
contents of a user palette. Modifying the contents and appearance of the user palette can help
organize their content to make finding item types and attributes easier to speed up chart creation.

Procedure
To modify the content of an existing user palette:
1. Click File > Chart Properties.
The Chart Properties window is shown.
2. Click Definitions and then select the page that you are interested in:
• Entity types
• Link types
• Attribute classes
• Attribute entries
3. Select the entity types, link types, attribute classes, or attribute entries that you want to add to or
remove from the user palette.
4. Click Properties and select the palettes to add the types and attribute entries.
5. Click OK.

Results
The modified user palette is shown in the list of palettes in the Insert from Palette pane, and in the
User Palettes window.
Tip: To set up user palettes that you want to use in many different charts, save your chart as a
template.

Charts 25
Changing chart properties
Chart properties are a collection of settings and options that apply to a chart, such as the default date
and time for items. Chart properties also specify the item types and attribute classes that are
available for use in that chart.
Chart properties are saved along with your chart. These properties mean that when you distribute
your chart, the recipient sees the chart that you saved, in the same format. Similarly, when you open a
chart that you are sent, all the properties are as they were when the chart was saved.
You can set up templates to include chart properties that you use often. You can then create new
charts that are based on these templates.

Setting display options

Display options control the appearance of the chart surface. You can control the size of the grid,
background color, and link separation.

Setting the grid size

The grid size determines the spacing between grid points on the chart. You can specify the horizontal
and vertical distance between grid points on your chart separately.
Enter the required value in each box. The units that are used are determined by your Windows
environment.
You can enable snap to grid mode on this page.

Setting the link spacing value

The link spacing value determines the distance between multiple links on the same connection. This
value is used when you:
• Add a link to a connection that already has a link. The new link is separated from existing links by
this distance.
• Use the Compress Connection command. All links on the connection are rearranged so that they
are separated by this value.
• Import data with multiple links between entities into your chart.

Setting theme line wiring values

You can set the following values for theme line wiring:

Near Sets the straight-line width of a theme line on

either side of an event frame, where the theme
line diverts through it.
Far Sets the width of a diagonal segment of a theme
line.
Separation Sets the vertical distance between theme lines
as they enter an event frame.

26 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Height Sets the distance between the top of the event
frame and the top theme line when it enters the
event frame.
Select the Use for Theme Line Icons check box
to position the theme line relative to the theme
line icon. The greater the value, the lower the
theme line is positioned.

Label behavior
Behavior options determine how labels are handled when links are created or items are merged. Set
the behavior for your needs within your standard template.

Specifying label merge and paste rules

Entities are merged when:
• An entity is pasted into a chart that contains an entity with a matching identity
• You use the Merge Entities command
Links are merged when:
• You use the Merge Multiple Links command
• Their connection style is changed, resulting in fewer links on the connection
• You merge entities that are linked to the same entity. For example, if you merge two telephones
that are linked to the same person, the links are merged.
When two or more items are merged into a single item, you can specify what happens to the labels of
an item:

Merge Labels are merged if the following conditions are

true:
• One label is contained within the other, and
• The matching text is a complete line of the
label
If both these conditions are not met, the labels
are appended (one is added to the end of the
other).
Append One label is appended to the other. The label of
the item that is pasted, or the last item that is
selected is appended to the end of the original
label.
Discard The label of the item that is pasted or the last
item that is selected is discarded. The label of
the original chart item is retained.

Summing numeric links

When the labels on your links are numeric or a number is contained within them, select Sum Numeric
Links to add the numbers together when links are merged.

Charts 27
Labels can have numbers that are embedded within them, that is, only part of the label is a number.
Analyst's Notebook can recognize that a label contains an embedded number.
To see the numeric value that Analyst's Notebook interprets from the link label, you can view the
link's Label Value analysis attribute. This attribute, contains the numeric value of the link, as
extracted from the label:
The rest of the label, that is to the left and right of the numerical part, is still merged.

Creating new links with a blank label

Select the Create Links with Blank Labels check box to create new links on your chart without a
label.
Related concepts
Identities
An identity uniquely identifies an item on a chart or provides a unique link back to entity or link
information in a data source.

Setting icons options

The icon set that is used within the chart is configurable. You can use icons from the new icon set or
legacy icons.
You can open charts that contain icons from the new icon set in earlier versions of Analyst's
Notebook. However, these new icons cannot be displayed and are represented by the legacy icons.
Note: The new icons are not overwritten if you save the chart in versions later than Analyst's
Notebook 6.

Identifying when events take place

The time bar is a visual aid to help you identify when events take place on your chart. It shows the
passage of time from left to right across your chart, and provides an overview of when events occur in
time in relation to each other.

About this task

The time bar comprises three main bands:

Band Description
Interval The interval band shows the intervals in which the time bar is displayed. For example,
hours, days, or months.
Tick The tick band consists of major and minor ticks. Major ticks represent, for example,
days or hours, and depend on the rate of time flow. Minor ticks show times between
major ticks. Minor ticks do not have labels. When you move your mouse pointer over a
minor tick, hover help is displayed that shows the date and time of the chart at that
position.
Marker The marker band contains marker symbols that indicate controlling items on the
chart. Controlling items are ordered and have both a date and time.

Procedure
To edit the time bar:
1. Click File > Chart Properties > Options > Time Bar > Display.

28 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

2. Select the interval band:
a) Optional: Select Show in the Interval Band area, and select a color from the Line Color list.
b) Optional: Select Show in the Tick Band area, and select a color from the Line Color list.
c) Optional: Select Show in the Marker Band area, and select a color from the Line Color list.
3. Choose the interval label and tick label alignment.
4. In the General area, select the border and background color.
5. To change the style of the text in the time bar, modify the settings on the Interval Font page and
the Tick Font page.
6. Click OK to close the Chart Properties window.

Time zones
When you create a chart that contains events that take place in different time zones, you can specify
in which time zone each event took place.
Each item on your chart with a date and a time has a time zone. This time zone might or might not be
the same as the time zone of the chart.
Note: Date and time attributes do not have a time zone.

Chart time zone

The time zone of the chart is typically your local time, that is, the time where you are working.
Analyst's Notebook reads the time zone in the date and time properties of your computer and applies
that time zone to the chart. You can, if required, specify a different time zone for the chart.
The time zone of the chart is used:
• In the time bar
• As the default time zone when you create items with a date and time. The time zone of an item can
then be changed to any other time zone.
• When you set up features such as visual search

How do I find out which time zone the chart is in?

To view the time zone of the chart, follow one of these steps:
• In the Chart Properties window, click Defaults > Date & Time. The Time Zone list displays the time
zone of the chart.
• Point the mouse pointer at any tick in the time bar. The tooltip that is displayed contains the time
zone of the chart. To display the time bar on your chart, click the View tab, and then in the Show
group, select the Time Bar check box.

Item time zone

All chart items with both a date and a time have a time zone that is associated with them. When the
date and time are first set on a chart item, the time zone is the same as the time zone of the chart.
The time zone of the item can then be changed to any other time zone.
The date and time of an item is displayed on the chart in its own time zone, by using the specified
date & time format. The date & time format might or might not show the time zone name.
Related tasks
Setting the date & time

Charts 29
A chart item can have both a date and a time, or just a date or a time. It can also have a description of
approximately when it occurred, if the exact date and time is not known.

Item type definitions

Entity type definitions

Entity types have characteristics that define the type, including icon, name, line and shade color, and
semantic type. When you are defining an entity type or editing an existing type, you can further
customize the following characteristics:
• In addition to the icons available in Analyst's Notebook, you can load your own custom icons for
specialized entity types.
• If there is no suitable semantic type in the type library, then to provide an accurate classification of
your data you can derive a custom semantic type from an existing semantic type.
You can also choose which user palettes contain the newly defined entity type.

Link type definitions

Link types have characteristics that define the type, including name, line color, and semantic type. As
part of a link type definition, if there is no suitable semantic type in the type library, then to provide an
accurate classification of your data you can derive a custom semantic type from an existing semantic
type.
You can also choose which user palettes contain the newly defined link type.
Related concepts
Entities
Entities represent real-world objects such as a people, locations, and bank accounts, or they
represent events such as meetings.
Links
A link represents a relationship between two entities, such as ownership of a vehicle by a person or a
transaction between two bank accounts. It is represented on the chart surface by a line between the
two entities.
Custom semantic types
You can derive custom semantic types based on the ones in the IBM i2 Semantic Type Library, then
use them in other charts and share them with colleagues. Deriving a custom semantic type is
appropriate when you need a more accurate classification of your data than the standard type library
provides.

Attribute definitions
Attribute classes categorize the information that is stored as attributes on chart items and are part of
a chart's properties. If the existing attribute classes are not suitable for your data, you can add or edit
attribute classes. Attribute entries are preset values for attributes of a specific attribute class. For
values that you reuse regularly, define attribute entries and add them to the appropriate palettes.

Attribute class definitions

The standard template contains several attribute classes that you can use when you are creating a
chart, for example, Nationality or Date of Birth. However, if you are working with specialized data, you

30 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

can define your own attribute classes to categorize your data. You can then use these attribute
classes in your chart or to create your own template.
An attribute class has the following characteristics:

Table 6. Analyst's Notebook attribute class characteristics.

Characteristic Description
Symbol The symbol that can be displayed on the charting
surface when an attribute of this class is added
to a chart item, for example a red triangle. An
attribute class symbol does not have to be
unique. You can use your own custom symbols.
Name The name that identifies the attribute class.
Type The data type: Text, Flag, Number, Date & Time.
Semantic Type A category that defines the real-world meaning
of data, and therefore defines how applications
interpret that data. For example, Crime Type is a
semantic type that might be assigned to the
attribute class Offense. You can select a
semantic type from the IBM i2 semantic type
library or you can derive your own custom
semantic type from a semantic type that is
stored in the library.

When you define an attribute class, you can configure its style and format and choose which user
palettes contain that attribute class. For example, you can choose to display a symbol, prefix or suffix
on the charting surface and set the font properties of an attribute class.
Note: If you add a prefix or suffix, such as a dollar sign for a monetary value, Analyst's Notebook does
not leave a space between the value and the prefix or suffix. You must enter a space as part of the
prefix or suffix.
You can also choose whether to display the attribute value itself. For example, when you use a flag
attribute, displaying the attribute name alone might be sufficient. The display options vary depending
on the type of the attribute class.

Attribute entry definitions

The standard template contains several preset values for some attributes, such as Nationality, for
example Spanish, Dutch, and Italian. These preset values are known as attribute entries. You can
define your own attribute entries with values that you use regularly. You can then use these attribute
entries in your chart or to create your own template.
When you define an attribute entry, you must select the attribute class, then enter a value and select
the user palettes on which you want the attribute entry to appear.
Related concepts
Attributes
You can store specific discrete pieces of information on chart items as attributes. Attributes are often
displayed as part of the item on a chart surface for presentation purposes and are also used in
analysis, such as filtering.
Custom semantic types

Charts 31
You can derive custom semantic types based on the ones in the IBM i2 Semantic Type Library, then
use them in other charts and share them with colleagues. Deriving a custom semantic type is
appropriate when you need a more accurate classification of your data than the standard type library
provides.

Defining a grading system

Grades provide an indication of quality of the information that is represented within an item. For
example, if the information is accurate or reliable.

About this task

To allow the quality of information to be evaluated consistently, the same grading system should be
applied to charts of the same type. You can use the Grading System page to define the grades that
are used within your template.

Procedure
To define the grading system:
1. Click File > Chart Properties > Definitions > Grading System.
The grading system is displayed.
2. Select the Grade list to which you want to add a grade, then click New below the list.
A new grade is created below the selected grade with the default name of "New Entry".
3. Select this grade and type the letter, number, or name that is required for this grade.
4. To move the grade up or down the list, click the new grade and drag it to its new position.

Adding a line strength

Line strengths are a useful way of indicating the general status or quality of information that is
represented by an item. The line strengths that you define depend on the convention that is adopted
by your organization.

About this task

Line strengths can be used to indicate the quality of information that is available for items on your
chart. By default, the following line strengths are available:
Confirmed
Indicated as a solid line, this line strength is applied as a default to all created items. A line
strength is confirmed if the information is of a high quality.
Unconfirmed
Indicated as a dashed line. A line strength is unconfirmed if the information is not of a high
quality.
Tentative
Indicated as a dotted line. A line strength is tentative if the information is hypothetical.
You can update these defaults and add more line strengths if required. Any changes that you make
are stored with the chart properties and available to others when you share the chart.

Procedure
To modify the available line strengths:
1. Click File > Chart Properties > Definitions > Line Strengths.
2. Click one of the following options:

32 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Description
New Create a line strength, when the default line strengths are not suitable.
Duplicate Duplicate a line strength. The selected line strength is duplicated and a line strength
is created with the following properties:
• A name of "Copy "n" of Line Strength", where "n" is the lowest unused number.
• The same strength as the selected line strength

a) Type a name for the line strength.

For example, hypothesis.
b) Change the line style, by selecting a style from the Strength list.
Tip: You can delete line strengths that are no longer used. You cannot delete a line strength that is
in use on the chart.
3. Optional: To modify an existing line strength, click the down arrow in the Strength list and select
the line strength to use.
4. Click OK.

Viewing and maintaining chart summary properties

Summary and custom properties contain user-defined and automatically generated information about
the content and use of the chart. Some of these properties are used in the chart Cover Sheet, which
can be set to display on opening a chart.
Use the Description and Origin pages in the Summary folder of the Chart Properties window to:
• View the chart summary and custom properties
• Edit the chart summary properties
• Create new chart custom properties
• Edit an existing chart custom property
• Delete an existing chart custom property

Chart summary properties on the Description page

Use the Description page to view and edit file information about the chart file, such as its title and
subject. You can amend all the following fields.

Field Description
Title Enter a title for this chart. On saving your chart
for the first time, the Title is used as the standard
file name, however you can change the title as
required.
Subject Enter the subject of the chart. You can use the
subject field to group similar types of chart
together, for example, all those charts that
pertain to a particular investigation.
Keywords Use keywords to help readers identify the
purpose of your chart.

Charts 33
Field Description
Category A broad term, for example Surveillance, to allow
your chart to be grouped with other similar
charts.
Comments Use comments to record useful information
about the chart.

For every new chart that you create from the Standard template, two custom properties are
displayed, to which you can add or delete values.

Field Description
Case The name of the operation or case or criminal
investigation to which the chart relates.
Classification The sensitivity level of the information that is
contained in the chart, for example, Restricted.

Chart summary properties on the Origin page

Use the Origin page to view the history details of the chart, such as when it was last saved or printed.
You can amend only the Author field; all other fields display read-only information.

Fields Description
Author The name of the person who created the chart.
Template The template on which this chart was based.
You can select the full path of the template. Click
anywhere in the box and drag to the right to see
the full path.
You can then copy the path to the clipboard.
Note: The Template property is not available for
printing in the headers and footers of your chart.

Editing Time The total amount of time this chart is open for
editing.
Created The date and time that this chart was created.
Last Saved The date and time that the chart was last saved.
Last Printed The date and time that the chart was last printed.
Revision Number The number of times the chart is modified and
saved.

Editing chart summary properties

You can change the summary properties on the Description page and the Author box on the Origin
page by selecting all of the text in the field, and typing over the selection with your new text entry.
After you make your changes on either the Description or Origin pages, click OK to close the Chart
Properties window.

34 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Note: Changes to custom properties are not saved until you confirm your changes on the Chart
Properties window, and save your chart.

Creating and editing a chart custom property

Create a custom property if you want to add information to the Cover Sheet that is not covered by the
summary properties. To create a custom property:
1. Click New in the Custom area of the Description page. The New Custom Property window is
shown.
2. In the New Custom Property window, enter a name for the custom property in the Name box and
custom property information in the Value box.
Note: You must enter both a Name and Value to create a custom property. The new custom
property Name must be unique in the list. Values that are entered in the Value box are interpreted
as plain text.
3. Click OK to close the window.
To edit a custom property Name or Value, you can:
• Select the custom property row in the list, click Edit, and change the Name, Value, or both,
displayed in the Edit Property window.
• Double-click either the Name or Value cell of the custom property that you want to edit and enter
your new Name or Value, and either click away from the table or press the Enter key.
When you create new custom properties or edit existing custom properties, you can sort the
properties in alphabetical order by their name or value. To do this, click either the Name or Value
column header. Sorting is not case-sensitive and numbers come before letters.
Note: Changes to custom properties are not saved until you confirm your changes on the Chart
Properties window, and save your chart.

Deleting a chart custom property

To delete an existing custom property from the Cover Sheet:
1. In the Custom area of the Description page, select an existing custom property from the custom
properties list.
2. Click Delete or press the Delete key.
Note: Changes to custom properties are not saved until you confirm your changes on the Chart
Properties window, and save your chart.
Related tasks
Creating a chart

Charts 35
A new Analyst's Notebook chart is based on a template. When you create a chart, you can choose
between the standard template and other templates.

Creating a template
A template contains preconfigured chart properties, and lists of permitted entity types and link types.
When you base a chart on a template, the appearance and meaning of data in the chart are consistent
with other charts based on that template.

About this task

After making changes to the properties of a chart, or adding additional item types, a template can be
saved. Saving a chart as a template allows other charts to be produced that use these properties and
types

Procedure
To create a template, use the following steps:
1. Update your chart properties.
2. Click File > Template > Create Template. The Create Template window opens.
3. In the Create Template window, select the Location to store the template:
Option Description
Local template Local templates are designed to be used to ensure consistency between the
charts that you create when working independently. Templates should be
stored locally when working on chart types that are not used by the rest of
your team.
Workgroup Workgroup templates are designed to be used by the wider team.
template
Note: When there is no workgroup template path set, this option is not
available.

Standard Sets this template as the default template to use for new charts.

Note: The paths that are used to store templates are defined in File > Options > Templates.
4. Optional: To create a template which contains all of the chart items and the legend, select Include
Chart Items and Legend.
5. Click OK to create the template.
Related tasks
Saving a chart as a template

36 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Applying a template to a chart

In normal operations, a template is selected when a chart is first created. You can however apply
chart properties as defined in a template at any point.

About this task

Use the Merge Template window to import chart properties and settings from a template into your
chart. This is a way of making certain features in your chart consistent with those defined in a
template.

Procedure
To add chart properties that are stored in a template to an existing chart:
1. Click File > Template > Merge Template.
The Merge Template window appears.
2. Choose the template to apply.
3. Select the types of chart property to apply.
4. Use Replace Existing Features to overwrite existing properties.
5. Click OK to apply the chart properties.

Charts 37
38 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Add information to a chart
To represent the information that you receive, you can add entities and links to your chart, then add
information to chart items. Items can store information in properties such as identity and date and
time, in attributes, and in cards.
For example, to represent a telephone call, you might perform the following actions:
• Add two telephone entities to the chart
• Add a link between the telephones to represent the call
• Enter a telephone number into the identity property of each entity
• Enter the call date and time into the date and time properties of the link, and add the call duration
as an attribute
To emphasize specific items that you add to the chart, you can modify item appearance. You might
identify which items are of interest directly from the information that you receive. Alternatively, you
might identify items of interest after you use Analyst's Notebook to analyze your data.
After you add information to a chart, you can use a label to annotate the chart, add a summary, or add
a title.
Related concepts
Modify item appearance
After you add an item to the charting surface, you can modify its appearance from the default style
that is specified by the chart. You can emphasize items on the charting surface, and present only the
most crucial data on the charting surface.

Adding items
You can add entities and links to your chart. The items on your chart represent real world objects and
relationships.

Procedure
To add an item to the chart:
1. To display the Insert from Palette pane, click the Home tab, and then in the Palettes group, click
Insert from Palette.
2. To add an entity, select a representation at the top of the Entities section, select a palette from
the drop-down list, then drag an entity type onto the charting surface.
Tip: To add multiple entities of the same type, double-click the entity type, then click the charting
surface to add entities. To stop adding entities, press Esc. You can add multiple links in the same
way, in the Links section.
3. To add a link between two entities, select a palette from the drop-down list at the top of the Links
section, click a link type, then drag between the entities.
Related concepts
Entities
Entities represent real-world objects such as a people, locations, and bank accounts, or they
represent events such as meetings.
Links

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 39

A link represents a relationship between two entities, such as ownership of a vehicle by a person or a
transaction between two bank accounts. It is represented on the chart surface by a line between the
two entities.

Searching item types

If you know the name of the item type that you are looking for, you can search the palettes for it.
Searching palettes can save time when compared to browsing.

Procedure
To search for an entity type:
1. In the Insert from Palette pane, click the Search button at the top of the Entities section.
2. In the Search entity types box, type the first few characters of the entity type that you are looking
for. As you type, the list updates to display entity types that match the search text.
Note: You can search for link types in the same way in the Links section.

Adding information to items

You can add information that you have about a chart item into the properties of the item. You can use
analysis tools to gain insight from property values, and they can be displayed on the charting surface.

Procedure
• To edit the properties of an item, click the item on the charting surface, click the Home tab, and
then in the Edit Properties group click Data, Attributes, or Cards. In the Edit window, Analyst's
Notebook opens the corresponding folder of property pages.
Tip: To add the same information to several items at the same time, select them all, right-click on
one of the items, then click Combined Properties. For example, several telephones might have
the same area code. If some of the items already have a value for the property that you want to
edit, Analyst's Notebook displays blue hatching instead of a property value. You can collectively
modify date and time, description and grades, attributes, and style properties.
• To add an attribute:
a) In the Edit window, click Item Properties > Attributes.
b) Click Add.
c) Select an attribute class from a palette, then enter information.
Alternatively, in the Attributes panel of the Insert from Palette pane, click an attribute class,
enter or select a value, then click OK.
• To add a card:
a) In the Edit window, click Cards > Card List.
b) Click New.
c) Enter the information that you have.
You can include provenance information that is specific to the card, such as the source,
reliability of the source, reliability of the information, or its privacy rating.
• The Edit window contains a Style folder. You can use the properties in that folder to add an image
to the item. You can also use the pages in that folder to modify aspects of item appearance.

40 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Setting the identity
An entity's identity uniquely identifies it on the chart, regardless of how it is displayed. Analyzing
charts is typically based on the identity of entities.

About this task

No entities can share an identity. If you enter a value that is already used by another entity, the text
changes to the error text color.
You must edit the entity identity so that it is unique before proceeding.
Note: Identities are case-sensitive. "Brian GREEN" and "Brian Green" are both allowed as different
identities on the same chart.

Procedure
To set an identity:
1. Right-click an item, and select Edit Item Properties. The Edit window is shown.
2. Select Item Properties > Label & Identity.
3. Enter the identity of the chart item in the Identity box.
4. To set a label that is different from the identity, select Label is Different from Identity then enter
a label.
5. Optional: If an item has a database identity, it is shown in the Database Identities box.
6. Click OK.
Related concepts
Identities
An identity uniquely identifies an item on a chart or provides a unique link back to entity or link
information in a data source.

Setting the date & time

A chart item can have both a date and a time, or just a date or a time. It can also have a description of
approximately when it occurred, if the exact date and time is not known.

Procedure
To set the date & time:
1. Right-click an item, and select Edit Item Properties.
The Edit window is shown.
2. Select Item Properties > Date & Time and complete the Date & Time page.
3. Select the Date and Time check boxes and enter the date or time.
4. If you do not know the date or time, enter a description about when the event occurred.
For example, "In the afternoon".
5. Set the time zone for the item.
6. Select how the item is ordered on the chart:
Option Description
Free An item is free when it is not ordered and can be moved anywhere on
the chart.

Add information to a chart 41

Option Description
Ordered An item is ordered when it cannot be moved to the left and right of
other ordered items.
Controlling (Ordered An item is controlling when it is ordered and has both a date and time.
with Date & Time)
7. Click OK.
Related concepts
Time zones
When you create a chart that contains events that take place in different time zones, you can specify
in which time zone each event took place.

Setting the description & grades

All chart items are given grading information. Grades on an item classify or provide an evaluation of
some quality of the information that is represented by that item. For example, if the information is
reliable, confidential or from a trustworthy source.

Procedure
To set descriptions and grades:
1. Right-click an item, and select Edit Item Properties.
The Edit window is shown.
2. Select Item Properties > Description & Grades.
3. Enter the description.
4. Select the grades to add to an item from the lists in the Grades area. The following system is an
example of one such system, but this grading system might differ in your organization:
Option Description
Grade 1 A to E and Ungraded
Used for the reliability of the source of the information, where A signifies that there is
no doubt of the trustworthiness and competence of the source. E signifies that there is
considerable doubt.

Grade 2 1 - 5 and Ungraded

Used for the confidence in this particular piece of information that is provided by the
source, where one signifies that the information is known to be true. Five signifies that
the information is suspected to be false or malicious.

Grade 3 1 - 5 and Ungraded

Used for the privacy rating of the information, that is, its confidentiality status, where
one signifies that it can be freely disseminated to other suitable agencies. Five signifies
that it must not be disseminated to anyone without explicit permission.

5. Select the source type.

For example, a source type might be Informant, Witness, or Officer.
6. Select or enter a source reference.
7. Click OK.

42 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Related concepts
Provenance information
The ability to track information to the original source and to assess the reliability of the information or
the source is important in investigations.

Adding an image
You can replace the standard icons that Analyst's Notebook uses for icon, theme line, and event
frame representations with custom images. An image can help to provide extra information.

About this task

When you add an image to an entity, it is shown instead of the entity type icon. Images can be used
on the Representation Types: icons, theme lines, and event frames. For example, you can use
photographs to show people, or CCTV images to chart a sequence of events.

Procedure
To add an image to your selection:
1. Right-click an item, and select Edit Item Properties. The Edit window is shown.
2. Select Style > Picture.
3. Locate the image that you want to add. If you know where the image is stored, you can browse to
this location. You can also paste an image from the clipboard.
Tip: The Picture Preview area of the Edit window shows how the picture appears.
4. Set the size of the image by selecting one of the following options:
Option Description
Enlargement Set the enlargement size of the picture.
Custom Use the slider to change the size of the picture.
5. Click OK.

Adding a chart label

You can use labels to add annotations, chart summaries, or titles to an Analyst's Notebook chart.

Procedure
To add a chart label:
1. Click the Home tab, and then in the Insert Entities group, click Label.
2. Move the pointer where you want the label to be positioned. When it is over the charting surface,
the pointer changes to show that you are adding a label to the chart.
Tip: To cancel Insert mode, press Esc.
3. Click to add the label.
4. To change the label text, click the label. Enter the text, then click anywhere else on the chart.
Tip: Press Ctrl+Enter to enter a new line of text.

Add information to a chart 43

Import data
Data in formats such as text files or spreadsheets can be directly imported into Analyst's Notebook
using import specifications. You can run imports using existing specifications or create your own
designs by using the step-by-step import wizard. Import designs give you control over how Notebook
converts data into entities and links that are placed on the chart surface for analysis.
Before you start importing data, it is important to understand the different paths that you can follow
to achieve a successful result. You can begin the import process with your source data or with an
import specification. It is also important to note that the appearance and behavior of the user
interface changes, depending on your application and server connections. If you are not connected to
an i2 Analyze server, you are working unaligned to a schema and this is referred to as 'classic' mode.
Data that is imported in classic mode cannot be uploaded as a new record in the Information Store.
When you are connected to an i2 Analyze server, the user interface gains more options. The import
process is aligned to your server's schema and the properties and values available depend on the
schema the server is using. Schema aligned import data can be uploaded to the Information Store.

Import data formats

Analyst's Notebook can import data from spreadsheet files, XML files, and from any text file in which
each line describes a similar but discrete piece of information. For most formats, you create an import
specification to describe how the data is interpreted as entities and links on the chart surface. Some
formats are recognized by Analyst's Notebook and the data is imported without a specification.
Analyst's Notebook can import text and spreadsheet data in the following formats. To import data in
any of these formats, you need to use an import specification to define the entities that are
represented by the data and the links between those entities. An import specification might exist for
the format you want to import, or you can create a new specification to interpret your data. You
should convert XML data in to CSV or XLS format, or transform the data into ANX XML.

Format Description
Text files In text files that are suitable for import, the lines of data have a
(.txt, .csv, .tsv) consistent format. The data for one item is never broken across lines.
Data can be separated by tabs or with a syntactical separator such as a
comma. Some text file formats are predefined, for example a tab-
separated value file (.tsv) or a comma-separated value file (.csv).

Clipboard Analyst's Notebook can import text data from the Windows clipboard in
any of the supported formats.
Microsoft Excel Analyst's Notebook interprets the rows and columns of a spreadsheet in
spreadsheet file the same way that it interprets the lines and separators of a text file.
(.xls, .xlsx)

If the data is in an XML file format that is recognized by Analyst's Notebook, such as an Exchange file,
an import specification is not necessary.
Note: Data imports from XML files cannot be used to create records in i2 Analyze.

44 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Format Description
Analyst's Notebook Exchange Exchange files contain a standardized XML representation of the
file (.anx) data on an Analyst's Notebook chart.

Importing with a specification

An import specification defines how Analyst's Notebook interprets data imported from other file
formats and converts the data into entities and links for analysis on the chart surface.
An import specification controls how your data is imported and displayed. You can work with import
specifications in three distinct ways, depending on what is appropriate for your data. You can run your
import with an existing specification, edit an existing specification, or create a new specification.
When you choose your data source, which can be a text file, data on your clipboard, or a spreadsheet,
Analyst's Notebook inspects the data and lists any import specifications that are compatible. You do
not have to use a suggested specification and can create a new specification for any of these data
sources.
Note: Depending on the application you use, and whether you are connected to an i2 Analyze server,
there are different types of import specifications. The 'classic' unaligned specifications that are used
in Analyst's Notebook have a file extension of .ximp. The import specifications in Analyst's Notebook
Premium, are aligned to a schema and have a file extension of .oimp. The schema controls what
items are available when you define your import, which is different from a standard template in
Analyst's Notebook. You cannot convert .ximp specifications into .oimp files or upload them to the
Information Store.

Starting from a data source

Analyst's Notebook supports data import from a number of sources. When you select the data source
for your import, Analyst's Notebook examines the data and searches for compatible import
specifications.

Procedure
To locate files for import:
1. Click the Home tab, and then click Import. A list of options is displayed in a drop-down menu.
Option Description
Import from File Opens the Select Data File to Import window.
Import from Clipboard Opens the Clipboard Preview window and
shows any text data on your clipboard.
Import from Excel Spreadsheet Opens the Select Data File to Import window
and shows any spreadsheet files.
2. Select the option from the menu that describes the data you want to import.
a) If you select a text file format such as .txt, the Select How to Import the File pane opens.
b) If you select a spreadsheet file format such as .xls, the Select How to Import the File pane
opens with an extra option to select a worksheet. If your spreadsheet contains only a single
worksheet, that worksheet is selected automatically.
c) If you want to select data from your clipboard, you need to copy the data to the clipboard. The
Clipboard Preview window shows the contents of the clipboard. If the clipboard contains the
correct data, click Continue.

Add information to a chart 45

If Analyst's Notebook identifies any suitable specifications, they are listed in the Select How to
Import the File window. A flag next to each specification indicates the quality of the match:

No flag Column headers in the specification match column headers in the data source you are
importing. You can use this specification to import the data in the same way that you
imported previous data with this specification.

No column headers are defined in the specification. The specification is a match for the
data, based on a comparison between the format of the data in the first few rows of the
file and the format that is expected by the specification.
You can use this specification as a template to create a new specification. The new
specification might not require any changes or only minor changes to be suitable for
your data.

There are incompatibilities between the data source and the specification. Successful
import is not possible.
Note: Specifications in this category are not listed unless you clear the List only
specifications that match the import data check box.

3. To use a specification that is listed to run the import, click Use existing specification, select the
specification, then click OK.
The application displays the Importing window to report on the progress of the import process.
The window contains the following information:
• The duration of the import process
• An indication of whether the process was successful
• A count of how many entities and links were created
4. Optional: In the Importing window, click Save Report to save detailed information about the
import process as an HTML file.
Note: If you do not take this opportunity to save a report, you do not have a permanent record of
the import process.

What to do next
If your data is not compatible with an existing specification, you can import your data with a new
specification or you can use an existing specification as a template.

Starting from an import specification

You can import data into Analyst's Notebook from a location that is defined by an import specification
rather than starting from the data source.

About this task

You can view existing specifications and decide on the importing tasks that are appropriate for the
data you want to import.

46 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Procedure
1. To use an existing specification to import data from the same location as the last time the import
was run:
a) From the Home tab, click Import > Saved Specifications. The Import Specifications window
is displayed.
b) Select a specification from the list in the Import Specifications window.
c) In the Importing Tasks pane, select Import with selected specification & last file.
2. To use an existing specification to import data in the same format at the last time the import was
run:
a) From the Home tab, click Import > Saved Specifications. The Import Specifications window
is displayed.
b) Select a specification from the list in the Import Specifications window.
c) In the Importing Tasks pane, select Import with selected specification. The Select Data File
to Import window is displayed.
d) Find the file that contains the data that you want to import, and then click Select.
After either of the first two steps, the application displays the Importing window to report on the
progress of the import process.
3. Optional: In the Importing window, click Save Report to save detailed information about the
import process as an HTML file.
Note: If you do not take this opportunity to save a report, you do not have a permanent record of
the import process.

What to do next
If you want to import data that requires you to create or edit an import specification, you can start
from the Importing Tasks pane. Follow the procedure for creating or editing an import specification.

Creating or editing an import specification

An import specification defines how Analyst's Notebook converts data into entities and links that it
can analyze. When you import data from spreadsheet or text files, you must either create an import
specification, or amend an existing specification to suit your needs.

About this task

Importing data into Analyst's Notebook involves choosing a source file and then finding a compatible
specification, or choosing a specification and applying it to one or more source files. If you need to
create or amend an import specification, both paths lead to a step-by-step wizard that allows you to
see how your specification processes the data in a particular source file.
As part of creating or editing an import specification, you provide the wizard with information about
the structure of the data in the source file. The wizard then gives you a fine level of control over how
the data in the file turns into entities and links on a chart. In particular, the wizard allows you to:
• Specify the format, the separators, and the meaning of white space in the data to be imported
• Include or exclude rows in the incoming data, individually or through rules
• Combine values in the data to be imported, or make bulk adjustments to them
• Specify the types of the entities and links to generate from each row of data
• Define mappings from the incoming data to the properties of entities and links
• Choose how Analyst's Notebook determines whether two incoming entities or links are the same

Add information to a chart 47

Depending on whether Analyst's Notebook is connected to an i2 Analyze server, the specifications
that you create are different, and those differences are reflected in the steps of the wizard. The
sequence and the purpose of the wizard, however, do not change.

Setting the import data structure

When you specify a source file (or the clipboard) to the import wizard, it analyzes the contents and
tries to deduce its structure. If the table that the wizard displays is not a good representation of your
data (for example, if the columns do not contain discrete values), you can adjust the settings
manually.

Procedure
To define the structure of the incoming data:
1. On the Define Columns page of the import wizard, set how your data is structured.
Option Description
Delimited Within each row, fields in the data are separated by particular characters called
delimiters.
Select any combination of the Comma, Semicolon, Tab, or Space check boxes.
Optionally, select Other and enter your own character.

Fixed Width Within each row, every field has the same width as the equivalent field in the other
rows. Each field within a row might have a different width, but the width of a
specific field is consistent throughout every row of the data.
Click the displayed data, and specify where each field begins:
• To insert a column break, click in the ruler area at the position where you want a
break.
• To move a column break, drag its vertical line to a new position.
• To delete a column break, double-click it.

By default, the wizard assumes that the incoming data uses the same text encoding as your operating
system. If the table contains characters that you do not recognize, you can tell the wizard to try a
different one.
2. Click Encoding. In the Encoding area, select an encoding option.
Option Description
Plain Text The incoming data contains only ASCII text, which includes only
punctuation marks, uppercase and lowercase Latin alphabetic characters,
and digits 0 - 9.
Regional Settings The incoming data uses the encoding that the operating system specifies
Default as the system default.
Other Encoding The incoming data uses the encoding that you select from a list.

The result of using the selected encoding for the incoming data is displayed in the Preview box. If
characters are not correctly displayed, select a different encoding. Otherwise, click OK.
3. When the table in the import wizard displays correctly formatted tabular data, click Next.

48 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Selecting rows for import
If a row in the incoming data is not intended for import, you can configure the import wizard to
exclude it. For example, a row in the data might contain column headers rather than values, or a
particular row might be invalid.

Procedure
If a row in the incoming data contains column headers instead of values to be imported:
• Select Extract column headers from row and enter the row number in the adjacent field.
The column headers above the table in the wizard change to display the names from the data.
If some rows in the incoming data are prefixed with a particular character to indicate that they do not
contain values:
• Select Ignore rows starting with and enter the character in the adjacent field.
Every row that begins with that character is excluded from the import.
After the rules do their work, you can exclude or reinstate individual rows:
• To exclude specific rows from the import, select the rows in the table and click Exclude Selected
Rows.
• To reinstate excluded rows, select the rows in the table and click Include Selected Rows.

Results
Rows that are excluded from the import are struck through in the table. The application does not
import excluded rows when you reach the end of the wizard.

Transforming incoming data

It is unlikely that all the incoming data is in the right format to be imported straight away. You might
need to join values in the source together so that they align with properties in the schema. You might
need to format particular values in a certain way. Or, you might need to tell Notebook what to do
when it detects a missing value. For these and similar reasons, you can specify actions that transform
the incoming data.

Combining columns
You can create new values in the incoming data by combining values from the existing columns. For
example, you might combine an "Area Code" column and "Local Number" column to create a "Full
Telephone Number" column.

About this task

You combine columns by adding a new column, choosing which existing columns to combine, and
specifying how to combine them. User-defined data columns are identified in the data preview table
with a highlight color.

Procedure
To merge columns:
1. On the Column Actions page, click New.
The New Column window is displayed.
2. Enter a name in the Enter the name of the new column field.
For example, you might enter "Full Telephone Number".
3. From the Source Columns list, double-click a column or a separator to add it to the Joined
Columns list.

Add information to a chart 49

The Joined Columns list specifies the columns and separators that are used in the new column,
and the order that they are used in.
For example, you might combine an "Area Code" column and a "Local Number" column and
separate them with a space:
a) Double-click "Area Code" in the Source Columns list.
b) Double-click (space).
c) Double-click "Local Number".
4. To change the position of a column or separator in the new column, select the column or separator
in the Joined Columns list and click Up or Down.
5. Click OK.
The new column is created.

Modifying values
You can use column actions to modify incoming data values. For example, you can remove specific
characters, or change the capitalization of text. You can also configure a column action to modify data
only when specific conditions are met.

About this task

Through column actions, you can change the text in a column to uppercase, prefix it, or replace it with
a value from a substitution file. Equally, you might decide to remove ordinal suffixes such as st, nd,
rd, and th from (English-language) dates. These transformations are actions, and you can apply any
number of them to individual data columns. The wizard indicates modifications in the data preview
table with a graphic symbol.
The wizard applies actions sequentially, in the order that they are displayed in the Actions Applied
list.
If the Stop processing subsequent actions when conditions are met check box is selected, a
column action is applied to any value in the column that meets the conditions, but no further actions
are applied to those values.

Procedure
To create a column action and apply it to a column:
1. Select the column that you want to modify.
2. From the Available Actions list, select a column action and then use the arrow buttons to move it
to the Actions Applied list.
The wizard displays an icon in the header of the selected column to indicate that a column action
is set.
3. Configure the settings for the column action.
The configuration for each action is different.
For example, if you select the Add Prefix action, you must enter the prefix that you want to add.
4. Optional: Configure the column action to modify values only when specific conditions are met.
You can create more than one condition.
a) In the Condition list of the Apply only when the following conditions are met box, select a
condition.
b) Enter an appropriate value into the Value field.
c) Optional: To stop processing subsequent actions when the conditions are met, select the Stop
processing subsequent actions when conditions are met check box.

50 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Results
The table at the top of the page reflects the effect of your new column action on the incoming data.

Column actions
The Analyst's Notebook import wizard provides column actions that can modify incoming data in
several different ways. The following table contains a complete list of the available actions.

Action Name Description

Add Prefix Adds characters immediately before the existing value. For example, if
you know that all the telephone numbers in the data have the same
area code, but that code isn't in the data, you can add it.
Add Suffix Adds characters immediately after the existing value.
Change Capitalization Changes the case of text. You can change case to lowercase or
uppercase, capitalize initial letters, or reverse the current capitalization.
Compress Repeated Replaces a repeated character with a single instance of that character.
Characters For example, automatically generated data might contain extra space
characters that you can use this column action to remove.
Copy Value from Previous Replaces the value in a column with the value from the same column in
Row the row above it.
Extract Text using Fixed Extracts a range of text from the value in a column by specifying the
Widths fixed positions of its first and last characters within the value. For
example, you might use this action to extract only the hours and
minutes from time values that contain seconds in the incoming data.
Extract Part using Splits column values into parts that are separated by a particular
Separators character. You can extract one or a range of parts from the value by
specifying their position within it. For example, using space as the
separator character, the value Andrew Peter Smith is made up of
three parts. To extract the middle name from the value, you type 2 in
the Extract part number box. To extract multiple parts, you can use
the Up to and including part option. Decide which direction you want
the count to begin from and click the corresponding button.
• From the beginning of the column, you can only include part numbers
that are greater than your first part. For example if your first part is 3,
you cannot include parts 1 and 2.
• From the end of the column, you can only include part numbers that
are less than your first part. For example, if your first part is 4, you
can include parts 1, 2 and 3.

Find and Replace Text Replaces a sequence of characters with another sequence of
characters. For example, to remove English ordinal suffixes, you can
replace st, nd, rd, and th with a sequence of zero characters.
Note: This column action can cause unintended changes. For example,
if you replace the st date ordinal suffix with zero characters, words
such as August might be modified too.

Prefix with Another Adds the value from another column to the beginning of the value in the
Column selected column. For example, you can prefix time values with date
values to create a combined date and time column. You can also
specify a separator character to use between the values.

Add information to a chart 51

Action Name Description
Remove Characters Removes all occurrences of the specified characters from each value.
You can configure the column action to remove spaces or tabs, and
enter custom characters to remove. For example, to remove ) and
( from telephone numbers like (863) 555 0140, enter () in the
Remove other characters field.
Remove Prefix Removes characters only when they appear at the beginning of values.
For example, you might remove "MR " from names like MR SMITH.
Remove Suffix Removes characters only when they appear at the end of data. For
example, you might remove " Esq" from Andrew SMITH Esq.
Replace from Substitution Replaces specific sequences of characters with other sequences of
File characters. For example, if your data contains marital status codes, you
can replace them with words: S=Single, M=Married, D=Divorced.
• The substitution file can have the extension .csv, .tsv, or .txt. The
file contains pairs of character sequences on each line.
• Each pair consists of a sequence of characters to find in values, a
separator, and a sequence of characters to replace the found
characters with. The separator can be a tab, a comma (,), an equals
sign (=), or a colon (:).
• To use a separator character as part of a character sequence, enclose
it in double quotation marks (") or precede it with a backslash (\). To
make the Analyst's Notebook disregard text in the file (to include a
comment, for example), precede it with a semicolon (;).

Replace Value Replaces a whole value with another value.

Suffix with Another Adds the value from another column to the end of the value in the
Column selected column. For example, you can suffix date values with time
values to create a combined date and time column. You can also
specify a separator character to use between the values.
Trim Characters Trims unwanted characters such as spaces, tabs, or others from the
beginnings and ends of values. For example, to trim { and } from
{Jelicos Restaurant}, click Trim other characters and enter {}.

Column action conditions

In the Analyst's Notebook import wizard, you can configure column actions so that they run only
when values meet specific conditions. The following table contains a complete list of the available
conditions.

Condition Description
Contains The value contains the specified sequence of characters.
Does not contain The value does not contain the specified sequence of characters.
Does not end with The value does not end with the specified sequence of characters.
Does not start with The value does not start with the specified sequence of characters.
Ends with The value ends with the specified sequence of characters.
Is blank The value is blank.

52 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Condition Description
Is not blank The value is not blank.
Length equal to The length of the value (in characters) is equal to the specified number.
Length greater than The length of the value (in characters) is greater than the specified
number.
Length less than The length of the value (in characters) is less than the specified
number.
Regular expression The value matches the pattern in the specified regular expression.
Starts with The value starts with the specified sequence of characters.

Exporting transformed data

When your import specification includes column actions that transform incoming data, you might
need to track the differences between the data in its source and the data you imported. The import
wizard allows you to export the modified data to a text file before you import it.

About this task

You can export the data that was modified by column actions to a comma-separated value file or a
tab-delimited text file.

Procedure
To export your data:
1. In the Column Actions page, click Export.
The Save Data As window is shown.
2. In the Save Data As window, select the folder to save the exported data in.
3. In the File name field, enter a file name for the exported data.
4. From the Save as type list, select the type of file *.txt or *.csv.
5. Click Save.
A file that contains the exported data is created with the specified file name in the selected folder.

Import designs
When you create an import specification, part of the process is to specify an import design. The
import design defines the structure and types of the entities and links that the import wizard creates
from each row in your data.
Creating an import design has up to three stages:
1. If you are working with a classic specification, you can use the Select Design page of the wizard to
select a representation of the relationships between the items you are importing. Otherwise, the
wizard moves straight to the Assign Columns page.
2. The import design appears on the Assign Columns page as a small entity and link chart. You can
edit the chart to select which types of entity and link are created in the chart when you import your
data.
3. The Assign Columns page is also where you provide the instructions that govern how values in the
incoming data become the property values of entities and links.
Note: For a schema-aligned specification, the available entities, links, and properties all depend
on the i2 Analyze schema on the server that you connected to most recently.

Add information to a chart 53

Adding entities and links to the import design
The entities and links that you add to the import design in an import specification should accurately
represent the real world data in the import file. A good design results in the creation of appropriate
entities and links in the chart.

About this task

The default import design on the Assign Columns page contains two entities that are connected by a
link. You can add entities and links to this basic design to reflect each row of data you want to import
and represent on your chart.
For example, an import file might contain telephone call data that also includes the names of
telephone owners. To represent calls in that situation, you might set the type of each entity in the
default design to Telephone (or Communications Device, or similar), and set the type of the link to
Telephone Call (or Communication). To represent the owners, you might go on to add two Person
entities to the design, and Owner links between each Person and Telephone.

Procedure
1. To add an entity, click Add New Entity above the import design. Within the import design, the
mouse pointer becomes an empty circle; click the left mouse button to add an entity.
2. To add a link, click Add New Link above the import design. Within the import design, drag a link
between two entities.

Setting entity or link types in the import design

Every entity and every link in an import design must have a type. The default import design contains
two entities and a link that you must set to reflect the incoming data. To use an import design, you
must set the type for each entity and link it contains.

Procedure
To set a type:
1. In the import design, click an entity or a link.
2. In the table to the right of the import design, select a type from the Type list.
The types in the list depend on the import specification. For a classic specification, they match the
types in the Analyst's Notebook template. For a specification that is aligned with an i2 Analyze
schema, they match the entity and link types in that schema.
Note: In the aligned case, any types that are invalid because of link end constraints have a red
cross next to them.
When you select a type, the import design displays the entity or link type name. If you selected an
entity type, the entity type icon is displayed in the import design.

Assigning incoming data to entity and link properties

After you create an import design, you can configure how the property values of imported entities and
links are set from the incoming data.

About this task

You can use values from incoming data as the property values of the entities and links that Analyst's
Notebook creates during the import process. For example, you might set the Call Duration property of
a Telephone Call link from a value in the Duration column of an import file.
Note: The details of assigning data are different, depending on whether you are working with a
schema-aligned or a classic import specification:

54 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

• In a classic specification, you can assign values to the properties of Analyst's Notebook items, and
to cards and attributes on those items.
• In a schema-aligned specification, you can assign values to the properties of i2 Analyze records.
In some cases, you can assign values from more than one column of import data to a property. For
example, a Full Name property might consist of data from a Given Name column and a Surname
column.

Procedure
To configure how a property value is set from incoming data:
1. In the import design, click an entity or a link.
The record or item properties are displayed to the right of the import design.
2. Drag a column from the preview table at the top of the wizard to a cell in the Value column of the
property list.
The column name is displayed in the property table within square brackets. For example,
[Duration].
3. To assign more than one column to a property value, hold the Shift key and drag a second column
to the cell in the Value column of the property table. The second column is also assigned to the
property value, and is separated from the first column by a space.
For example, [First Name] [Surname].
Note: You can use this technique to assign multiple columns to single-line text, multiple-line text,
or 'suggested from' properties (lists that you can type other values into). To achieve the same
effect for other properties, use column actions to create columns that contain multiple values
before you reach this point.
4. If you are working with a classic specification, then you must assign a column to the "Identity"
property of an entity that uniquely identifies it on the chart.
Depending on the data, you might use the number of a telephone, or the license place of a vehicle,
for example.
5. Choose what action to take when the import wizard encounters a blank value in a column.
a) Select the property name, and then click the browse button that appears next to the value.
b) In the window that opens, choose whether to replace a blank value with a fixed value.
c) If you are working with a classic specification, and the blank value is for the identity of an
entity, choose one of the following options:
• Do not create the entity
• Create the entity with a blank identity
• Create the entity and set its identity to, then enter a value.

Setting the direction of links

By setting the direction of the links that you import, you can show the flow of money in a financial
transaction, for example, or the instigator of a telephone call. You can give every link the same
direction, or you can set the link direction from values in the incoming data.

Procedure
To set the direction of an imported link:
1. Select a link in the import design.
The property table is displayed to the right of the import design and contains the Direction
property.

Add information to a chart 55

2. In the property table, browse in the Direction row.
The Edit window opens.
3. To assign the same direction to each link that is imported as a result of the design, select
Direction from... and then choose a direction from the list.
4. To assign direction from values in the incoming data:
a) Click Single column, and select the column that contains the data that determines link
direction.
b) In each Value field, enter the value that indicates that the link direction is set as illustrated. The
Value field is case-sensitive.
c) In the Any other value list, select a direction to assign any link that is not assigned a direction
as a result of the previous step.
d) Click OK.

Setting the strength of links

If you are working with a classic import specification that is not aligned to an i2 Analyze schema, you
can set the strength of imported links. You can give each link the same strength, or you can set link
strength from values in the incoming data.

About this task

Setting the strength of the links that you import can provide a visual representation of your
confidence in the data. For example, if you set the link strength to Tentative, the links display as
dotted lines instead of solid ones.

Procedure
To set link strength:
1. Select a link in the import design.
The property table is displayed to the right of the import design and contains the Strength
property. Unless previously modified, the property has a default value of Confirmed.
2. In the property table, select the Strength row, and then click the browse button that appears.
The Edit window opens.
3. To assign the same strength to each link that is imported as a result of the design, click Strength
and select a link strength from the list.
4. To assign strengths from values in the incoming data:
a) Click Single column, and select the column that contains the data that determines link
strength.
b) Optional: Select the Replace blank value with check box, and select a strength to assign when
no values are present in the data.
c) Click OK.

Setting grades for imported items

If you are working with a classic import specification that is not aligned to an i2 Analyze schema, you
can set the grades of imported items. Grades typically indicate source quality and information quality;
each chart has its own grading scheme.

Procedure
To set a grade:
1. Select an item in the import design.

56 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

The property table is displayed to the right of the import design and contains the Grade
properties. Unless previously modified, each grade has a default value of (lowest).
2. In the property table, select each grade row in turn, and click the browse button that appears.
The Edit window opens.
3. To assign the lowest grade to every imported item, select Lowest grade.
4. To assign the same grade to every imported item, select Grade and then choose a grade from the
list.
5. To assign a grade from values in the incoming data:
a) Select Single column, and select the column that contains the data that determines the grade.
b) Optional: Select the Replace blank values with check box, and select the grade to assign any
item that does not receive a grade as a result of the previous step.
c) Click OK.

Setting date and time formats

Often, the data that you import into Analyst's Notebook contains date and time information. In
general, this information can come in a range of different formats. If your data contains dates and
times, your import specification must tell the application how to interpret them.

About this task

You must specify how the values in each date, time, or date & time column that you assigned on the
Assign Columns page are formatted. To provide location context for date & time values, you must
select a time zone. If you do not specify the correct format, the application might import the data
incorrectly or fail to import the data at all.

Procedure
As soon as you assign an incoming column to a date, time, or date & time property in the design, the
import wizard gains a Date & Time Format page. To set a date and time format:
1. Click a column in the table at the top of the page.
If the values in the column do not match the selected format, a yellow triangle is displayed in the
column header. A yellow triangle is also displayed next to any values for which the format is
invalid.
2. Select a predefined date and time format, or enter a custom format:
a) To use a predefined date and time format, click a format in the list.
Each row contains an example of the format in use, and a description. If the format is not valid
for the data in the column, a warning is displayed in the table.
Note: A valid date format might not be the correct date format. For example, 10 December
2013 can be expressed as 10/12/2013 or 12/10/2013. If your import data expresses 10
December 2013 as 10/12/2013 within a column, the mm/dd/yyyy date format is valid for that
column, but is not correct.
If you think you have the correct format but the yellow triangle still appears, check the values in
your date and time columns for extra characters such as spaces. You can remove unwanted
characters by using Trim Characters on the Column Actions page.
b) To use a custom format, enter a date and time format in the Custom format field.
An example date and time value with that format is displayed in the adjacent field. If the format
is not valid for the data in the column, a warning is displayed in the table.

Add information to a chart 57

Tip: If an existing format is similar to the one you want to set, click a format in the list of
predefined formats and modify it.

Results
Date and time properties in the import design can now receive values from the incoming data
correctly.

Matching records
When you are creating or editing an import specification that is aligned with an i2 Analyze schema,
you can tell the import wizard to use system-wide rules to identify duplicate records in the incoming
data, on your chart, and in the Information Store. You can also use local matching to identify duplicate
entities and links in the data and on your chart.

About this task

When you use the system rules that are defined in your schema to identify and resolve duplicate
information, you limit the unnecessary creation of new records. For example, your incoming data
might contain details about a person that match with a record in the Information Store. If that record
was ingested from an external source, it is regarded as system governed. Analyst's Notebook selects
the system record for that person entity rather than creating a new record. If your data matches with
a record that is uploaded by another analyst, the existing record is used. Missing values in analyst
governed records can be enriched by incoming data, whereas system governed records are
unchanged.
Local matching is useful for identifying multiple entities and links in the incoming data and on the
chart. For example, a file that contains telephone call data is likely to refer to the same telephone
more than once. In that case, you probably want the chart to contain a single telephone entity with
links to other telephones, rather than lots of separate one-to-one relationships. Analyst's Notebook
also tells you if information in your data import already exists on your target chart.

Procedure
• To define record matching that uses system-wide rules:
a) Click System Matching. The wizard compares the property values that you assigned in Assign
Columns to the system rules. If the system rules require further assignments, a flag appears
next to System Matching. Hover your mouse pointer over the flag to see a detailed message
about your import. You can proceed with your import without assigning the required property
values, although revisiting your import design at this stage might improve the quality of your
record matching.
For example, in your import design you might have assigned a property value of Last Name to a
Person entity. If you have a system rule that looks for a match on Last Name, this identifies
matches in your import data and in the match locations you select. However, if the system rule
specifies Last Name and Passport Number, the wizard tells you which value is not assigned.
You can return to Assign Columns and add more property values to satisfy the requirements of
the system rules before you run the import.
b) Select the locations to include in record matching.
The import process uses the system-wide rules to identify matches in the incoming data,
Information Store records, and your target chart.
Note: System matching is used for entity records. If you want to match link records, you should
define these using local matching.
• To match records locally:

58 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

a) Examine the Imported Types box, which contains a list of the entities and links in your import
design.
b) Select the type that you want to work with.
The available options are different, depending on whether you chose an entity type or a link
type.
For entity types, you specify which property values must match in order for two incoming
entities to be considered as duplicates. When the values of all the selected properties match,
only one of the entities is imported. If a selected property has no value (but all of the other
values match), you can decide whether to treat it as a duplicate.
For link types, you have the additional option never to consider two links as duplicates,
regardless of any property values. Furthermore, the list of properties implicitly includes the
direction of a link. When two links have different directions, they are never treated as
duplicates.
c) Decide which property values determine what constitutes a match in your data.
For example, it might be reasonable in some cases to match Person entities according to the
combination of their given names and surnames. For data from a different source, you might
use a passport or social security number instead.
d) Click the check boxes in the Identity column to specify the properties to use for matching.

Results
When you run the import, a progress window is displayed. If matches are found, the import is paused.
Another window is displayed that shows you the number of matches between the imported data and
records from the locations you selected. This information is to help you understand what is happening
to your records during the import process and what other actions you might take. For example, if your
import data matches with multiple records in the Information Store, you might want to use the Get
Matches function to unite them.

What to do next
Click Continue to proceed with the import. When the import completes, a message is displayed to
show timing details and the numbers of entity and link records that were created or replaced.
Alternatively, you can click Cancel to end the import and return to the chart.

Complete import details

On the Import Details page of the import wizard, you can specify summary information about the
import specification so that you can review it quickly in future. It also gives you the ability to provide
some global settings for the import process.
On the Import Details page, you can:
• Add summary details for the specification, such as subject, author, or category information.
• Include custom details, such as codes or classifications that are specific to your organization or
investigation.
• Determine whether entities and links are imported to the current chart or a new chart.
• Set whether new chart items are also selected, and whether the selection should add or replace an
existing one.
• Choose a layout to apply to the new chart items.
• Place minimum and maximum limits on the number of links between any two entities.
• Enable a "verbose" mode that performs and reports on the import process row-by-row.
• For a specification that is aligned with an i2 Analyze schema:

Add information to a chart 59

– you can specify the security setting that all imported records receive.
– you can add source references to records as they are imported to the chart and choose to be
prompted to update the values each time you run the import specification.
These features are either not mandatory or they have default settings. If the other pages of the wizard
are complete, you can import data with your specification.

Setting the occurrences of imported links

Depending on the nature of the incoming data, you might not want to create connections between
entities when the number of links falls outside a defined range. You can also decide not to import
entities that are connected to only one other entity.

Procedure
1. On the Import Details page, select Link occurrences removed to open the Link Occurrence
Options window.
2. Select a check box and enter values in the corresponding boxes, as follows:
Option Description
Remove links with Connections are not created (and their links are not imported) when
occurrences below they would contain fewer than the specified number of links. The value
must be greater than or equal to one.
Remove links with Connections are not created (and their links are not imported) when
occurrences above they would contain more than the specified number of links. The value
must be greater than or equal to zero.
Remove single Entities are not imported when they have only one link within the
connections incoming data. Both the entity and the link are discarded.

Important: Use the Link Occurrence Options with caution. In removing entities and links during
the import process, you might discard information that is crucial to the analysis.
3. Click OK.
Your changes are confirmed on the Import Details page. You can change this option before you
run the import.

Applying a layout to an import specification

On the Import Details page of the import wizard, you can apply automatic layouts to the chart that
receives any new items. Layouts are applied in the sequence in which they are displayed in the list,
with the layout at the top of the list applied first.

About this task

The layout properties in the Select Layouts window are similar to the properties that are displayed if
you click the Arrange tab, click Layout Setup, and then select a layout from the list. However, any
changes that you make in the Select Layouts window are saved only in your import specification. The
layouts that you can select for your import are guided by the type of chart you generate.

Procedure
To set the layout of the chart that contains new items:
1. On the Import Details page, click Change in Layout imported items using.
2. Double-click a layout in the Available Layouts list. The layout is added to the Layouts Applied List.
3. Set the properties for the selected layout. The available properties vary from layout to layout.

60 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

4. Optional: Select the Layout imported items only check box to apply the layout only to the new
items, rather than the whole chart.
5. Click OK to return to the Import Details page.

Setting the security of imported records

An import specification that is aligned with an i2 Analyze schema must include the security dimension
values that records receive as they are created. Initially, the values in the specification match the
defaults in your user settings, but you can change this behavior on the Import Details page.

About this task

For a schema-aligned import specification, the Import Details page includes a list of all the
dimensions in the security schema of the i2 Analyze deployment.

Procedure
The procedure for providing default values is different for single-value and multi-value dimensions:
1. In the Security for imported records section of the Import Details page, choose the security
dimension for which you want to change the default value.
2. For a multi-value dimension, click the button to display the edit window, select all the dimension
values to use, and then click OK.
3. For a single-value dimension, use the drop-down list to select a default security value.

Saving an import specification

Analyst's Notebook supports saving import specifications during and after the creating and editing
processes. You can use a saved specification to import an updated version of the same data, or to
import new data that has a familiar format.

Procedure
To save a new import specification, or to save changes to an existing specification:
• On any page of the Edit Import Specification window, click Save.
If you are creating an import specification, the application prompts for a name.
To create an import specification from one that is already open for editing:
• On any page of the Edit Import Specification window, click the arrow next to Save, and then click
Save As.
The application prompts for a name for the new specification, and then opens the duplicate for
editing.

Managing import specifications

Analyst's Notebook supports a range of facilities for managing and organizing the import
specifications that you and others in your team create. As well as using the standard functions for
renaming and duplicating specifications, you can configure local and shared storage locations.

About this task

The tools for managing import specifications fall into two categories. You can change the behavior of
the application for all specifications, or you can operate on particular specifications.

Add information to a chart 61

Procedure
Analyst's Notebook supports storing import specifications in two locations that it calls "local" and
"workgroup". When you save a specification, you can choose which location it is stored in. You can
use configuration settings to change the target of both locations.
• Change the physical folders that the application uses as the "local" and "workgroup" folders:
a) In Analyst's Notebook, click the Home tab, and then click Import > Saved Specifications.
The Import Specifications window is displayed.
b) In the Other Tasks pane, select Change Local Folder or Change Workgroup Folder.
The Browse For Folder window is displayed, with any current setting selected.
c) Select or create a target folder, and then click OK.
Note: The intention is for the "workgroup" location to be a shared folder, but the application
does not enforce that guideline.
Analyst's Notebook displays import specifications from the "local" and "workgroup" locations in a
single list. The list of operations that you can perform then changes according to which (and how
many) specifications you select.
• Perform file system operations on one or more import specifications:
a) In Analyst's Notebook, click the Home tab, and then click Import > Saved Specifications.
The Import Specifications window is displayed.
b) Select one or more import specifications.
c) In the Specification Tasks pane, select one of the commands:

Option Description
Edit Open the import specification for editing.
Rename Edit the name of the import specification that you (and potentially
other users) see in the Saved Specifications window.
Duplicate Create a duplicate of the import specification. The new
specification has the same name as the original, with the prefix
"Copy of ".
Copy to Workgroup If the import specification is in the "local" location, copy it to the
Folder "workgroup" location.
Show data file in Open Windows Explorer at the location of the data file that is
Explorer stored in the import specification.
Show specification in Open Windows Explorer at the location of the import specification.
Explorer
Delete Delete the import specification.
By default, the Import Specifications window displays specifications that are relevant to your
context. In Analyst's Notebook, you see classic specifications. In Analyst's Notebook Premium with
Opal services, you see schema-aligned specifications. However, you can also work with classic
specifications in Analyst's Notebook Premium:
• In the Options pane of the Import Specifications window, select Show classic specifications.
Any classic specifications in the "local" or "workgroup" locations are added to the list.

62 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Automating file imports
If you have files in the same format that you regularly import, you can automate the process with a
command prompt utility. The import process can create items in a new or an existing chart.

About this task

Series Import is a command prompt utility that opens Analyst's Notebook if it is not already open. It
then automatically runs a named import specification to load data into the chart.
This utility allows multiple import specifications to be run without manual user intervention. A batch
file (.bat) can call the Series Import utility as many times as you need.
Note: To use Series Import with schema-aligned import specifications, you must include the file
extension .oimp when you create a batch file. For example, SeriesImport -b filename.oimp
-c.

Procedure
1. Create import specifications by using the standard import wizard.
2. Create a batch file that references your import specifications.
3. From a command prompt, run the batch file.

Example single file import

You can automatically run a single import specification against its associated data source. This
example creates a chart and adds the example data to it.

SeriesImport -b Example 1 Specification -c

Running this command results in the following actions:

• A new chart is created from the Standard template and given a default name, for example Chart1.
• The Example 1 Specification import specification is run, importing the data file Example 1.txt
(set in the import specification).

Example batch import

Using a batch file, you can run a series of imports that add data into multiple charts.

SeriesImport -b Example 1 Specification

SeriesImport -b Example 1 Specification -i Example 2.txt -c
SeriesImport -b Example 3 Specification -p Military.ant -c
SeriesImport -b Example 4 Specification -p Standard.ant -f

Running these batch files results in the following actions:

1. The Example 1 Specification import specification is run, importing the data file specified
within the specification. If a chart is already open, the data is imported into the existing chart.
2. The Example 1 Specification import specification is run, importing the data file
Example.2.txt. The data is imported into a new chart.
3. The Example 3 Specification import specification is run, importing the data file specified
within the specification. The data is imported into a new chart that is created from the Military
template.

Add information to a chart 63

4. In the same chart, the Example 4 Specification import specification is run, importing the
data file specified within the specification. The Standard template is merged with the original
Military template.

Importing data in XML format

Analyst's Notebook can import data that is stored in XML files if the files are converted to another
format or you provide a style sheet that transforms the data to a compatible format.

About this task

You could convert XML files to CSV or XLS format and build a specification to import your data.
Alternatively, you can transform XML data into Analyst's Notebook Exchange files with an XLST style
sheet. XML data that is converted into ANX XML structure can be imported into Analyst's Notebook
without an import specification.

Procedure
• To import XML data in Analyst's Notebook Exchange, you specify the location of the source file and
some processing instructions.
a) Click the Home tab, and then click Import > Import from Analyst's Notebook Exchange File.
Note: Despite its name, this command supports importing data in any XML format, not only
Analyst's Notebook Exchange files.
b) In the Select Data File to Import window, locate the file that contains your data, and then click
Open.
c) In the Import XML window, configure the behavior of the XML import wizard:

Apply Style Sheet If you are not importing an Analyst's Notebook Exchange (.anx) file,
select this option and specify an XSLT style sheet. The style sheet must
transform the XML so that it validates against the Analyst's Notebook
schema.
Create New Chart Select this option to import the data into a new chart instead of the
current chart.
Layout Imported Select this option to apply a peacock layout to the imported data. Any
Items items that are already on the chart are not affected.
Enable Enhanced Select this option to perform more careful validation before the data is
Validation Rules imported.
d) Click OK to import the data from the XML file that you selected.
When the import process finishes, the application displays a message that indicates the success or
failure of the process. If the import fails, the message includes the location of a log file.
Note: Data imports from XML files cannot be used to create records in i2 Analyze.

64 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

External searches
Some i2 Analyze servers allow you to access information from external data sources, as well as or
instead of the Information Store. The available data sources depend on how your system
administrator configured the server for your organization.
You can use the External Searches feature in Analyst's Notebook Premium to search external data
sources for information. Your system administrator can configure queries to accept parameters that
help to fine-tune your searching. Queries can also allow you to select items on the chart and use them
as seeds in more complex search operations.
For example, when the i2 Analyze server provides access to external data sources and the
Information Store, you can upload the results of external searches to the Information Store as new
records. You can use records from external sources to complement the analysis that you perform with
any other i2 Analyze records. You cannot create your own queries for external data sources, only your
system administrator can do that.

Searching external sources

Your system administrator can enable you to search multiple external data sources for information
that is relevant to your investigation, in various different ways. Analyst's Notebook Premium presents
all of the available queries in the External Searches window.

About this task

In general, you can categorize queries for external data sources according to two criteria: Whether
you can (or must) provide parameters, and whether you can (or must) specify seeds.
• When a query supports parameters, you can customize the query before you run it, with the aim of
seeing more targeted results. For example, a query that searches for people might be configured so
that you can specify ranges of birth dates. A query for cars might allow you to enter a partial license
plate.
• When a query supports seeds, it changes its behavior when (or does not work until) you select items
that are already on the chart. A query might use information from selected items for several
purposes:
– Some queries search for information in external sources that is related to information that is on
the chart. For example, they might try to find bank accounts that are known to be operated by a
selected person.
– Some queries use the information from a selected item as a starting point. For example, they
might search for telephone calls that happened at around the same time as a selected call.

Procedure
In Analyst's Notebook Premium, the External Searches window contains everything that you need in
order to understand, configure, and run the queries that search external data sources.
1. On the Home tab of the ribbon, click External Searches.
The External Searches window opens, and the queries that your system administrator defined are
listed on the Queries page.
2. Optional: Use the Filter these queries field to enter text that filters the list of queries by name.
3. Click a query to select it and display more information about it.
The pane on the right of the Queries page lists the actions that you can perform with the selected
query. The same pane also describes what types of information the query can return, indicates

Add information to a chart 65

whether the query supports or requires seeds, and might include a longer explanation of its
behavior.
4. Unless the query requires seeds that you have not selected, you can click Open.
What happens next depends on whether the query supports parameters:
• If the query does not support parameters, it runs immediately and you see a new page that
contains search results from the external data source.
• If the query does support parameters, you see a new page where you can enter values for those
parameters before you run the search.
Note: Queries that have no mandatory parameters have an extra action: Copy to chart. This action
copies any search results straight to the chart without first showing them in a list.

Results
After the query runs, the External Searches window gains a Results view that contains the search
results. From here, you can select results and copy them to the chart surface, or you can refine your
search by filtering the results.

Running a parameterized query

Opening a query that supports parameters from the External Searches window in Analyst's Notebook
is different from opening one that does not. Parameterized queries prompt you to enter search
condition values before you run them, with the aim of producing more targeted results.

Procedure
1. Follow the general procedure for searching external sources as far as Step 4: Open the External
Searches window, select a query, and click Open.
When a parameterized query opens, the External Searches window gains a new tab that contains
a Conditions view.
The Conditions view can be different for every query. Its appearance depends on how your system
administrator configured it. The main area of the view contains fields where you provide the condition
values that customize the query when it runs.
2. Enter a value for every mandatory field, and as many of the other fields as you need.
Mandatory fields are initially colored red, and change color to indicate that your entry meets the
rules for the value. If your entry is not valid, a message beneath the field advises you what change
you need to make.
3. Click Run to start the query.

Results
After the query runs, the tab in the External Searches window that has the Conditions view gains a
Results view that contains the search results. From here, you can select results and copy them to the
chart surface, or you can refine your search by filtering the results.
You can also switch between the Results view and the Conditions view by using the directional
arrows on the information bar. In this way, you can rerun the query with modified parameters without
returning to the Queries list.

66 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Running a seeded query
To run a query that supports seeds against an external data source, you must first understand the
kinds of seeds that it requires, and select some on an Analyst's Notebook chart. When you satisfy the
requirements, the query becomes available for use.

About this task

When a system administrator configures a seeded query on an external data source, they can place
restrictions on the types, number, and origin of the seeds that they require. Before you can open a
seeded query, you must select chart items that contain records that obey its restrictions, as indicated
in the Queries tab of the External Queries window.

Procedure
1. Follow the general procedure for searching external sources as far as Step 3: Open the External
Searches window and select a query.
When a query supports or requires seeds, the pane on the right of the Queries page describes what
you must select:
Seed type constraints
The types of seeds that the query uses, and the number of each type.
Seed count limits
Lower and upper boundaries (if any) on the total number of seeds.
Seed data sources
The data sources from which seeds must originate.
If one of these headings is not in the list, then the selected query has no requirements of that kind.
2. Select chart items that meet the requirements of the seeded query.
When your selection satisfies the query, the list changes in the Queries tab. A dynamic list of
seeded queries appears above the main list. Any query whose requirements are met by the
current chart selection appears in the new list.
3. Select the query in the new list, and then click Open or Copy to chart, depending on whether the
seeded query also supports or requires parameters.

Results
After this point, the seeded query behaves just like any other query against an external data source.
You can specify parameters or browse search results, and then add results to the chart or filter them
further.

Matching records on the chart

When you copy a record from an external data source that matches with a record on your chart,
Analyst's Notebook updates the chart record with incoming data instead of creating a duplicate
record.

About this task

When you run a search query against an external data source, some of the returned records might
match with records on your chart. The chart records are updated with data from the incoming
records. For example, you create a person record for Sam Steele on your chart. You add property
values of age and hair color, which is brown. You then run an external search query that finds a match
with a record for Sam Steele. The incoming record has no property value entered for age and hair
color is black. Analyst's Notebook updates your chart record with all the data from the incoming

Add information to a chart 67

record, including changing hair color to black. Existing values on your chart record are maintained
when the incoming record has blank properties. Updates can also include security settings and
source references.
This is a useful way to improve the quality of your data, as you can enrich your records with
information from other sources and manage unnecessary duplication.
Note: Records created by an Analyst are regarded as analyst governed. When you copy records from
an external search, record matching occurs between analyst governed records and the incoming
records. System governed records are not matched, however you can use Get Matches to copy these
records to the chart. You can use Find Matching Records to resolve duplicate records that are already
on the chart.

Procedure
1. On the Home tab of the ribbon, click External Searches and run your search query.
2. Select the records you want to copy to the chart.
The Copying records to charts message is displayed. If matches are found, the Matches Found
Dialog is displayed.
3. The number of system governed and analyst governed records with matches are reported in the
Matches Found Dialog. You can choose to cancel the operation or continue.

Results
If you choose to copy the matched records found in your external search, your charts records are
updated with data from matching analyst governed records. System governed records are copied to
the chart.

68 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Working with an Information Store
An Information Store is a centralized data store that holds large volumes of analysis-ready data. If
you are using Analyst's Notebook Premium with Opal services, you can connect to i2 Analyze and log
in to an Information Store.

Connecting to an Information Store

Before you can search for, create, update, or delete the records in an Information Store, you must
connect to and log in to it through Analyst's Notebook Premium.

Procedure
1. If you do not already know them, find out the address (URL) of the Information Store and your
login details (user name and password) from your system administrator.

2. Click Change Connection Details in the upper-right corner of the application window.
3. Enter the URL of the Information Store and click Connect.
4. If you are prompted, enter your user name and password and click Log in.
Note: When you are logged in, if you don't do anything, then after a short time you might be
automatically logged out.

Key concepts
When you connect to an Information Store from Analyst's Notebook Premium, the application
undergoes some changes to its appearance and its behavior. The user interface gains options that
help you to interact with the Information Store, while some other features become unavailable.
The data in an Information Store is contained in records. When you connect to an Information Store
and use Analyst's Notebook Premium to visualize its data, the chart items that you create contain
records copied from the store. When you use Analyst's Notebook Premium to create records, you can
upload them to the Information Store and share their information with other authorized people.
Record bar
The first and most obvious change to the Analyst's Notebook user interface when you connect to
an Information Store is the record bar that appears below the ribbon. The buttons in the record
bar display information about the numbers of records in the chart that have different types and
states. Clicking the buttons selects all the chart items that contain records that have a particular
type or state, so that you can work with them quickly.
• Entity records
• Link records
• New records
• Edited records
• Records with changes available
• Edited records with changes available
• Orphaned records

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 69

Items and records
When Analyst's Notebook Premium is connected to an Information Store, the items that you add to a
chart can contain i2 Analyze records. From the application's point of view, each record holds of a set
of information about the item that contains it. The appearance of the item depends on the information
in the records that it contains.
An i2 Analyze record can contain properties with values; details about its history and settings; and
notes that you or other contributors have added to provide extra information.
Properties
Properties are the primary mechanism for storing information in a record. Each property contains
a piece of data about an entity or link record of a particular type. For example, a 'Person' entity
record might have property types such as 'Given Name', 'Date of Birth', and 'Passport Number'.
Adding information to property values allows that information to be categorized and analyzed in
different ways. Some property values affect the appearance of the item that contains them, such
as when they are used as the label.
Details
In addition to the property values, records contain information about who has permission to view
them, who created or modified them in the past, and where they came from. These details might
enable you to talk to the person who created a record, or to determine who else has access to it.
Notes
Notes allow you to add information to a record that is not dependent on its type. You can add a
note to a record to provide information that is not included in any of the properties. Furthermore,
you can add notes to records that were loaded into the Information Store from external sources
without affecting the original information.
Note: Your organization controls your access to records in the Information Store. Based on your
access level, you might not be able to access restricted records, or perform specific tasks such as
uploading records, deleting records, and accessing notes.

Records in chart items

The chart always has all the data for all the records in all the items that it contains. You can work with
the records on the chart even when you are not connected to the Information Store:
• When you search for and retrieve information from the Information Store to Analyst's Notebook
Premium, the application creates chart items that contain copies of the Information Store records.
• If you create an item that contains an i2 Analyze record (through the Information Store palette), the
application stores the new record in the chart until you can upload it to the store.
Analyst's Notebook treats items that contain i2 Analyze records differently from standard Analyst's
Notebook items. For example, item properties such as the label are derived from property values in
the record, and so some of the Analyst's Notebook options for editing these items are disabled.
Even when you are connected to an Information Store, charts can also contain items that do not use
the Information Store schema. When you create these items, the properties that they contain are
based on types that are defined in an Analyst's Notebook chart template. You cannot upload records
to the Information Store from items that do not contain i2 Analyze records.
Note: Other chart items might originate from another data source such as iBase and contain data
records.

70 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Multiple records in one chart item
Chart items in Analyst's Notebook Premium can contain multiple i2 Analyze records. If you merge two
entities that contain records, the result is a single entity that contains two records. If there are several
link records that connect the same two entities on the chart, you can choose to represent them as a
single link item.

Merged entities and existing links

When you merge two i2 Analyze entities, the resulting entity contains the records from both entities:

Any links that were connected to the original entities are retained on the merged entity:

Each link is connected to the record in the entity to which it was originally connected.
In the Information Store, link records connect two entity records. Therefore, when you create an i2
Analyze link between two i2 Analyze entities on your chart, the link connects to a particular record in
each entity.

Lead records
When a chart item contains multiple i2 Analyze records, one of the records must be assigned as the
lead record. The lead record is used in the following ways:
• Analyst's Notebook Premium bases the label that is displayed on the chart surface for an item on
information in the lead record.

Working with an Information Store 71

• When you create an i2 Analyze link, the link is connected to the lead record in each of its ends.
When you upload the link to the Information Store, the link connects those records.
In entities that contain multiple records, the lead record is shown in the Record Inspector with a blue

diamond . If you need to, you can change the lead record assignment before you create a link.
Changing the lead record can also cause the label and the icon on the chart to change.

Sharing information
When you work with the Information Store, you can share information and assertions with other
analysts and find out whether other analysts have findings that are of interest to you. You can share
information with other analysts by uploading new or edited records and notes to the Information
Store.
There are many reasons to share your information. For example:
• To share records that you have created
• To update shared information with new intelligence
• To add notes to new or existing records that provide more insight about an item, or provide
operational information
However, there are also times when you might not want to share or update information. For example,
in evidential situations, you might not be allowed (or it might be inadvisable) to share your proposals
for further investigation before they are confirmed.
The security settings and processes in your organization might constrain which records you can and
cannot share.

Searching the Information Store

You can find records of interest in the Information Store by searching for terms that they might
contain, or by using a structured search to look for data in specific properties. You can also use a
structured search to discover relationships.
Different search tools in the Search Information Store group on the Home tab of the ribbon fulfill
different needs:
Quick Search
Search for text that appears in the records stored in your Information Store. You can filter the
results of a Quick Search after the search completes to help you to find the information you need.
Visual Query
Create searches that allow you to find specific structures in the data. You can draw the structure
that you are looking for and use conditions to constrain the search.
Expand
When chart entities contain copies of records from the Information Store, you can expand to find
connected records, and add items that contain copies of those records to the chart.
Expand with Conditions
Instead of copying all the connected records to your chart, you can add conditions to the expand
function so that you copy records only of particular types.

72 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Get Path
You can select two entities on your chart and find the paths that connect them.
Get Matches
You can find out whether selected records on your chart match with records in the Information
Store.

Using Quick Search

You can use Quick Search to find records of interest in the Information Store by specifying terms that
they might contain. After you receive the first set of results, you can refine them to find the records
that you are most interested in.

About this task

You can use Analyst's Notebook Premium to find records in the Information Store that match search
terms that you enter. By default, the application finds records that closely or exactly match all the
terms that you enter. You can use operators and rules to change the default behavior.
Matching behavior
By adding special characters to your search term, you can control the level of specificity:

" " To search for an exact word or phrase, enclose it in double quotation marks. For
example, "John Doe" matches the phrase John Doe but not the word John.
" "~integ To search for terms that are within a specified distance from each other, enclose
er two or more terms in double quotation marks followed by tilde (~) and an integer
value. The integer specifies the distance limit, where the distance is the number of
words that can be between each pair of terms. For example, "John Doe"~1
matches John James Doe but not John James Simon Doe.
To match terms in a different order, changing the order of the terms counts as a
distance of 2 towards the total distance value. For example, "Doe John"~1 does
not match John James Doe, but "Doe John"~3 does.
To return a match, each word in the search term must be within the specified
distance of any adjacent words in the search term.

? Matches a single unknown character. For example, J?n matches Jan and Jon but
not Jean.
* Matches zero or more unknown characters. For example, J*n matches Jn, Jan,
Jon, and Jean.

Logical operators
By default, when you search for multiple words, the results must match all the words that you
enter. For example, John Doe (no double quotation marks) searches for items that contain words
like John and words like Doe. You can change the search behavior and build more complicated
searches by using the following logical operators:

AND Searches for records that contain all words or phrases. For example, Offense AND
"John Doe" searches for records that contain words like Offense and also contain the
exact phrase John Doe.

Working with an Information Store 73

OR Searches for records that contain at least one word or phrase. For example, Offense OR
"John Doe" searches for records that contain words like Offense, or the exact phrase
John Doe, or both.
NOT Searches for records that do not contain the word or phrase. For example, Offense NOT
"John Doe" searches for records that contain words like Offense but do not contain the
exact phrase John Doe.

Search scope

You can use the Advanced option to specify where term matches are found.

Procedure
1. On the Home tab of the ribbon, in the Search Information Store group, click Quick Search.
The Information Store Quick Search window opens.
2. Type the terms that you want to search for, and press Enter.
When you type the search terms, Analyst's Notebook Premium explains how it interprets the
search expression. For example, it shows the locations of implicit AND operators, and inserts
parentheses to make operator precedence explicit.
When you press Enter, Analyst's Notebook Premium searches the Information Store, and displays
the results.
3. After you receive results, you can refine the search terms or use filtering to reduce the result set.
To filter results based on record types, property values, or metadata, select a type and then
choose one or more properties or metadata categories to filter by.
For example, a search for the word Ford might display results for people and cars. Select the
Person type to display results for people, and then select properties that are related to the
person's name to filter out everything except people whose name contains a word like Ford.
Each filter is displayed at the top of the window.
Note: To remove a filter, delete it by clicking the cross next to the filter.

What to do next
When the search results are displayed, you can copy one or more of the records that they represent to
your chart.

Structured searching
You can use Visual Query to search for records in the Information Store based on the values of
specific properties and on their relationships to other records. The records that you find depend on
the structure of the queries that you create.
Two steps are involved in building a Visual Query:
• Define the structure of the query to indicate the types and relationships of the records that you are
interested in.
• Add conditions to the items in the structure to define some of the values in the records that you
want to find.

74 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Visual Query structure
Any query structure that you build defines the types of records that you are searching for and the
relationships between them.
The query structure constrains the search by type and by relationship. It can consist of:
• A single query entity
For example, a query structure that contains only a Person can find people in the Information Store
regardless of any relationships they might have.
• An entity-link-entity query combination
For example, a query structure that contains a Person, a Vehicle, and an Owner link between them
can find people who own vehicles.
• A more complex network of query items
For example, a query structure that contains a Person that is linked to a Vehicle with an Owner link,
and linked to an Account with an Account Holder link. This query can find people who own vehicles
and are account holders.
As part of the query structure, you must specify the query item whose type the results must match by
setting an output flag on exactly one query item. For example, you might have a query structure of
Person that is linked to Vehicle with an Owner link. If you set the output flag on the Person query
entity, you are searching for people who own vehicles, and the results contain people. If you set the
output flag on the Vehicle query entity, you are searching for Vehicles that are owned by people, and
the results contain vehicles. If you set the output flag on the Owner query link, the search results
contain links and the entities at each end of the links.
By default, the output flag is given to the first query item that you add to the structure, but you can
change the query item that has the output flag at any time.
When you define a query structure, you can:
• Specify link direction on any of the links in the structure. For example, you might want to search for
transaction links from an Account that has a specific account number to any other account.
• Indicate that multiple items of a type must be present to meet the query criteria by adding a count
flag on an item in the query structure. For example, you might want to search for accounts that are
involved in transactions to at least two accounts that meet certain criteria. You can specify a count
value of two when you add query conditions. You cannot specify a count flag on more than one
query item.

Defining the structure of a Visual Query

The first step of a Visual Query is to define the structure by adding query items.

Procedure
1. On the Home tab of the ribbon, in the Search Information Store group, click Visual Query.
The Information Store Visual Query window opens. If you have used the Visual Query feature
before, there might be a list of saved queries in the window.
2. Open a saved query, or click New query to create one.
Analyst's Notebook opens a new tab in the Information Store Visual Query window.
For a new query, the Edit query structure window opens immediately. For a saved query, you can

click the Edit structure button .

Working with an Information Store 75

3. In the Edit query structure window, add the query entities that represent the structure that you
want to find. To add a query entity, drag an entity type from the query palette to the query surface.
4. Link the query entities in the structure with the query links that you want to find. To create a link,

select the two query entities that you want to link, then click the Add Link button , and select
a link type.
5. Optional: To add a direction to a query link, select the link, then click the Set direction button

, and select a direction.

6. Optional: To indicate that the structure must contain multiple records for a query item, set a count
on the query item. Select the query item in the query structure, then click the Add Count button

.
You can set a count on only one item in the query structure. If you set a count on a second item,
the first one is removed. Set the value on the count flag later, when you add conditions.
7. By default, the first item you add to the query structure is given the output flag. To give a different
item in the query structure the output flag, select the item, then click the Set as Output button

.
The output flag is removed from the original item.
8. Click Done.
After you click Done, you can edit the query structure at any time by clicking the Edit structure

button .

What to do next
After you define the query structure, add conditions to the items in the structure, and then run the
query.
Related concepts
Visual Query conditions
You can constrain a search according to the properties of records in the Information Store by adding
conditions to the Visual Query. You can add conditions to any of the items in a query structure.
Related tasks
Adding conditions to a Visual Query

76 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

After you define the structure of a Visual Query, you can add query conditions to the items in the
query structure to look for records with specific values in their properties.

Visual Query conditions

You can constrain a search according to the properties of records in the Information Store by adding
conditions to the Visual Query. You can add conditions to any of the items in a query structure.
A query condition is made up of a property type, an operator, and one or more values. The number of
values depends on the operator that you choose.
By adding query conditions, you can look for records with specific values or ranges of values in their
properties. You can narrow the focus of the search by gradually adding more conditions, increasing
the complexity of the query. For example:
• If your query structure consists of a single Person type, you can narrow the focus to search for all
people with the given name John and family name Doe.
• By adding query conditions to more than one query item, you can find people called John Doe who
own a car with a license plate that starts ABC.
• By adding a count to a query structure, then entering a value of 2 for the count as part of the
conditions, you can find people who own at least two cars.
• By specifying characteristics that are described by a link between two accounts, you can identify
accounts that are involved in high value transactions, such as links that represent transactions of
value greater than $75000.
When you add conditions to a query, the first step is to select the query item, then the property type
within that query item for which you want to add conditions. After you select the property type,
several operators are available to use. For example, 'Between', 'Is exactly', 'Is not,' 'Matches wildcard
pattern'. The 'Between' operator is inclusive (it includes the values that you enter). Not all operators
are available for all property types.
When you add conditions to property types, there are several things to consider:
• Aspects of date and time property types
• Use of wildcards
• Multiple values in a single condition
• Whether all conditions have to be met (AND), or just one of the conditions must be met (OR), or a
combination of both

Date and time property types

For property types that store date, time, or date and time values, you can create conditions such as
'Date of Birth equal to 15 Mar 1966' or 'Date of Birth later than 01 Jan 1987'. However, you can also
add conditions that use aspects of such values, which allow you to search for transactions that were
made on any Monday, or dates of birth that are 1 Jan in any year.
When you create a date and time condition, you must choose an aspect to use. For example, Date of
Birth might appear in the Add Condition window several times with different aspects: Date of Birth »
Date, Date of Birth » Day of Week, Date of Birth » Month.
If you specify a time as part of a condition, you can choose how to deal with time zones. The choice
that you make affects the search that takes place. When you select a time zone, all times are
converted to that zone for comparison, so a time of 1pm GMT matches 8am EST. If you decide to
ignore time zones, times are compared literally, so that a time of 1pm GMT matches 1pm EST, as well
as 1pm in any other time zone.

Working with an Information Store 77

Wildcards
If the property value is a string, the 'Matches wildcard pattern' operator is available. The following
wildcards are supported:

? Matches a single unknown character. For example, J?n matches Jan and Jon but not Jean.
* Matches zero or more unknown characters. For example, J*n matches Jn, Jan, Jon, and Jean.

Multiple values
By default, each line in the value of a condition is treated as a single value, including any spaces and
wildcards. If the property value is a string and you select 'Is exactly' or 'Is not' as the operator, you
can enter several values. You can include more than one value by entering each value on a separate
line. If a text file contains the values that you want to use, you can import values from the file. Any file
that you use must have the file type .txt and must contain row-separated values.

Combining conditions
After you create one condition, you can add another that uses the same property type, or create
another on a different property type or a different query item.
If you specify conditions on different items in a query structure, the conditions on the different items
must all be met (AND). For example, if the structure of your query contains a Person entity that is
linked to a Vehicle entity, you might specify the following conditions:
• On the Person entity, Family Name is exactly Young.
• On the Vehicle entity, License Plate contains 123.
The query results contain people with the family name Young who are linked to a vehicle, which
contains 123 in the license plate.
Typically, when you add conditions on different property types of the same query item, all of the
conditions must be met (AND). However, it can depend on the property type.
If you add more than one condition on a single property type, how the conditions are combined
depends on the property type, the operators that you choose, and the order in which you add the
conditions. After you add a condition, the query indicates how the conditions will be combined (AND
or OR).
If you specify multiple values for a single condition, at least one of the values must be met (OR).

Adding conditions to a Visual Query

After you define the structure of a Visual Query, you can add query conditions to the items in the
query structure to look for records with specific values in their properties.

About this task

This example describes the conditions that you might specify for the following query.
Imagine that you want to search for people who are called John Doe, own a car, and hold at least two
accounts. The car is blue and the license plate starts with ABC. To achieve this query, the structure
must take the form of a Person that is connected to a Vehicle with an Owner link. The Person must
also be connected to an Account with an Account Holder link. The Person must be given the output
flag. The Account must be given a count flag.
You must then set the following query conditions:
• On the Person query entity:

78 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

– Given Name is exactly John.
– Family Name is exactly Doe.
• On the Vehicle query entity:
– Color is exactly Blue.
– License Plate starts with ABC.
• On the Account query entity, the count flag must have the value greater than or equal to 2.

Procedure
1. The Query conditions pane of a new or open query in the Information Store Visual Query window

contains a list of all the items in the query structure. Click the plus icon next to the item that
you want to add the condition to.
The Add or remove conditions window opens.
2. Select the property type or date and time aspect for which you want to add conditions and click
OK.
3. For each property type, select the operator and enter or select the value. For some property types
and operators, you can enter multiple values. To enter multiple values:

a) Click the Edit value list button next to the value.

b) Enter each value on a separate line.
c) Optional: If you have a text file that contains the values that you want to add, you can import it.
Click Import text file and browse to the file. Any file that you import must have the file
type .txt and must contain row separated values.
Note: Value fields in a condition have a maximum number of characters. If you try to import a
file that contains too many characters, no text is inserted.
Note: Searches are not case-sensitive.
4. To add a second or subsequent condition with the same property type, click the Actions button

next to the property type, then click Add Another.

5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 for the other entities and links in the query structure for which you want to add
conditions.
6. After you add the conditions, click Run.
Analyst's Notebook Premium searches the Information Store, and displays the results.
7. After you receive results, you can refine the search terms or use filtering to reduce the result set.
To filter results, select a value (or a value range) for a particular property or metadata category.
For example, a search for people with the first name John who are linked to an address might
display many results for the Person type. You might then select a property value range to filter out
all results except people whose date of birth falls in the range 1959 - 1964.
Each filter is displayed at the top of the window.
Note: To remove a filter, delete it by clicking the cross next to the filter.

Working with an Information Store 79

What to do next
When the search results are displayed, you can copy one or more of the records that they represent to
your chart.
Related concepts
Visual Query structure
Any query structure that you build defines the types of records that you are searching for and the
relationships between them.
Related tasks
Defining the structure of a Visual Query
The first step of a Visual Query is to define the structure by adding query items.

Saving a Visual Query

You can save a Visual Query so that you can run it on multiple occasions without repeatedly
specifying the same search structure and conditions. You can also arrange for a saved Visual Query to
run automatically and alert you when its results change from one run to the next.

About this task

When you are creating or editing a Visual Query in Analyst's Notebook, you can save it with a name
and a description that help you to find and run it again. The Information Store Visual Query window
contains a list of all the available queries, and provides features for managing them.
When you enable alerts for a saved Visual Query, i2 Analyze monitors the query results to detect
changes in the Information Store. If the query finds more records than it did when you activated the
setting, or some records no longer match the query, Analyst's Notebook displays an alert. To view
alerts and the records that caused them, click the Information Store Alerts button in the Analyst's
Notebook title bar.

Procedure
To save a new query, or to save an open query with a new name:
• On the same page as the Query structure pane, click Save as.
The Query details window appears.
• Enter a name and a description for the new Visual Query.
• If you want this query to generate alerts, select the check box.
You can change your decision later through the Alerts setting on the Saved queries tab.
• Click Save.
To save changes to a query that you opened from the list:
• On the same page as the Query structure pane, click Save.
Analyst's Notebook updates the saved Visual Query.

Results
Any Visual Query that you save is added or updated in the Saved queries list, and becomes available
for you to use whenever you log in to the connected i2 Analyze server. If you also enabled alerts, and
data that matches the query changes, then alerts appear in the Information Store Alerts list.

80 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Adding geographic locations to a Visual Query
When records contain geospatial properties, you can define a Visual Query that locates records based
on a search area in i2 Maps.

About this task

When you use i2 Maps as your map provider in Analyst's Notebook, you can define a search area by
drawing a rectangle or polygon on your base map. You can also define a specific area, district, or
region by using GeoJSON data from other applications.
For example, you might want to search for, and chart, people with connections to a particular
location. You can create a Visual Query with a geospatial condition as part of your query structure.
When you run the query, Analyst's Notebook finds the entity records that are linked to that area.
To get started, define the structure of your Visual Query in the usual way. You can add geospatial
conditions for entities that have a property type of Geographic Location.

Procedure
• To create a search area using Maps:

a) In the Query conditions pane of your Visual Query, click the plus icon next to the entity you
want to add the condition to.
The Add or remove condition window opens.
b) Select a Geographic Location property and click OK.

c) To edit the geospatial area, click the

icon.
The Edit search area window opens and displays the Map view. You can zoom in and out, and
pan to different parts of the map.
d) Optional: Click Options to see the base maps and overlay elements that are configured for your
deployment.
e) To draw a shape on the map, click either the polygon icon or the rectangle icon.

Polygon Click to insert the first point, then click to add

more points. Click on the first point again or
the Finish option to complete the polygon.
Rectangle Drag over the area and release the mouse
button to complete the rectangle.
f) Use the Edit shapes or Delete shapes options to make changes if required.
Note: When you draw a shape on the map, Analyst's Notebook calculates the GeoJSON
coordinates and the feature collection object in the GeoJSON window.
g) Click OK when you have finished drawing and editing your search area.
The Edit search area window closes and a thumbnail graphic is displayed next to the entity.

h) Optional: Click the Actions icon to add or remove geographic locations.

• To create a search area using GeoJSON data:

Working with an Information Store 81

a) To edit the geospatial area, click the icon and click on GeoJSON to change the search area
from Map.
b) Paste or enter a GeoJSON feature collection object into the text area.
c) Click on Map to view your GeoJSON data on the map or OK to return to Query conditions.
A thumbnail graphic of the map view with an outline of your GeoJSON area is displayed next to
the entity.

d) Optional: Click the Actions icon to add or remove geographic locations.

e) After you add the conditions, save your query or click Run.

Expanding entities
When chart entities contain copies of records from the Information Store, you can expand to find
related records, and add items that contain copies of those records to the chart.

About this task

Three stages are involved in expanding entities that contain copies of records from the Information
Store:
1. Examine the records that the selected chart items contain.
2. Find records in the Information Store that are directly connected to them.
3. Add chart items that contain copies of the directly connected records.
Rather than simply adding all the related information to your chart, you can also expand with
conditions, allowing you to decide on the types of records to add. For more information, see “Expand
with conditions” on page 83.
Any selected chart items that do not contain records are ignored in expand operations.
If an expand operation finds a record that was already copied to the chart, the application tests
whether the record in the Information Store was updated since the copy was made. If a new version
is available, the record in the chart item is marked to indicate that changes are available. You can
choose to get these changes.
Note: If a record was deleted from the Information Store since the copy was made, the copy is not
deleted from the chart. Instead, the record is marked as orphaned, and its relationship to the
Information Store is broken.

Procedure
• To expand all selected entities that contain records:
a) On the chart, select the entities that you want to expand.
b) Click the Home tab of the ribbon, and then in the Search Information Store group, click
Expand.
Links and connected entities are added to the chart.

What to do next
You can now use the Analyst's Notebook tools to analyze the items that contain the copied records.

82 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Related tasks
Getting changes to records
To keep the chart copies of records up to date, you can get changes from the Information Store. You
can get changes to individual records or to records in all the currently selected items.

Expand with conditions

Rather than using expand to add all the available, related information to your chart, you can choose
instead to expand with conditions. When you do so, you can select which types of records to copy to
the chart.

About this task

In an expand with conditions operation, you can choose to filter by entity types, link types, or both.
For example, if you select a Person entity on your chart, you might choose only to expand to records
that have the Vehicle entity type. Alternatively, an Owner link type might be used to connect vehicles
with people, and also accounts with people. But it might also be possible to connect accounts and
people through an Access To link type. By filtering on entity and link type, you can choose only to
expand to accounts that are owned by people.
Note: For information on how to expand without using conditions, see “Expanding entities” on page
82.

Procedure
To expand with conditions:
1. On the chart, select the entities that you want to expand.
2. Click the Home tab of the ribbon, and then in the Search Information Store group, click Expand
with Conditions.
The Information Store Expand with Conditions window opens.

3. To choose the type of filtering to apply, click Expand by type in the window header and
select entity type, link type, or both.
A list of record types that are connected to the selected entities is displayed. If a large amount of
connected records are found, you are asked whether you want to Display the list.
4. Select the record types and click Copy to Chart.
Note: To expand by a single type, you can hover over the type and click Copy to Chart.
A summary of records that were copied (or marked to show that changes are available) is
displayed in the Expand with Conditions window. The relevant links and entities are added to the
chart. These entities and links are selected, together with any relevant existing entities and links
on the chart. You can click a row in the summary to change the selection. For example, to select
only the originally selected entities, click the Seeds row in the summary.
5. To close the Expand with Conditions window, you can do one of the following:
• Click Finish. The Expand with Conditions window is reset for next time that you expand.
• Click the Expand with Conditions ribbon button. Next time that you expand, the window opens
on the last page that you used.
To continue expanding, select entities from the summary and click Expand Again.

Working with an Information Store 83

Get matches
You can use the Get Matches function in Analyst's Notebook to compare the records on your chart
with records in the Information Store.

About this task

You might have records on your chart that match with records in the Information Store. It might be
useful to know more about real world objects that are known to the system, even if you do not want to
unite the chart records at this stage of your analysis. Get Matches can check the records that you
select for possible matches. If matching records are identified, you can either unite the records on
your chart or cancel the operation.

Procedure
• To find records that match with the Information Store:
a) On the chart, select the entities that you want to check for matches.
b) Click the Home tab of the ribbon, and then in the Search Information Store group, click Get
Matches.
The Matching Records Found dialog displays the match results.
c) Click Continue to unite the matched records on the chart, or click Cancel to return to the chart.
If you decide not to proceed with getting matched records, the chart records with matches are
not updated but are selected.
Note: It is possible for links between records to be lost, for example if an Information Store
record matched with two linked chart records. Although this situation is unlikely, you can use
Find Matching Records to resolve potential duplication before running Get Matches.

Adding chart items

After any operation that finds records in the Information Store - Quick Search, Visual Query, or
Expand with Conditions - you can create chart items that contain copies of those records. You can
then use these items as the starting point for more searches of the Information Store.
Before you can use Analyst's Notebook tools to analyze search results, you must copy the records
that they represent to a chart. Each chart item that you create in this way contains a copy of the
record from the Information Store that provides a snapshot of the information at the time of charting.
If the data in the Information Store is updated after you copy a record and you want that chart to
reflect that change, you must use the Get Changes feature to update the records on the chart.

Copying records to a chart

When the results of an Information Store Quick Search or Visual Query are displayed, you can choose
to create chart items that contain copies of the records. To add information to a chart, you must
select records from the search results and choose the chart that you want to target.

Procedure
1. If the search results contain many records, you can filter the results by clicking one or more listed
properties or types.
2. In the Information Store Quick Search window or the Information Store Visual Query window,
select the check boxes next to the records that you want to chart. To select them all, select the
check box at the top of the list.
3. Click Copy to Chart.
The Copy to chart pane opens. A list of open charts is displayed with the current chart selected.

84 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

4. Click the chart in which to create items with copies of the selected records.
If you click New Chart or select a chart that does not have a charting scheme, you must select the
charting scheme that you want to use when the items are added to the chart. If you require
changes to a charting scheme or want a new charting scheme, contact your administrator.
5. To close the Information Store window, you can do one of the following:
• Click Finish. The Information Store window is reset. Next time that you search the Information
Store, you must start from a blank search or query.
• Click the relevant ribbon button (Quick Search or Visual Query). Next time that you start a
search or query, the window opens containing the criteria from the last time.
To proceed with further search operations, click Search Again.

Charting schemes
Charting schemes define what items that contain i2 Analyze records look like when they appear on
your chart. A charting scheme maps the properties of records to properties on the chart item.
For example, a Date of Birth property might be mapped to a chart item, or Given Name and Surname
properties might be mapped to a chart item label.
Specifying which attribute classes and labels to populate from different properties defines how those
properties are displayed on the chart item. In addition, by using connection multiplicity, you can
display multiple links between two entities as a single link, but still retain the information from the
individual records in the chart item.
You can change the charting scheme that is associated with a chart at any time.

Changing the displayed information

The information from records that is displayed on a chart item is controlled by the charting scheme.
When you are working with items that contain i2 Analyze records, you can control the appearance of
the items by changing the charting scheme.

About this task

As part of the deployment of i2 Analyze, charting schemes are created that determine how the
information stored in i2 Analyze records relate to item properties and attributes on the chart.
Depending on the charting schemes that have been included, you can select different ways to display
the information in your chart. You might want to change the display in the following situations:
• The chart is intended for multiple audiences who require different amounts of detail to be
displayed.
• Charted items might need to show each link separately, or all links between two entities as one link,
depending on the type of analysis you want to do. For example, if you change the chart from an
association chart to a timeline chart, you might want to choose a different connection style.

Procedure
In the bar below the ribbon, select the required charting scheme from the Charting scheme list.
Note: If the type of display that you require is not available in the list, you can request changes to a
charting scheme, or new charting schemes, by contacting your administrator.

Working with an Information Store 85

Create i2 Analyze chart items
You can create chart items that contain i2 Analyze records. These records can contain information
that you receive from other sources, or information that you assert based on your analysis.
When you create a chart item that contains an i2 Analyze record, the record only exists in the chart
item on your chart. When you are ready to share this information, you can upload the record into the
Information Store.

Creating i2 Analyze entities

i2 Analyze entities store their important information in records. To create entities that contain
records, drag your selection from the Information Store palette and enter property values in the
Record Inspector.

About this task

In a chart, the first time that you connect to the Information Store, a new palette is created that
contains all of the types in your Information Store.
When you create an i2 Analyze entity, that item contains an i2 Analyze record. You can enter values
for some or all of the record properties, and you must enter values for mandatory properties.

Procedure
1. Ensure that the Information Store palette is displayed. This palette contains the entity types that
correspond to the types in your Information Store.
If the Insert from Palette pane is not visible, click the Home tab, and then click Insert from
Palette. If there is more than one palette, you can select the Information Store palette from the
palettes list at the top of the entity section of the pane.
2. Optional: To create an entity that has a representation other than icon, select the representation at
the top of the Insert from Palette pane.
Note: You cannot create an i2 Analyze entity with the OLE Object entity representation.
3. Drag the entity type that you want to create from the palette onto the chart.
The Record Inspector displays the record that you created. The property types that are initially
displayed correspond to the following property types from the Information Store:
• Properties whose values are used in the record label
• Mandatory properties
4. Enter values on the Properties page of the Record Inspector.
You can enter values for properties that are not listed by using the plus button on the Properties
page. As you create further entities, the Record Inspector remembers which properties you
typically use.

What to do next
When you save your chart, the i2 Analyze entity that you created is saved.
When you are ready to share information, you can upload the records that you create to the
Information Store.
Related tasks
Uploading records to the Information Store

86 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

If you have access to the feature, you can upload new or edited records to the Information Store. You
can upload individual records, or all the records in the currently selected items.

Creating i2 Analyze links

i2 Analyze links store their important information in records. To create links that contain records, drag
your selection from the Information Store palette and enter property values in the Record Inspector.

About this task

In a chart, the first time that you connect to the Information Store, a new palette is created that
contains all of the types in your Information Store.
When you create a link that has one of these types, an i2 Analyze record is created in the item. You
can enter values for some or all of the record properties, and you must enter values for mandatory
properties.
To create an i2 Analyze link, the entities that you connect must contain i2 Analyze records, and the
link type that you use must be permitted between the two entities according to the rules of the
Information Store. For example, it might be permitted to connect two people by an association link
but not by an owner link.
When a chart item contains multiple i2 Analyze records, such as when two i2 Analyze entities are
merged, one of the records is assigned to be the lead record. When you create an i2 Analyze link that
is connected to an i2 Analyze entity, the link record is connected to the entity's lead record.

Procedure
1. Ensure that the Information Store palette is displayed. This palette contains the link types that
correspond to the types in your Information Store.
If the Insert from Palette pane is not visible, click the Home tab, and then click Insert from
Palette. If there is more than one palette, you can select the Information Store palette from the
palettes list at the top of the link section of the pane.
2. If either of the entities that you want to connect contains multiple i2 Analyze records, ensure that
the appropriate record is assigned as the lead record in each entity before you create your link. To
assign a new lead record:
a) Double-click the entity to display its records in the Record Inspector.
b) Select the record to assign as the lead record in the list view.

c) Click More actions ( ) > Set as lead .

The lead record is changed. As a result, the label and the icon on the chart might also change.
3. In the palette, click the link type that you want to create, then drag between the two entities that
you want to link.
Note: If you try to create a link that is not valid between the two entities, you are prompted with a
list of valid link types to select from.
The Record Inspector displays the record that you created. The properties that are initially
displayed correspond to the following property types from the Information Store:
• Properties whose values are used in the record label
• Mandatory properties
• Link direction

Working with an Information Store 87

4. Enter values on the Properties page of the Record Inspector.
You can enter values for properties that are not listed by using the plus button on the Properties
page. As you create further links, the Record Inspector remembers which properties you typically
use.

What to do next
When you save your chart, the i2 Analyze link that you created is saved.
When you are ready to share information, you can upload the records that you create to the
Information Store.
Related concepts
Multiple records in one chart item
Chart items in Analyst's Notebook Premium can contain multiple i2 Analyze records. If you merge two
entities that contain records, the result is a single entity that contains two records. If there are several
link records that connect the same two entities on the chart, you can choose to represent them as a
single link item.
Related tasks
Uploading records to the Information Store
If you have access to the feature, you can upload new or edited records to the Information Store. You
can upload individual records, or all the records in the currently selected items.

Editing records in i2 Analyze chart items

You can view and edit records in a chart item in the Record Inspector. Depending on the type of
record, and your access permissions, you can upload your changes to the Information Store. You can
view, edit, and create records even if you are not connected to the Information Store, but you must be
connected to search the Information Store or upload any data.

About this task

You can edit the i2 Analyze records that you create before and after you upload them to the
Information Store. For some other records, especially if they were loaded into the Information Store
from an external system, you can edit notes but not property values. Other records still are read-only,
and you cannot edit them at all.
After you make edits, you can upload them to the Information Store only if there have been no
changes to the corresponding record in the store since you last uploaded or got changes. If changes
are available, you must get those changes before you can upload any edits of your own.
When you view the records in a chart item that contains multiple records, or you select multiple
items, the Record Inspector indicates how many records there are in your selection. You can page
through each record to view and edit its properties or add notes. You can also view a list of the
records that are contained in the selected items. Display the list or page view by clicking List or Page.

Procedure
1. Click the chart item for which you want to view or edit i2 Analyze records.
If the Record Inspector is not already open, double-click the chart item to open it. The records that
the item contains are displayed.
2. If the item contains multiple records, one of the records is assigned as the lead record. To assign a
different lead record:

88 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

a) Select the record to assign as the lead record in the list view.

b) Click the More actions button , then click Set as lead.

3. Select the relevant record in the list view, then click the Page button. There are now several ways
that you can edit a record. For example:
• Edit its property values.
• Add notes to a record or edit existing notes.
• View or edit details about a record. For example, set its security information.

You can choose to enter values for properties that are not listed by using the plus button on the
Properties page to change which properties are listed. If you remove a property from the property
list, any value that is contained in the property is deleted from the record. If you upload your edits
to the Information Store, deleted values are also deleted in the Information Store.
Note: You cannot remove mandatory properties or any property that makes up the label.

Working with notes in a record

Notes provide a way to add free-form operational data to i2 Analyze records in the Information Store.
If you have access to the feature, then you can view the notes on any i2 Analyze record. If you have
write access to a record, then you can add to, edit, and delete the notes that it contains.

Before you begin

Your organization controls access to notes based on the user groups that you belong to. If you need to
use notes but you do not see the Notes tab in the Record Inspector, contact your system
administrator.

About this task

Analyst's Notebook treats notes like the other properties of i2 Analyze records. If you update a record
in a chart item with changes from the Information Store, any new notes from the store are added to
the record. If you delete a note and upload the record, the note is deleted from the record in the
Information Store.
In the Record Inspector, notes are sorted by when they were first uploaded, with the most recent
note at the top of the list.

Procedure
To add or edit a note:
1. Ensure that the record that you want to edit is displayed in the page view of the Record Inspector.
2. Click the Notes tab.
3. If the record has no notes, you can create one by typing into the empty field.
4. If the record already has notes, you can click New to add a note, or click an existing note to edit it.
The note is added to (or updated in) the record in the chart item, along with information about who
added or edited the note, and when it was added or edited.

5. To delete a note, select Actions ( ) next to the note, and then click Delete.

Working with an Information Store 89

What to do next
When you complete your edits, upload the affected records to the Information Store. For more
information about uploading records, see “Uploading records to the Information Store” on page 92.
Related tasks
Uploading records to the Information Store
If you have access to the feature, you can upload new or edited records to the Information Store. You
can upload individual records, or all the records in the currently selected items.

Editing record security

When you create a record, default security settings are automatically assigned so that you can upload
that record to the Information Store. If you can edit the properties of a record, you can also edit the
security dimension values that are assigned to it.

About this task

The following information about a record is available on the Details tab of the Record Inspector:
Activity
Details about the history of the record, such as who first uploaded the item and when. This
information is provided so that you can track any changes that occur.
Security
The security dimension values that apply to the record. The values that are specified in the
Security section affect who has access to the record when it is uploaded to the Information Store.
The default values that are assigned when you first create a record are controlled by your system
administrator.

Procedure
To edit the security settings of an i2 Analyze record, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that the record that you want to edit is displayed in the page view of the Record Inspector.
2. Click the Details tab to display details about the record.
In the Security section, you can see the current security dimension values for the record. If you
can edit these values, Edit buttons and drop-down lists are visible.
3. Select the security dimension that contains the values that you want to edit.
4. Select the dimension values to apply to the record.

Keeping records up to date

You must upload the records that you add to your chart to the Information Store before other people
can access the information that they contain. When you are working with records that have been
uploaded, you can check for changes and update the records in your chart with the latest information.
The following flowchart shows the possible states of records that have been added to your chart:

90 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Where:
Not uploaded
The record has been added to the current chart, but it has not been uploaded to the Information
Store. Any edits that you make to the record are also local to the chart.
Uploaded
The record has been uploaded to the Information Store, but it has not been edited in the chart or
the Information Store since that upload (or since it was copied to the current chart).
Edited
The record has been uploaded to the Information Store, and it has been edited in the chart since
that upload (or since it was copied to the current chart). You can upload the record again to apply
the edits to the record in the Information Store.
Changes available
The record has been uploaded to the Information Store, and it has changed in the Information
Store since that upload (or since it was copied to the current chart). You can get the changes from
the Information Store to update the copy of the record in the chart.
Changes available - Upload blocked
The record has been uploaded to the Information Store, and it has been edited in the chart and
changed in the Information Store since that upload (or since it was copied to the current chart).
Upload is blocked until you get the changes from the Information Store and reapply the edits.
Orphaned
The record has been uploaded to the Information Store, but it has been deleted from the
Information Store since that upload (or since it was copied to the current chart). The record in the
chart no longer has a counterpart in the Information Store.

Working with an Information Store 91

Getting changes to records
To keep the chart copies of records up to date, you can get changes from the Information Store. You
can get changes to individual records or to records in all the currently selected items.

Procedure
1. Select the chart items whose records you want to update.
2. On the Home tab of the ribbon, in the Work with Records group, click Get Changes.
The Get Changes window opens with a summary of the records that contain updated versions in
the Information Store.
Important: If you edited any of the records that have changes in the Information Store, the
window provides the opportunity to copy information from those records to the clipboard. When
you accept the changes, your edits are overwritten and you must reapply them afterward.
3. To accept the changes, click Get Changes.

What to do next
If you copied any of your edits to the clipboard, you can retrieve that information to make your
changes again to the updated records in your chart.

Uploading records to the Information Store

If you have access to the feature, you can upload new or edited records to the Information Store. You
can upload individual records, or all the records in the currently selected items.

Before you begin

Your organization controls your ability to upload records based on the user groups that you belong to.
If you need to upload records but you are unable to do so, contact your system administrator.

About this task

Uploading new or edited records to the Information Store is subject to some rules:
• For records that are read-only in the Information Store, you can edit the copies in your chart, but
you cannot upload them.
• For all other records in the Information Store, you can upload new records or edits to records. If you
have access to them, you can also delete notes.
• If there are changes to the record in the Information Store, you cannot upload your edits; the
upload is blocked. Records must be up to date with the latest changes from the Information Store
before you can upload them.

Procedure
1. Select the chart items whose records you want to upload.
2. On the Home tab of the ribbon, in the Work with Records group, click Upload Records.
The Upload Records window opens with details of how many records will be uploaded, any
records that cannot be uploaded, and reasons why.
3. To upload the records that can be uploaded, click Upload.

92 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

What to do next
If a record could not be uploaded, it might be because there are changes to the record in the
Information Store. When you close the Upload Records window, the records are marked Upload
blocked in the Record Inspector. You must get the changes to these records from the Information
Store before you can upload your edits.

Working with source references

Source references provide you with information about the origins of i2 Analyze records and
connections to the sources of relevant data that is held in other locations.

About this task

Source references capture and preserve connections to data that persist throughout the lifecycle of
the record. This is useful because you can easily locate information that is associated with the record.
For example, you might want to know more about the spreadsheet from which the record was
imported, or the witness statements connected with your investigation. You can view, create, modify,
and delete source references on analyst governed i2 Analyze records. These are records created by
Analysts in the Record Inspector or through an ad hoc import. When you upload records to the
Information Store, other users with access can view or amend the source references. If source
references are added to records when data is ingested into the Information Store, they are system
governed. These records are displayed as read-only and you cannot edit them.

Procedure
To work with the source references of an i2 Analyze record:
1. Select the record and double-click to open the Record Inspector.
2. Click the Details tab to display details about the record.
3. In the Source references section, you can see any current source references. You can edit a source

reference if the Actions button is available. You can also add a new source reference by

clicking Add and completing the form.

a) Complete all mandatory fields. Fields that are not mandatory are displayed only if a value is
entered.

b) To edit a source reference, click Actions and click Edit.

c) To delete a source reference, click Actions and click Delete.

d) To add a link to an image, paste the URL in the Image URL field.
A thumbnail of the image is included in the source reference. You can click the thumbnail to
open the image URL.

What to do next
Upload the record to the Information Store.

Working with an Information Store 93

Note: When you merge records or unite match sets, Notebook maintains source references by
creating them on incoming records.

Deleting records from the Information Store

If you can access the functionality, and you have write access to the records in question, then you can
delete i2 Analyze records from the Information Store through Analyst's Notebook. Record deletion is
permanent, and it can have a broad impact that you must consider carefully before proceeding.

Before you begin

Your organization controls your ability to delete records from the Information Store based on the user
groups that you belong to. If you need to delete records but you are unable to do so, contact your
system administrator.

About this task

Sometimes, you might need to delete a record that you or a colleague has uploaded to the
Information Store. For example, an investigation might have come to an end, or you might simply
have made a mistake. If you have copies of the records that you want to delete on your chart, and
provided that you have permission to do so, you can delete them from the Information Store.
Warning: Deleting records from the Information Store cannot be undone, and it has potential
consequences for more records than you can see. All link records must have an entity at each
end, so if you delete an entity record, you also delete all the links that are connected to that
entity. This deletion takes place regardless of whether the affected links are on the current
chart, or their security settings. Deleting a single, highly connected entity record might
therefore affect many link records.

Procedure
The first part of the process involves choosing the records that you want to delete, and deciding how
you want to delete them.
1. On the current Analyst's Notebook chart, select the items that contain copies of the records that
you want to delete from the Information Store.
Analyst's Notebook populates the Record Inspector with information about all the records in the
selected items.
2. On the Home tab of the ribbon, in the Work with Records group, click Get Changes.
The records in the chart must reflect the latest versions of the records that you want to delete.
3. If you want to delete records one at a time, select the Page view in the Record Inspector and find
the first record to delete. If you want to delete all the selected records, select the List view.
4. In the Record Inspector, open the More actions menu and select Delete from Information Store
(or Delete all from Information Store).
The Delete Records from Information Store window opens.
The window contains a summary of the records that you selected and whether you can delete them.
Common reasons why you might not be able to delete records from the Information Store include:
New records
The records have not been uploaded to the Information Store, so it is not possible to delete them
from it.
Blocked records
The records in the chart do not reflect changes that have taken place in the Information Store.

94 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Controlled records
The records in the Information Store are controlled by a process such as synchronization with an
external source, and are therefore not yours to delete.
5. If you can delete any of the records that you selected, click Delete permanently to delete them
from the Information Store, or Cancel to close the window.
6. If none of the records that you selected can be deleted, just close the Delete Records from
Information Store window.

Results
When you close the window, Analyst's Notebook Premium updates the state of any of the selected
records that remain on the chart. For example, records that were blocked from deletion are marked
as having Changes available.
If you clicked Delete permanently, then the affected records are deleted from both the Information
Store and the chart. If a deleted record was the only one in a chart item, then the item is also deleted
from the chart. If you deleted an entity record, then all its connected link records are also deleted
from the chart and the store.

Working with an Information Store 95

96 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Investigate QRadar Offenses
IBM i2 QRadar® Offense Investigator is a QRadar App extension. You can send offenses that you
uncover in QRadar to an Analyst's Notebook chart. You can then expand the charted offenses in
Analyst's Notebook to add related IP addresses and use the Analyst's Notebook tools to perform
further analysis.
For example, you might want to search for, and then chart, offenses that occur in a specific time
window. After you chart the offenses, you can find connections between them through IP addresses,
correlating the offenses and confirming or denying the validity of an attack. Charting offenses and
expanding to include directly related IP addresses might help you to detect low and slow attacks and
might also provide a different view of the bigger picture.
To work with i2 Offense Investigator, the QRadar application and the app extension must be installed.
A Send to i2 Analyst's Notebook button is available in QRadar on the Offenses and the Offense
Summary pages for you to chart selected offenses.
You can expand selected offenses in Analyst's Notebook to include all IP addresses that are related
to the offenses. You can also filter the Expand operation by adding conditions such as source or
destination IP address. You can then expand the IP addresses to other related offenses based on a
time window for event date and time.
Note: Offenses are the only items that you can send directly from QRadar to Analyst's Notebook. If
you want to chart IP addresses, you must expand the offenses on the Analyst's Notebook chart.

Connecting to QRadar
When you start to work with i2 Offense Investigator, Analyst's Notebook starts up (if not already
running), then prompts you to connect to QRadar and log in. For example, the first time in a session
that you send offenses to Analyst's Notebook or when you try to expand offenses or IP addresses
from an existing chart.

Procedure
1. In the Connect to QRadar window, enter the URL of your QRadar application and click Connect. If
you do not already know the URL, you can copy the address from the browser of your QRadar
session.
The Log in to QRadar window opens.
2. Select the authentication method that you use to log in to QRadar. If you do not know which
authentication method to use or you do not know the authorized service token or your user name
and password, contact your system administrator.
Option Description
Token Your QRadar administrator might provide you with an authorized service
token for you to enter. In subsequent Analyst's Notebook sessions, if this
token is still valid, you are not prompted for it again.
User Name and If you log in using a user name and password, you are prompted every
Password session for these credentials.

Enter the correct credentials and click Log In.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 97

Expanding offenses that are charted from QRadar
When a chart contains offenses that reference records in QRadar, you can expand offenses to find
directly connected IP addresses and add them as items to the chart.

About this task

When you expand selected offenses to IP addresses, you can choose to chart all the related IP
addresses or filter the Expand operation based on whether the IP addresses are source or destination
IP addresses.
If your selection includes items that do not reference records in QRadar, Analyst's Notebook ignores
those items when you perform an Expand operation.

Procedure
• To expand selected offenses to chart all IP addresses that are linked to them in QRadar:
a) On the chart, select the offenses that you want to expand.
b) Right-click one of the selected offenses and then click Expand to IP Addresses from QRadar
or if your selection also includes IP addresses, click QRadar Offenses > Expand to IP
Addresses.
Note: If you are not connected to and logged in to QRadar, you might be prompted for your
connection information and login credentials.
Links and connected IP addresses are added to the chart.
• To expand selected offenses based on source or destination IP addresses:
a) On the chart, select the offenses that you want to expand.
b) Right-click one of the selected offenses and then click Expand with Conditions to IP
Addresses from QRadar or if your selection also includes IP addresses, click QRadar Offenses
> Expand with Conditions to IP Addresses.
Note: If you are not connected to and logged in to QRadar, you might be prompted for your
connection information and login credentials.
The Expand with Conditions to IP Addresses window opens.
c) You can choose to expand based on source IP address, destination IP address, or both. If you
chose to expand based on destination IP address, you can choose whether to include local
destination IP addresses, remote destination IP addresses, or both. Select the required Expand
to IP Addresses check boxes.
d) Click Expand.
Links and connected IP addresses that meet the specified conditions are added to the chart.

Results
If the data of a previously charted item is updated in QRadar, its information on the chart is only
updated when you perform another operation that involves that item. For example, if an offense is
charted and the information about it is later updated in QRadar, then information on the charted item
is updated only if you select it and perform an Expand operation or if it is included as part of an
Expand operation from selected IP addresses.

98 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

What to do next
After you add IP addresses from QRadar to the chart, you can expand them to chart further offenses,
or use the Analyst's Notebook tools to analyze the data that they contain.

Expanding IP addresses that are charted from QRadar

When a chart contains IP addresses that reference records in QRadar, you can expand to find directly
connected offenses and add them as items to the chart.

About this task

When you expand selected IP addresses, you can filter the Expand operation based on event date and
time.
If your selection includes items that do not reference records in QRadar, Analyst's Notebook ignores
those items when you perform an Expand operation.

Procedure
1. On the chart, select the IP addresses that you want to expand.
2. Right-click one of the selected IP addresses and then click Expand with Conditions to Offenses
from QRadar or if your selection also includes offenses, click QRadar IP Addresses > Expand
with Conditions to Offenses.

CAUTION: If any of the selected IP addresses are remote destination IP addresses, you
are warned that expanding them might impact the performance of your QRadar system. Be
sure that you need to expand the remote IP addresses before proceeding. Otherwise,
expand only source or local destination IP addresses.
Note: If you are not connected to and logged in to QRadar, you might be prompted for your
connection information and login credentials.
The Expand with Conditions to Offenses window opens.
3. You can choose to expand based on the date and time of events that are related to the selected IP
addresses. Select one of the options and enter the required date and time conditions.
4. Click Expand.
Links and connected offenses that meet the specified conditions are added to the chart.

Results
If the data of a previously charted item is updated in QRadar, its information on the chart is only
updated when you perform another operation that involves that item. For example, if IP addresses
are charted and the information about them is later updated in QRadar, then information on the
charted items is updated only if you select them and perform an Expand operation or if they are
included as part of an Expand operation from selected offenses.

What to do next
After you add offenses from QRadar to the chart, you can expand them to chart further IP addresses,
or use the Analyst's Notebook tools to analyze the data that they contain.

Investigate QRadar Offenses 99

100 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Add data from data sources
You can add data to your chart from data sources such as databases. If you have access to several
data sources, you can collate the data that each source provides about an item of interest.
After you connect Analyst's Notebook to data sources, you can search for more information about
items of interest. For example, you might find further details about people of interest, such as their
aliases, and the links that form the networks that they are part of. Then, you can add the data to your
chart.
Some data sources support data entry from within Analyst's Notebook. You can simultaneously add
data to the data source and chart. For example, after you chart existing data source items that
correspond to people of interest, you might add items from newly received intelligence, such as a
witness report.

Connecting to a data source

To use a data source, Analyst's Notebook must connect to it. When a data source is connected, you
can access its data and use the features that the data source provides.

About this task

If the Connect menu that is in the Data Sources group of the Home tab is disabled, or does not
contain commands for the data source that you want to connect to, you need to take more action. For
example, to connect to iBase databases, you must install the iBase user application on your
workstation, even if the database is stored elsewhere.
Analyst's Notebook connects automatically to some data sources.

Procedure
1. Click the Home tab, and then in the Data Sources group, click Connect.
Analyst's Notebook displays commands that connect Analyst's Notebook to data sources.
2. To connect to a data source, choose an appropriate command from the list, then if prompted enter
further information such as a user name and password.

Results
Analyst's Notebook connects to the data source. Commands that are provided by the data source are
added to the Connected Sources and Item Actions menus.
If the Data Sources pane is displayed, and the data source provides access to its features through the
pane, the source is selected at the top of the pane. Features that the source provides are displayed in
the lower part of the pane.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 101

Finding data in a data source
You can search a data source for information about an item that is of interest to you. For example, you
might search on the name of a person of interest, then after you identify them in the data source, you
might search further to identify their associates.

About this task

The features that are provided differ by data source. To discover all the features that a data source
provides, you must connect Analyst's Notebook to the data source, then look in the appropriate areas
of Analyst's Notebook.

Procedure
• To use features that are not item-specific, such as a search feature, click the Home tab, and then
in the Data Sources group, click Connected Sources.
• To use features that are item-specific, such as a feature that adds items that are related to an
existing chart item, select a chart item that originates from a connected data source, then follow
these steps:
– Click the Home tab, and then in the Data Sources group, click Item Actions.
– Right-click the selected chart item, then click the name of the data source in the menu that is
displayed.
• Some sources provide access to their features through the Data Sources pane. To access these
features, click the Home tab, and then in the Data Sources group, click Connect > Data Sources
Pane. Select the data source from the list at the top of the pane. After Analyst's Notebook
connects to the data source, the features that the source provides are displayed in the pane.

Add chart items from a data source

After you find information of interest in a data source, you can add corresponding items to your chart.
The new information extends the intelligence that the chart contains, and you can use the analysis
capabilities of Analyst's Notebook on the information.
Some data sources provide the facility to configure the appearance of data source items when they
are charted.
If the item from the data source has the same database identity as an item that is already present on
the charting surface, then a duplicate item is not added. Depending on the data source, Analyst's
Notebook adds properties to the chart item, and updates the data that is stored in other properties.
Some data sources provide the facility to select which chart item properties Analyst's Notebook
copies data to.
Tip: If an entity originates from a data source and is represented by a picture from the data source
such as a photograph, you can use a different image. For example, you might have an alternative
photograph stored on your workstation. You must change the entity to an icon, and then select a
picture. To change the representation, click the entity, click the Style tab, then click Change
Representation. To select a picture, click Set Picture in the Entity Style group.

102 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Changes to chart properties when data source items are charted
Charting items from a data source might change the properties of your chart. For example, Analyst's
Notebook might automatically add new entity types and attribute classes to the chart.
When you chart an item from a data source, Analyst's Notebook checks whether the item's entity type
or link type, and the attribute classes of the item, exist in the chart. These checks are on the item type
or attribute class name. If they do not exist, Analyst's Notebook adds them to the chart.
If the chart already contains an item type or attribute class that has the same name, then they
determine the appearance of the data source item. For example, the item type in the chart specifies
the icon that represents the item, and the existing attribute class might specify a prefix.
Some data sources provide the facility to choose which item types and attribute classes are used
when you chart items from the data source.

Data source items that match chart items

If your chart already contains the data source item that you are charting, Analyst's Notebook can
update the existing chart item. If your chart contains items that originate from other sources and
represent the same real world object or relationship as the item that you are charting, you can merge
the items to consolidate the multi-source data.
When a chart contains items from different data sources, your analysis might uncover potential
duplicate data. For example, the top two people in a list of social network analysis results might
originate from different data sources and have different names, but match on other key
characteristics. To merge the entities, select them on the charting surface, click the Analyze tab, then
click Merge and Combine > Merge Entities. You can also use the Find Matching Entities feature to
detect duplicate entities.
Related concepts
Identities
An identity uniquely identifies an item on a chart or provides a unique link back to entity or link
information in a data source.
Detect and resolve duplicate data
To ensure that the quality of your analysis is not compromised by duplicate data, you can search for
entities on the charting surface that might represent the same real world object. Analyst's Notebook
provides a number of tools to help detect and resolve any duplication without the loss of critical data.

Displaying data records

Depending on the data source, data records are attached to items when you add data from a data
source. Data records contain data that is copied from the source record, so that you can view any
copied data that is not displayed on the charting surface.

About this task

You can view the data records that are attached to a chart item that has one or more database
identities. A database identity uniquely identifies a source record in the originating data source.

Procedure
To show the Data Records pages for an item:
1. Right-click the item on the chart and click Edit Item Properties.
2. Choose a database instance folder, and then click a data record in it.
Note: Data records are displayed only when one item is selected on the chart.

Add data from data sources 103

Analyst's Notebook displays the data in the data record. Data records are intentionally read-only.

What to do next
A data source might provide the facility to view the current data about the item, in the data source.
You can see changes that were made in the data source since the item was charted.
Related concepts
Identities
An identity uniquely identifies an item on a chart or provides a unique link back to entity or link
information in a data source.
Related tasks
Removing data records
For chart items that have database identities, you can choose to remove any associated data records.
For example, if you want to clean the chart of sensitive or unwanted information.

Selecting items that originate from a data source

After you connect to data sources and chart items from them, the Data Sources pane displays the
number of chart items that originate from each source. After you select a source, Analyst's Notebook
can select all the items that originate from that source.

Procedure
1. At the top of the Data Sources pane, identify the row that corresponds to the data source whose
items you want to select.
Note: Only the sources that provide access to their features through the Data Sources pane are
listed.
2. Click the Select chart items button in that row.
All chart items that originate from that data source are selected on the chart surface. You might
choose to analyze the items collectively, for example you might add them all to the Activity View.

Identifying the data sources that an item originates from

You can identify the data sources that an item on the charting surface originates from. After you
connect to those data sources, you can use their features to gain more insight into the items of
interest.

Procedure
1. Right-click an item on the charting surface, and then select Edit Item Properties.
The Edit window opens.
2. Click Item Properties > Label & Identity.
The Database Identities list displays the name of the data sources that the item originates from,
and the database keys that identify the source records.

What to do next
Choose a data source and connect Analyst's Notebook to it, then use the features that the connected
source provides for working with its data. For example, you might add the network that the selected
item is part of to the chart.

104 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Related tasks
Connecting to a data source
To use a data source, Analyst's Notebook must connect to it. When a data source is connected, you
can access its data and use the features that the data source provides.

Add data from data sources 105

106 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Detect and resolve duplicate data
To ensure that the quality of your analysis is not compromised by duplicate data, you can search for
entities on the charting surface that might represent the same real world object. Analyst's Notebook
provides a number of tools to help detect and resolve any duplication without the loss of critical data.
When you attempt to paste or import items into a chart or when you chart items from a data source,
Analyst's Notebook automatically compares the identity of items already on the chart with the
incoming items. If a match is found, the item is not copied to the chart. An item's label is not
necessarily the same as identity, for example you can copy any number of Person entities with the
same name to a chart. It is the database identity that is used to automatically detect duplicate data.
Multiple records with different identities often exist for the same entities, and they might contain
different details that collectively give a broader view of an entity. The records might also be
incomplete, contain errors, or alternative spellings. The difference in identity means that the
duplication is not automatically detected, however you can conduct your own analysis to detect and
resolve matching items without compromising your investigation.
Related concepts
Data source items that match chart items
If your chart already contains the data source item that you are charting, Analyst's Notebook can
update the existing chart item. If your chart contains items that originate from other sources and
represent the same real world object or relationship as the item that you are charting, you can merge
the items to consolidate the multi-source data.

Resolve duplicate data that you identify

During your analysis, you might identify that some of the data you are working with represents the
same information and you need to decide how to resolve the duplication. For example, you find that
two entities are aliases for the same person and you do not want them both to appear on your chart.
Merging is one way to resolve duplication that is not automatically dealt with. To help you, Analyst's
Notebook provides tools that manually merge entities, multiple links, and combine attribute classes.
These tools are located in Merge and Combine on the Analyze tab.

Merge chart items

You can manually merge items with different identities on your chart. You can merge entities, merge
links in the same connection, and merge entities and their links that are connected to a common
entity.

Merging entities
It is useful to merge entities when you identify two or more entities on your chart that represent the
same real-world object. For example, you might incorporate data into your chart from a source that
uses different naming conventions or you might discover that several people on your chart are the
same person with different aliases.

Merging links
It is useful to merge links when you have several links between two entities that represent a number
of events and you want to represent them as a single link. For example, you might want to represent
several transactions from one bank account to another as a single link that indicates the total amount
that is transferred.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 107

The following actions might result in the automatic merging of links between entities:
• When you change the multiplicity of a connection, resulting in fewer links in the connection.
When you change the multiplicity of a connection from a Multiple connection to a Directed or Single
connection or from a Directed connection to a Single connection, links might merge. Which links are
merged depends on their arrowheads. For example, changing from a Multiple to a Directed
connection merges links with arrows in the same direction.
• When two or more entities that are linked to a common entity are merged.
When two or more entities are merged that have a link to the same entity, those links are combined
into one connection. The resulting multiplicity is the highest order of all the merged connections. A
Multiple connection takes precedence over a Directed or Single connection. A Directed connection
takes precedence over a Single connection. For example, if the existing connection is Multiple, links
are always added to the connection.
Any corners on a connection that is being merged are retained and corners on the other connections
are discarded.
• When a link is imported or pasted into a chart, where the entities at each end of the link already
exist.
The highest multiplicity of the connections between the entities determines whether the pasted or
imported link is merged or added. For example, if the multiplicity of the existing connection on the
chart or the multiplicity of the connection for the link that is being pasted or imported is set to
Multiple, the link is always added.
When entities with links between them are merged, the links are deleted:
• Any attributes on a link that is deleted are moved to the resulting merged entity.
• If a link contains information such as date and time or description, a card which contains this
information is added the resulting merged entity.
• Any link style information, such as link color, direction, strength, and width is lost.

Selecting which is the resulting item

When you merge chart items, the order that you select the items to be merged is important. Analyst's
Notebook merges the second and further selected items into the first item that is selected.
Note: When you merge a selection of items from List Items, the order of selection in List Items is
preserved in the chart. Therefore, the correct behavior is used when the entities are merged.

Combine attribute classes

You can combine one attribute class and its values with another attribute class, and optionally delete
the source attribute class.
Examples of when you might want to combine attribute classes:
• You might incorporate data into your chart from different sources that use different attribute
classes to represent the same information.
• You might want to make the values of an analysis attribute visible on the chart. You can make these
values visible by combining the analysis attribute into an attribute class, which can be displayed.
To combine attributes, you must specify the source attribute class and the target attribute class:
• The source attribute class (Paste Values of Attribute) is the attribute class whose instances you
want to convert. You can specify that this attribute class is deleted after the attribute classes are
combined.

108 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

• The target attribute class (Onto Values of Attribute) is the attribute class to which you want
instances to be converted. The target attribute class does not need to be in use on your chart. It is
typically the same type as the source attribute class, for example Text or Flag, but rules also exist
for combining attributes of different types.
Any source attributes on the chart are converted to the target attribute. If a chart item already has an
attribute of the target attribute class, then the value is pasted according to the On Paste behavior that
is defined for the target attribute class.

Rules for combining attributes of different types

Typically, you combine attributes of the same type, for example, two Text attributes or two Number
attributes. In this case, the values are pasted from the source attribute to the target attribute.
The following rules apply when you are combining attributes of different types.

Source Target Rules

Text Number Only possible when the source value can be interpreted as a number,
that is, when the text contains numbers. For example, the value Text 3
becomes 3.
Otherwise, it is not combined.

Text Flag When the source value begins with Y, y, T, t, or 1, then the target value is
set to YES.
Otherwise, the target value is set to NO.

Text Date & Time Only possible when the source value is a valid date and time.
Otherwise, it is not combined.

Number Text Number is pasted as text.

Flag Text Pasted as YES or NO.
Date & Time Text Pasted as the date and time, formatted as it is displayed on the chart.

Merged data
When data is merged as a result of a paste or import, or after you use one of the merge and combine
tools, as much information as possible is retained.
The merged chart items retain the following information:
• Location on the chart.
• Chart item type, for example entity type Subscriber.
• Date, time, and ordered or controlling state.
• Semantic type assignment.
• Existing cards. The merged chart item also inherits any cards on the chart items that are merged
into it.
• Data records
The resulting labels depend on the label merge and paste rules settings that you select on the
Options > Behavior page of the Chart Properties window. For example, if the label of one vehicle
entity is ABC123 and the label of the other vehicle entity is Blue articulated truck, you can

Detect and resolve duplicate data 109

choose to append the labels, which results in ABC123 Blue articulated truck. For links, if Sum
Numeric Links is selected, the resulting label is the total value of the merged link labels.
When merged items contain information that would otherwise be lost, a card that contains this
information is added to the resulting item. Examples of information of this type are date and time,
description, grades, source type, and source reference. A card is only created when a merged item
contains information that is different from the item into which it is merged. When you are merging
several items, a card is created for each item that contains different information.
If entities that are being merged both contain instances of the same attribute class, the attribute
values are merged according to the rules that are specified in the attribute class definition.
When merged items contains data records, the data records are maintained separately in the merged
item. Each data record is identified by its unique database key.
Resulting links also retain the position, strength, type, and width of the first selected link and
incorporate the direction of the links that are merged into it.
Resulting entities inherit all links from the merged entities.
Related reference
Label behavior
Behavior options determine how labels are handled when links are created or items are merged. Set
the behavior for your needs within your standard template.

Finding and resolving matching entities

You can resolve the potential matches by inspecting the results and deciding what action to take.
When you add data to a chart, it is important to try to ensure that multiple items do not represent the
same real world object, event, or relationship.

About this task

Use the Find Matching Entities feature to compare chart items, identify any entities that might
represent the same real world object, and resolve the potential matches. In addition to matching
based on entity labels, you can also look for potential matching entities based on their semantic
types, and the meaningful content. When you identify potential matches, you might want to select the
matched entities for closer inspection, link the entities for inspection later, or merge the entities.
The following examples demonstrate some types of duplicate data that the Find Matching Entities
feature might reveal and describe how you might choose to resolve it:
• Several entities that have similar labels, such as "Sam STEELE", "SAMSTEELE", and "SAM steele"
might exist on your chart. If you have further evidence to support the supposition that these entities
all represent the same person, you can merge the entities. All of the information in the entities'
properties and all the links to these entities are then stored in a single entity.
• When you add information to a chart from different sources, data that is potentially the same might
be formatted differently. For example, the entities 01234 56789 and 01234567889 might
represent the same telephone number or bank account.
• Many Address entities might have the same post code but have slightly different addresses. More
investigation is required to determine whether they are duplicate locations. You can add Match links
between the entities to record possible duplication and investigate further.
• Two person entities on your chart might have different labels, but the same date of birth and
national identifier. This information might indicate that the two names are aliases for the same

110 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

person. You might choose to link them and investigate further or if you already have information
that indicates that are they same person, you can merge the entities.

Procedure
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Find Items group, click Find Matching Entities.
The Find Matching Entities pane opens.
2. Select the type of matching you want from the list.
Option Description
Label A specialized form of entity matching that compares entity identities and labels.
Matching No two entities can have the same identity but identities can differ by letter case
or by their digits only. For example, you can search for identities that have
matching letters, excluding letter case and digits.
Smart The semantic type that is assigned to the entity is used as the basis for the
Matching match. For example, the entity types Doctor, Male, and Anonymous might all be
assigned the Person semantic type. Common properties of people such as
national identifier and date of birth are then examined to find potential matches.
Smart matching considers a broad range of criteria, including attribute instances
and database properties that are assigned the same semantic types. You specify
a threshold to indicate how strong the match must be and you can choose which
entities to include in the search.

Smart Similar to Smart Matching, however chart items are matched only against the
Matching current selection on the chart surface. For example, if the entity Danny KENT is
Against the only entity that is selected on the chart, matches are made only against
Selection Danny KENT.
Previously Search your chart to find matches that you previously found and preserved on
Linked the chart by adding a Match link between them.
Matches
You can find matching entities, ignoring any previously linked entities, as many
times as you like. When everything of interest is linked, use Previously Linked
Matches to retrieve all the resulting links from your previous searches.

3. To set up the search criteria for the type of entity matching that you select, click Setup.
4. Click Find.
Any matches are displayed in a tree view in the Matched Sets area of the Find Matching Entities
pane.
5. Use the tools in the Matched Sets area to resolve the matches.
Note: You can run Find Matching Entities as many times as you like with different options and
different setups.

Label matching
Search for entities that might represent the same real-world object based on their identities and
labels and on specified criteria. For example, you can compare letters only, digits only, or choose to
ignore characters such as spaces or tabs.
Label matching is specialized form of entity matching that does not consider criteria such as attribute
instances and database properties.
If the entity has an identity, it is used when searching for a match. If the entity does not have an
identity, for example if the entity is charted from a data source, the label is used. To override this

Detect and resolve duplicate data 111

behavior, select the Use All Identifiers check box in the Match Entities area of the Setup Label
Matching window. All identities and labels are compared.
To prevent matches based on identity and label alone, you can match only entities of the same type
or of the same type and with a specific semantic type assigned. For example, matching "Sam STEELE
(Male)" with "Sam STEELE (Female)" based only upon their identity and label would not be a good
match.
Entity Matching works by comparing a set of characters between one entity and another. You can
choose to include only letters, only digits, ignore certain characters, and ignore case. For example,
one data source might represent telephone numbers as three groups of digits that are separated by a
hyphen (123-456-789). Another data source might represent telephone numbers without separation
but with an extension number (123456 ext 789). The digits are the same in both cases. You can use
label matching to compare digits only, ignoring the hyphens to match the entities and merge them
into a single entity on your chart.
Label matching reports the search results as sets of potential matches, which are known as matched
sets.

Smart matching
Search for entities on the charting surface that might represent the same real-world object based on
their entity types and criteria such as attribute instances and database property values.
Smart matching uses a set of predefined rules for deciding whether two entities might represent the
same real-world object. It examines entities and their associated links, and compares their property
values to produce an overall score. A score of one indicates a weak match. A score of nine indicates a
strong match. Smart matching reports the search results as sets of potential matches, which are
known as matched sets.
You can choose the strength of match that you want smart matching to report by selecting a
threshold. Depending on the threshold that you choose, you might get fewer but stronger matches, or
more but weaker matches. Typically you start to search your chart with a threshold of 9 to find the
strongest matches, and then repeat each search with lower and lower thresholds.
By changing the threshold, you can split sets of matched entities into more accurate matched sets.
For example, you might have five entities on your chart, two assigned with a Gender attribute set to
Male and three assigned with a Gender attribute set to Female. All entities have the same label but in
slightly different letter case. Selecting a threshold of 1 and 6 in different searches matches the same
entities in both searches but produces different matched sets, as shown in the table.
Note: The entity type is used for matching but it never implies any property values. In this example,
the Male and Female entities types are treated as Person entities. For smart matching to compare on
gender, gender property values must be assigned to the entities, such as a gender attribute.

Entities in chart Threshold Matched sets

Sam Steele (with Gender attribute: Male) 1 Sam Steele (5 Entities)
SAM STEELE (with Gender attribute: Female) • Sam Steele
sam steele (with Gender attribute: Female) • SAM STEELE

Sam STEELE (with Gender attribute: Male) • sam steele

• Sam STEELE
Sam steele (with Gender attribute: Female)
• Sam steele

112 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Entities in chart Threshold Matched sets
Sam Steele (with Gender attribute: Male) 6 SAM STEELE (3 Entities)
SAM STEELE (with Gender attribute: Female) • SAM STEELE
sam steele (with Gender attribute: Female) • sam steele

Sam STEELE (with Gender attribute: Male) • Sam steele

Sam steele (with Gender attribute: Female) Sam Steele (2 Entities)

• Sam Steele
• Sam STEELE

Rules for smart matching

Smart matching first determines whether entities are eligible to be matched by checking they meet
the following criteria:
• Comparisons are made between entities that share semantic type behavior. For example, a
comparison can be made between the Organization and Law Enforcement Agency semantic types
because Law Enforcement Agency is a specialization of the Organization semantic type. A
comparison cannot be made between Organization and Person semantic types.
• Comparisons are made between entities if they have some attributes that have the same property
semantic type, or data record properties that have the same property semantic type.
Where eligible pairs of entities are identified, their properties values are compared and scored
according to how closely they match. The scoring takes account of:
• Typographical errors; for example, Michael and Micheal.
• Common synonyms; for example, Richard and Dick.
• Phonetics; for example, Michael and Mikel.
• Titles; for example, Mr, Mrs, and Dr.
• Suffixes; for example, OBE and Phd.
• Numeric properties; for example, phone numbers match from the right to account for area codes
that might be formatted differently.
Some entity types and property types have semantic behavior. For these types, higher scores are
given for identifying property values such as a car license plate. Less significant facts such as car color
contribute less strongly. Lower scores are also given where one piece of information contradicts
another, for example Mr D KENT contradicts Mrs D KENT.
Note: Not all property values have semantic behavior. If they do not have semantic behavior, their
values are ignored in semantic matching. For example, the Person properties that have matching
behavior are Title, First Name, Middle Names, Last Name, Full Name, Name Suffix, Gender, Date of
Birth, Job Title, and Email Address. The other properties are ignored.

Matches with database clashes

When you are using Analyst's Notebook with another database application such as iBase or IBM i2
iBridge, entities that are extracted from the database have an associated database identity.
Matches involving database clashes can occur when two matching entities originate from a single
database that does not support multiple database keys. These entities are included in a matched set
and the set name is appended with the word Clash; for example, <set name>: Clash (4

Detect and resolve duplicate data 113

entities). These clashing entities can be merged, however, vital information might be lost. The
information that is retained after clashing entities are merged depends on whether the entities have
unique database keys and whether the database supports multiple database keys.

Entity and property semantic types recognized by smart matching

Some entity and property semantic types are recognized and used by smart matching.
Each property plays a role in assessing the likelihood that two entities represent the same real-world
object. Some properties identify the entity, such as a national identifier for a person or a license plate
number for a vehicle. Other properties contribute additional information. At least one identifying
property must be assigned to an entity for a match to occur.
This table lists the entity semantic types that are recognized by smart matching and the related
property semantic types that are also considered.
Note: All of the recognized property semantic types can contribute to a match for a pair of entities but
they contribute less than the property types associated with the entity type. For example, a phone
number identifies a phone but it can also contribute to a person match.
The \ symbol in the table indicates a child semantic type.
Property semantic types in bold indicate identifying types or components of identifying types. For
matching to take place, at least one identifying type must be assigned to an entity. For example, to
match entities that are assigned the Car entity semantic type, the entities must have a VIN number or
a Vehicle License Plate Number or both. They might also have other information such as make and
model of the vehicle.
The Culture column contains the following entries:
Neutral
The matching behavior of these entity types is culturally independent. For example, Bank Card,
Phone and Web Site entity types match regardless of the language and region of the data.
Partial
The matching behavior of these entity types has some US/UK specific behavior, but matching
these types is still effective in all languages and regions. For example, Motor Vehicle, Organization
and Event.
US/UK
The matching behavior of these entity types depends on the US/UK English culture. For example,
Person and Location entity types assume US/UK English culture for names and addresses. You
can match these entity types outside of the US/UK English language and region, however, the
results might not be as expected.

Culture Entity types Property semantic types

Neutral Bank Card Card Number
\Credit Card Card Type
\Debit Card

Neutral Bank Account Account Number

Account Routing Number (US)
Bank Sort Code (UK)

114 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Culture Entity types Property semantic types
Partial Motor Vehicle VIN
\Bus Vehicle License Plate Number
\Car Vehicle Model
\Police Car Vehicle Color
\Motorcycle Vehicle Make
\Truck Vehicle Body Style
Vehicle Year

Neutral Event Event Date Time

\Meeting Event Date or Event Start Date
\Crime Event Time or Event Start
Time
Event Title
Event End Date
Event End Time

US/UK Person National Identifier

\Law Enforcement Officer Person Full Name
\Offender Person First Name
\Person Alias Person Middle Names
Person Last Name
Email Address
Date Of Birth
Person Title
Person Suffix
Gender

Partial Organization Organization Name

\Company
\Bank
\Court
\Criminal Organization
\Government Agency
\Law Enforcement Agency
\Organization Name Alias

Detect and resolve duplicate data 115

Culture Entity types Property semantic types
Neutral Phone Phone Number
\Cell Phone Local Number
\Fax Machine Area Code
\Pager International Code

US/UK Location ZIP Code

\ATM Full Address
\Mailing Address Address Line 1
Address Line 2
Address Line 3
Address Line 4
Address Line 5
Apartment Number
Building Number/Name
Street Name
City Name
State Name
Post Office Box
Country Name
Country Code

Neutral Website Web Address

\Web Page

Link semantic types recognized by smart matching

Some link semantic types are recognized and used by smart matching.
The following table lists link semantic types for which there is smart matching behavior.

Link types Description

Is Equivalent To (and any type that is derived When it is assigned to a link between two entities
from this link semantic type) being compared by smart matching, this link
semantic type is recognized by smart matching,
and contributes positively to the overall score for
the match.

116 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Link types Description
Does Not Match This link semantic type is assigned to a link when
you use the Exclude feature of Find Matching
Entities.
Link types that are assigned the Does Not Match
semantic type are recognized by smart matching
and prevent the entities at each end from
matching. The link semantic type is used to
indicate that the two entities are not
representations of the same real-world object,
even though there are similarities between the
two entities.

Possible Match Between This link semantic type is assigned to a link when
you click the Link button in this window. It
means that the links are not then found again
when Ignore Previously Linked is selected.
Links of this semantic type are found by the
Previously Linked Matches option.

Ignored by Matching You can assign this link semantic type to any of
the links on a chart to exclude them from Find
Matching Entities. It does not prevent two items
from matching but the link is ignored as a reason
for matching. Links might otherwise be taken into
account.

Assumed semantic types for labels

There are some entity types for which the label text is used for matching in addition to the property
values. Semantic types are assumed for the label.
The table indicates how the entity labels are treated during matching.

Entity semantic type Assumed property semantic type

Person Person Details *
Organization Organization Name
Phone Phone Number
Motor Vehicle Motor Vehicle Details *
Location Location Name
Event Event Title
Bank Account Bank Account Details *
Bank Card Bank Card Details *
Web Site Web Address
Mailing Address Full Address
Bank Bank Name

Detect and resolve duplicate data 117

* When one of these property types is assumed for a property value, smart matching analyzes the
textual content to identify different details. For example, the Bank Account Details property value is
analyzed to try to identify an account number and a bank name.

Previously linked matches

You can build up your analysis by linking potential matches that you find. You can then retrieve all of
your previous results when you are ready to further resolve those potential matches.
Typically you might choose to run Find Matching Entities with the Smart Matching options, setting
different thresholds and the Label Matching option to find potential matches. As a result of these
searches, you might be unsure whether the matches are real matches and you might want to do
further analysis before you decide whether to merge the entities. You can choose to link the potential
matches with links of type Possible Match Between and later use the Previously Linked Matches
option to retrieve all the matches that you previously found and linked.
You can choose to retrieve previously linked matches for only entities of the same type or of the same
type and with a specific semantic type assigned. You can also choose whether to include hidden
entities.
Note: You cannot search background items. If required, use the Send to Background > Foreground
All on the Arrange tab to bring all chart items to the foreground.

Resolve matched entities

When you find matching entities, you can merge them or exclude the matches from further searches.
If further investigation is needed, you can copy the Match links from the Find Matching Entities pane
to the chart to record the potential duplication.
The results of a Find Matching Entities search are displayed as a list of matched sets in the Find
Matching Entities window. When you select a set in the Matched Sets area, the entities that are
contained in the set appear as a chart fragment in the Members of Selected Set area. Links between
the entities represent the matches. You can view the properties of a matched entity or link between
the entities by double-clicking it in the chart fragment.
For smart matching, each link also indicates the score that is given to the match between the two
entities at each end of the link. Each link contains a card that describes the reason for the resulting
score. To view this information, double-click the link and open the Cards page. The card description
shows which properties were examined and what contribution they made to the match score.
In the Description area, several symbols are used to indicate what contribution the properties made
to the score:

+ The property made a positive contribution.

- The property made a negative contribution.
~ The property does not reinforce nor weaken the match.
! The value for the property was contradictory, for example Mr Alison SMITH.

You can use the number score and the card description to help you decide whether to merge
individual matches that are found. When you merge the matching entities, the details of the source
entity are retained in the merged entity for future reference.

Merging matched entities

To merge some or all of the entities in a matched set:

118 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

1. In the Find Matching Entities pane, select the matched set in the Matched sets area.
2. In the Members of Selected Set area, select the entity to merge into to make it the target entity.
The target entity appears enlarged in the chart fragment.
3. Add all of the entities that you want to merge into the target entity to the selection by holding
down the Ctrl key as you select them in turn.
4. Click Merge. The selected entities are merged in the chart fragment and on the chart surface. The
target entity in your chart contains a card for each merged entity, which contains a description of
the merge. The resulting label depends on the label merge and paste rules that are specified in the
Behavior page of the Chart Properties window.

Linking matched entities on the charting surface

To copy one or more Match links in a matched set to the chart:
1. Select the Match links in the chart fragment.
2. Click Link. The selected Match links are copied to the chart.
The link style is distinct from the other link styles that are used in Analyst's Notebook. It has a label of
Match (for Label Matching) or a label of Match (Strength: N) (for Smart Matching where N is the match
score). The link contains a card, which has a description for the match.
Note: A link is not copied to your chart if the entities are already connected with a link of type Match.
It does not matter if the reason for the match in subsequent searches is different.

Excluding matches
Excluding matches is useful to record that two or more entities are not duplicates, and prevents those
matches from occurring in future Find Matching Entities searches. When you exclude selected Match
links, the label on the link changes to Does Not Match.
1. Select the links on the chart fragment that you want to exclude from further Find Matching Entities
searches.
2. Click Exclude. The Match label on each selected link in the chart fragment changes to Does Not
Match. These links are then also copied to the charting surface.

Find matching records

Sometimes your charts can contain several i2 Analyze records that represent the same real-world
entities. The Find Matching Records feature in Analyst's Notebook helps you to identify potential
matches and resolve the match sets. This means you can keep key information together, uncover new
connections and minimize duplication on your chart.
When multiple i2 Analyze records exist for the same entity, they are not necessarily populated with
exactly the same information but do have some values in common. The chance of finding multiple
records increases when you use a number of different sources, such as the Information Store and i2
Connect.
For example, if you search sources for "Samuel Steele", you might also find records exist for "Sam
Steele", "Sammy Steele", or "S Steele". It is possible that some or all of these records represent the
same person and contain varying amounts of key information. It can help your analysis to unite these
multiple records into single chart items, while preserving your ability to access the data in each
record individually.
By using rules that you create, Analyst's Notebook gives you a fine level of control in searching out
potential matches. The presentation of the records in match sets allows you to easily compare the

Detect and resolve duplicate data 119

values that they have in common. You can then choose to unite the matching records, behind a lead
record, into single items on the chart.

Creating rules for record matching

When you create rules for matching i2 Analyze records, you decide what information Analyst's
Notebook uses to identify matches in the records on your chart.

About this task

Depending on how your system administrator has configured Analyst's Notebook, you might have a
number of rules that are available as defaults. You can activate or deactivate these rules but you
cannot amend them. You can also choose to create and edit your own rules. Match rules consist of:
• A name and description.
• An entity type, for example a Person.
• The property or properties to use in setting conditions, such as Last Name.
• An operator that sets the kind of comparison for the match, such as Exact match.
• Refinements to ignore particular characters and white space, if required.
• The minimum conditions that must be met to report a match.
For example, in your data the combination of Passport Number and Date of Birth, or Last Name might
provide strong evidence of a Person match. You can create a rule that tells Analyst's Notebook to
identify the records on the chart with the same values for these properties. The example match rule
would be:
• Entity type = Person
• Match all:
– Property type = Passport Number
– Operator = Exact match
• Match any:
– Property type = Last Name
– Operator = Exact match
– Property type = Date of Birth
– Operator = Exact match
Note: Analyst's Notebook maintains a separate set of match rules for each server. The rules that you
create remain in the Rules Overview window until you delete them, or connect to a different server.

Procedure
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Find Items group, click Find Matching Records.
The Find Matching Records window opens.
2. Click the Rules button, next to the Find Matches button.
The Rules Overview window opens.
3. Click the New rule button.
All the entity types from your current schema are listed.
4. Choose an option from the list, for example, Person.
The New person rule window opens.

120 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

5. Enter a name for your match rule in the Name field. You cannot create a rule without a name.
6. Optional: Enter a description of your match rule in the 'Description' field.
7. In the next column, if you want to create conditions that records must meet in order to match,

click the Add a condition button .

The Add conditions window opens.
8. Select a property type such as First Name and choose an operator for the condition. The default
operator is Exact match. Click the drop-down menu arrow to select other options.
Operator Description
Exact match The search identifies property values in the
records that are exact matches. For example, if
your condition is set to the 'Last Name'
property, your match sets only contain records
whose last names match exactly.
Match first characters The condition is met when the opening
characters of the property values match each
other. For example, enter the number '3' to
match with the first three characters.
Match last characters The condition is met when the closing
characters of the property values match each
other. For example, enter the number '5' to
match with the last five characters.
Equal to The condition is met when the property value
matches the value that was specified.

Note: You can choose the operator for property values that contain text. Some properties such as
age, height, date of birth, and weight are set to Exact match and cannot be changed.

9. Click the Refine condition button next to the arrow to make further refinements to the
conditions.
Your system administrator might have selected some default options for value handling, such as
when to ignore white space. You can change the default selection to suit your own rules. A dot

icon appears next to the Refine condition button to indicate when these refinements are
modified.
10. In the last column, you can apply a number of conditions of which at least one must be met. You
specify these conditions and refinements in the same way as you did for the previous column.
11. Click OK.
Your rule appears in the list on the Rules Overview window along with a summary of your chosen
conditions.

What to do next
You might want to create more rules before looking for matches. The Duplicate option in the Rules
Overview window is useful for creating rules to edit, rather than starting from the beginning. When

Detect and resolve duplicate data 121

you are ready to begin matching, activate the rules that you want to search with, click OK, proceed to
the Find Matching Records window and click Find matches.

Resolving matched records

You can unite matching i2 Analyze records into single chart items without losing critical data. This
means that disparate information that is stored across multiple sources is easily accessible, helping
you to uncover links and paths in the data.

About this task

When you activate and run match rules, Analyst's Notebook returns the results in the Find Matching
Records window. The property values of the records in each unresolved match set are displayed in a
table, with matches and clashes indicated by different icons. You can ascertain whether the records
represent the same real world entity by comparing the values that match, and those that do not.
For example, if the Passport number in four out of five of the records is a match, the anomaly might be
that the number is missing from the fifth record, it has been input incorrectly, or the record belongs to
a different person. Further investigation of the common property values can help validate whether
you should unite some or all of the records in the set.
The icons that are used in the Find Matching Records window, and their meanings are:

Indicates that this property was

specified in the conditions of the
match rules used in this search.
Indicates that this value is unique
in the match set.
Note: When there is no
equivalent value in any other
record in the match set, this
might be a reason not to unite
this record.

Indicates that this value appears

more than once in the match set.
Note: The color and hatching
direction have no significance
other than to denote more
matches, commonly when
comparing large numbers of
records.

Indicates this record is selected

as the lead record for the target
item.

Procedure
1. Click an unresolved match set from the list in the Find Matching Records window.
The records in the set display in a table and the corresponding items are also selected on the
chart.
2. Click the box in the Unite row of all the records you want to include.

122 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

The Unite records button updates to reflect the number of records you selected.
3. Click the circle in the Lead after unite row to select the lead record.
4. Click Unite records.
The united records and their links are moved into the lead record item. The lead record appears
unchanged except it is numbered as 1 of n, where n is equal to the number of records you chose to
unite. You can view the united records by hovering the cursor over the lead record and scrolling
through them in turn, or by using the Record Inspector.
5. Unite records in sets performs in the same way as Unite records and is useful if you are working
with a number of match sets. You can choose to complete the unite step in one action. For
example, you have four unresolved match sets that you have made changes to. The button
updates to say 'Unite records in 4 sets'. This option saves you the time of uniting the match sets
individually but it does not unite one match set with another.
The united records and their links are moved into the items you selected as lead records.

Detect and resolve duplicate data 123

124 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Analytical chart layouts
Chart layouts can reveal groups and patterns in chart data. On association charts, you can identify
highly connected entities and groups of entities that are interlinked. On timeline charts, you can
identify groups of events that occurred close together in time.

Identify highly connected entities

The Peacock layout and Compact Peacock layout group an entity's connections around it on the chart.
Highly connected entities form visible areas of activity on the chart. The areas of activity that are
formed by the Compact Peacock layout are closer together, which can result in a smaller chart.

Identify groups of entities that are interlinked

The Grouped and Circular layouts can identify groups of entities that are interlinked on an association
chart. The Grouped layout visibly distinguishes several groups within a single network, whereas the
Circular layout arranges all members of a network in a circle. Both layouts can identify discrete
networks in chart data.
The Peacock and Compact Peacock layouts identify highly connected entities, which might be
connected to each other. For example, these entities might be the ringleaders of a gang. When the
areas of activity that are formed by the Peacock layout and Compact Peacock layout are separated on
the charting surface, the interlinking of the ringleaders is visible.

Identify events that occurred close together in time

The Grouped by Time layout identifies bursts of activity on a timeline chart. If the time interval
between two events is below a specified threshold, the events are separated by a small gap of a
specified size. A large gap separates each group of events. You can set the threshold value, the size of
the small gap, and the size of the large gap.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 125

126 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Search for information
To find chart items that might be of interest to your investigation, you can search item properties for
specific information. Different search tools on the Analyze tab fulfill different needs.

Search across all chart items and their data

Use the Search pane to search for text, numbers, or dates in any property of any item on the chart.
This feature is useful when you are not sure which property contains the information.
A text property match within the chart can be partial, and the search is not case-sensitive. The search
does not match synonyms or misspellings. For example, 'Rob' matches 'ROBERT', but not 'Bob'. To
provide matches for numeric data where values are rounded, or when the data has greater precision
than the search value, a match can be fuzzy. For example, 32.5 matches 32 and 33, and 32 matches
32, 32.1, and 32.9.
Results are displayed in a table and ranked by how well they match the search terms.

Search for text

Use Find Text to search across multiple properties that store textual information. You can limit the
search scope to the selected items, and limit the scope to only entities or only links.
You can limit which properties are searched, so that Analyst's Notebook looks for the search text only
in relevant parts of the item. For example, it would not be useful to search the Source Reference
property for a vehicle license plate number.
A match within the chart can be partial. The search is not case-sensitive, unless you use wildcards or
a regular expression to search for a text pattern. For example, you can use wildcards or a regular
expression to search for a vehicle on a partial recollection of the license plate, such as the first and
last character.

Structured search
Use Visual Search to create a structured search, which searches for data in specific properties of
chart items. You can specify multiple search criteria. For example, you can specify that you are
looking for an entity that is assigned the Person semantic type, contains 'Tom Smith' in its label, and
has 14 June 1982 for its 'Date of Birth' attribute value.
You can also specify characteristics that are described by a linked entity. For example, to find a Tom
Smith who lives at 12 Main Street, you can specify that Tom Smith must be linked to a Location entity
that has '12 Main Street' for its 'Address 1' attribute value.
You can search for relationships in your data. For example, to identify the accounts that are involved
in high value transactions, you can search for links that represent transactions of value greater than
$75000. If a matching relationship is found, you can choose to select any part of the relationship such
as the link, or a combination such as both entities and the link.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 127

Searching for text
One of the simplest kinds of analysis in Analyst's Notebook is to search for specific words or phrases
in item information. For example, you can find all the chart items that contain a specific street name
or telephone number.

Procedure
To search for text in chart items, you specify the text to search for, how and where to search for it,
and what to do with the items that contain it:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Find Items group, click Find Text.
Tip: Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcut: Press Ctrl+F.
2. Type the text to search for in the Find box.
Note: Searching is not case-sensitive. A search for "smith" finds "SMITH", "Smith" and "smith".
You can then select any of the following options:
Option Description
Complex Searching Define a search by using wildcards or a regular expression.
Find Items Not Matching Searches for items that do not contain the text in the Find box.
Search Cards Enables card properties for searching in the Coverage list.
Note: By default this option is selected.

Note: If you choose not to select any of these options, the same properties that are searched by
the Search pane are enabled in the Coverage list.
3. Select the item properties that you want to search in the Coverage list.
4. In the Search Area section:
a) Select whether to search for text on both entities and links, entities only, or links only
b) To include hidden chart items in the search, select the Reveal Hidden check box.
c) To apply the search only to the chart items currently selected, select the Selection Only check
box. This option is only available when items are selected on the chart.
5. In the Action area, specify the action that you want to use on the items found:
Option Description
Edit First Opens the Item Properties window for the first matching item at the page that
contains the search term. The text is highlighted. Press F3 to find any further
matches within this item and then move to the next item.
Select First Selects the first item that is found that contains the search term. Press F3 to
find the next matching item.
Select All Provides a count of the number of matches. Selects all matching items, and
clears any currently selected items that do not match the search result.
Note: Background items that contain the search term are included in the count,
but cannot be selected on the chart surface.

Add to Provides a count of the number of matches. Adds any matching items to the
Selection current selection. Only available when items are selected on the chart.

128 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Description

Note: Background items that contain the search term are included in the count,
but cannot be selected on the chart surface.

Remove from Provides a count of the number of matches. Removes any matching items from
Selection the current selection. Only available when items are selected on the chart.
6. Check Select Sibling Links.
This option selects all the links between two entities when one link matches.
Note: This option applies when you are using Select First, Select All, or Add to Selection as an
action.
7. Click OK to run the search.

Regular expressions
Regular expressions provide a way to search for a general pattern of text rather than a specific piece
of text. For example, you can use a regular expression to search for license plates that are based on a
partial sighting.
A regular expression is written as a sequence of characters. The syntax combines the text for which
you are searching with special characters to define the pattern.
Note: Unlike a simple search, a regular expression search is case-sensitive.

Table 7. Supported regular expression characters

Character Description
. Matches a single character. For example, ABC
123. matches ABC 1234 and ABC 1235.
Note: This character is equivalent to the '?'
character when you are searching for files by
name in Windows Explorer.

^ Matches the start of a line. For example, ^ABC

matches ABC 1234 and ABC 2345 but not 1234
ABC.
$ Matches the end of a line. For example, 1234$
matches ABC 1234 and CBA 1234 but not 1234
ABC.
* Matches zero, one or more repeats of the
previous character. For example xx* matches
xx, xxxxxxx
[] Matches any character inside the brackets. You
can specify a range of characters, for example
[0-9], [a-z].
[^] Matches any characters except the characters in
the list. For example: [^ABC] matches any
character other than "A", "B", or "C".

Search for information 129

Table 7. Supported regular expression characters (continued)
Character Description
| Matches either the expression before the bar OR
the expression after the bar. For example
1234$|1235$ matches any license plates that
end in 1234 or 1235.
\ Ignores the special meaning of the next
character. For example, abc$|def$|\|
$matches any text that ends in abc, def or |.

Analyst's Notebook does not support extended regular expression combinations (), , \>, \<, \
{, \}, and \digit.

Wildcard characters
Wildcard characters provide a way to make your search for text more general by standing in for
unknown characters. Wildcard characters can match any character.

Table 8. Supported wildcard characters

Character Description
? Matches any single character. For example, Mari?
n finds Marian, Marion, Marianne and Mariano,
but does not find Mariee, or Maria.
* Matches zero or more characters. For example,
Ca* Finds Carmen JONES, and Caitlin FISK, but
does not find CA 5680

Note: Unlike a simple search, a wildcard search is case-sensitive.

Structured search
You can create a structured search, which searches for data in specific properties of chart items. You
can find entities or discover relationships.

About this task

To describe the items that you are looking for, you create a search structure. The structure can
consist of one entity type, or two entity types and a link type between them. For each part of the
structure, you can specify that a chart item must be of a particular item type or semantic type to
satisfy the query. Then, you can then use search conditions to add item characteristics to the query.
The characteristics of an entity can be described by its own properties and the properties of its linked
items. For example, to find a Tom Smith who lives at 12 Main Street, you can use a linked entities
structure. You can specify that one entity of a linked pair of chart items must have a semantic type of
Person and a label that contains "Tom Smith". Then, you can specify that the other entity must have
an entity type of House and have '12 Main Street' for its 'Address 1' attribute value.
You can use a structured search to find relationships. For example, to identify the accounts that are
involved in high value transactions, you can search for links that represent transactions of value
greater than $75000.

130 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Tip: To search for items that are indirectly linked through intermediate items, use Find Linked Items
or Find Path.

Procedure
To create a structured search:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Find Items group, click Visual Search.
2. Select the type of search:
Option Description
Single Entity Searches for data in entities only.
Linked Entities Searches for data in entities and links.
3. To select the item types or semantic types to search for, click each part of the search structure
then select an entry from the Type list.
You can choose from the following options:
• To search for chart items that have any item type, select (any).
• To search for items that have an item type from a specific palette, select (is member of) and
then select a palette from the Palette list.
• To search for items that have a specific semantic type, select (semantic types), select a type of
match from the list, then click Browse to select a semantic type. The Semantic Types list
contains semantic types that are used on the chart.
• To search for items that have a specific item type, select the item type from the Type list. The list
contains item types that are used on the chart.
4. Optional: For each part of the structure, you can specify a search condition in each of the Identity/
Label, Date & Time, and Attribute Class areas. To satisfy the query, an item must satisfy all the
conditions.
5. To specify a link direction in a search for linked entities, click the link in the structure, then select a
direction from the Direction list.
6. Optional: If items are selected on the charting surface, to restrict the search scope to all selected
items or all unselected items select the appropriate option from the Search Items list.
7. To choose what Analyst's Notebook does with the items that form the search results, select an
option from the Matched Items list. If items are selected on the charting surface, you can add the
search results to the selection, or clear the selection of items in the search results. In any
scenario, you can replace the selection with the search results.
Tip: If your search is for linked entities, you can select whether the Matched Items action applies
to all search results, or only the items that match specific parts of the structure. Select the
appropriate check boxes in the Apply To area. For example, if you are searching for people who
own vehicles, you can choose to select only the people in the search results.
8. To include hidden chart items in the search and reveal them as part of the operation, select Reveal
Hidden.
9. Click OK.
Analyst's Notebook runs the search.

Search for information 131

132 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Find networks
You can find the connections and intermediaries between items of interest, discover what is linked to
a specific entity, and find groups of interlinked entities. These networks might contain entities and
relationships that support the activity of items of interest.

Find a network that connects specific chart items

The network that connects items of interest can identify important intermediary entities. The links
between intermediaries, and between intermediaries and the entities of interest, might represent
crucial interactions.
Use Find Path to find a network that connects two chart items, directly or indirectly. If your chart
items contain date and time information you can search for a path that contains sequential events.
For example, to follow the indirect communication of information between two people.
Use Find Connecting Network to find a network that connects several entities, directly or indirectly.
To omit entities that are not of interest to your investigation, or to test hypotheses, you can exclude
specific types of entity and link, and specific entities, from the search.

Find the items that are linked to a specific entity

The entities that are directly connected to an entity of interest might be significant. For example, they
might be accomplices. Indirectly connected entities and the wider network might contain items that
form the other end of significant chains of activity. For example, the destination account for a chain of
transactions used to launder funds.
Use Find Linked to find the network of the selected entities. You can use a search depth of 1 to
identify the directly connected entities. You can use a higher search depth to identify the wider
network. Also, you can follow connections based on criteria other than path length, such as sequence.
For example, if your chart items contain date and time information, you can identify sequences of
events by specifying that event date and time must advance as the network expands.
Use the Linked Entities pane to explore the selected entity's network. You can view a list of the
entities that the selected entity is directly connected to, then choose the most significant of them and
see what that entity is linked to. The Onward Entities column in the pane can help you to identify
highly connected entities.

Find groups of interlinked entities

A group of entities that interact with each other might be significant. For example, gang ringleaders
might communicate with each other to coordinate activity.
Use Find Clusters to find groups of interlinked entities. Each group is a local center of activity and
consists of entities that have more connections to each other than to entities outside the group.
Use the K-Core measure in the Social Network Analysis feature to find groups. A k-core is a group of
entities that are each connected to at least k other entities in the group. So, the two-core group
consists of entities that are linked to at least two other entities in that group. As k increases, the
groups become smaller and more tightly interlinked. The highest core group might identify individual
groups of tightly interlinked entities.
Use the Grouped layout to visibly distinguish groups of interlinked entities. The Peacock layout and
Compact Peacock layout form visible areas of activity around highly connected entities. When these
areas of activity are separated on the charting surface, the direct and indirect connections between
highly connected entities are visible.
All the described features are on the Analyze tab, except for the layouts, which are on the Arrange
tab.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 133

Find a connecting network
To discover whether several entities of interest are connected by a network, you can specify them as
required entities in your search, then Analyst's Notebook can search for a network that connects
them all, directly or indirectly. If a network is found, it might help you to identify important
intermediaries.
Optionally, you can exclude specific types of entity and link, and specific entities, from the search.
For example, you might search for a network that joins several bank accounts that are involved in
fraud. The result might identify an intermediate account that distributes money to those accounts and
possibly plays a central role in the fraudulent activity. If you determine that the activity of that
intermediate account is legitimate, you can exclude it from the search, then search again.
If no single network joins all the entities, then the result can consist of the following elements:
• One or more networks that include some of the required entities.
• Single required entities that are not associated with any other required entity.
These results might identify possible gaps in intelligence. Or, you can refute the suggestion that a
known network joins all the entities.

Exclusions
You can exclude specific types of entity and link, and specific entities, from a search for a connecting
network. Use exclusions to configure or refine the search, and to test hypotheses.
To configure or refine the search, you might add exclusions in the following scenarios:
• A chart might contain telephone call and associate links between people. To discover whether a
network of communication joins several people, you can exclude the Associate link type. You can
exclude an item type at any time.
• You can exclude specific people that you know are not involved in an incident that you are
investigating.
• You might know that several people are employed by the same company. To avoid this known
association and search for an alternative network that connects the people, you can exclude the
company.
You can test hypotheses such as whether freezing a specific bank account prevents the movement of
funds between several other accounts of interest. After Analyst's Notebook identifies a connecting
network, you can exclude intermediate entities that you suspect might play a central role, and then
search again. The next search indicates whether an alternative network can join the entities of
interest.
You can exclude a specific entity only after Analyst's Notebook identifies it as an intermediate entity
in a connecting network.
Related tasks
Configuring and running a search
To configure a search for a connecting network, add required entities and set up item type exclusions
if required. The search results indicate whether a connecting network exists.
Refining the search

134 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

After Analyst's Notebook generates results of a search for a connecting network, you can exclude
item types and specific entities from the next search. You can exclude items in the current result that
are not relevant to your investigation.

Configuring and running a search

To configure a search for a connecting network, add required entities and set up item type exclusions
if required. The search results indicate whether a connecting network exists.

Procedure
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Find Networks group, click Find Connecting Network.
The Find Connecting Network pane opens.
2. To add entities to the search, select the entities on the charting surface. Then, in the Find
Connecting Network pane, click Add Selected Entities.
3. To exclude item types from the search:
a) In the Exclusions area, click Change.
The Change Exclusions window opens.
b) Select the entity types and link types to exclude, and then click OK.
The Exclusions area summarizes the exclusions.
4. Click Find Network.

Results
The Network entities list displays the required and intermediate entities that form the search result.
The intermediate entities are displayed in bold.
If the result consists of a single network that connects all the required entities, it is selected on the
charting surface and Analyst's Notebook fits it to the window.
If the result consists of smaller networks and unconnected entities, then the Network entities list
separates each of these elements with a horizontal line. Every network and unconnected entity in the
result is selected on the charting surface and Analyst's Notebook fits the result to the window.
To fit a specific network to the window, click a member of that network in the Network entities list.
Tip: A network might be obscured if the chart contains a lot of data, or the entities in the network are
far apart on the chart surface. To make the network clearer, select the network, copy it to a new chart,
then apply a suitable layout.
Related concepts
Exclusions
You can exclude specific types of entity and link, and specific entities, from a search for a connecting
network. Use exclusions to configure or refine the search, and to test hypotheses.

Search process
To find a connecting network, Analyst's Notebook combines the shortest paths between pairs of
required entities until a connecting network is produced.

Process
When you search for a connecting network, Analyst's Notebook finds the shortest paths between
pairs of required entities. Then, Analyst's Notebook gives each path a value. Direct links between
required entities have maximum value. The value of an indirect path is determined by the following
characteristics:

Find networks 135

• The number of its intermediate entities that are shared with other shortest paths.
• The number of other shortest paths that pass through those shared intermediate entities.
To construct the connecting network, the highest value paths are added to the result. If the result
contains all required entities, the process ends. Otherwise, the next highest value paths are added
until a network that joins all the required entities is produced.
This process ensures that the resulting network contains intermediate entities that are on the
greatest number of shortest paths between required entities, which helps you to identify important
intermediaries in the network. Where several shortest paths exist between a pair of required entities,
this process also ensures that the path with the most highly connected intermediate entities is added
to the network.

Example
The following diagram depicts a connecting network on a chart surface. Required entities are colored
red. Intermediate entities, and links in the connecting network, are colored blue. All other items are
not part of the connecting network.
The chart contains two shortest paths between entity 1 and entity 3. The path in the connecting
network contains an intermediate entity that is shared with the path between entity 2 and entity 3.
Entity 3 and entity 4 are joined by their direct link.

Refining the search

Procedure
1. In the Exclusions area, click Change.
The Change Exclusions window opens.
2. To exclude item types, select the entity types and link types to exclude.
3. To exclude specific entities, select entities in the Specific entities list.

136 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

The list contains intermediate entities in the current search result and entities that are already
excluded from the search.
4. Click OK.
The Exclusions area summarizes the exclusions.
5. Click Find Network.
New search results are generated.
Related concepts
Exclusions
You can exclude specific types of entity and link, and specific entities, from a search for a connecting
network. Use exclusions to configure or refine the search, and to test hypotheses.

Formatting search results

To emphasize the results of a search for a connecting network, you can format the items within a
found network. The emphasis can make the outcome of your analysis clearer for recipients of the
chart.

About this task

The entity formatting options apply only to entities represented by icons or theme lines.
Formatting search results modifies the existing format of chart items. If your chart already contains
meaningful formatting, consider making a copy of the chart.
If you format a network, then modify and rerun the search, Analyst's Notebook restores the original
format of the network so that out-of-date results are not emphasized.
Tip: If you want a network to remain formatted after you rerun the search, you must manually format
it. For example, you might want to visually contrast a connecting network with an alternative network
that you found by excluding intermediate entities then running the search again. To manually format a
network, click a member of the network in the Network entities list, then on the charting surface
right-click a member of the network and click Combined Properties. In the Edit Chart Items window,
you can collectively format the network items.

Procedure
1. In the Network entities list, click a member of the network that you want to format.
2. To format with the current settings, in the Find Connecting Network pane, click Format Network.
3. To configure formatting settings then format the network:
a) In the Find Connecting Network pane, click Options. The Formatting Options window opens.
b) Modify the settings.
c) To apply the settings to the network, click Format Network.
d) Click OK. The settings are saved and the Formatting Options window closes.
Tip: If the search result consists of smaller networks and unconnected entities, you can apply
different formatting to each of these elements. Click another element in the Network entities
list, then click Options to modify formatting options and format the element.

Results
The network is formatted.
To later restore the network to its original formatting, in the Find Connecting Network pane, click a
member of the network, and then click Undo Formatting.

Find networks 137

Searching for paths between two items
You can find out whether two items on your chart are connected, however indirectly, by searching for
a path between them. You can set criteria for which items are allowed on the path.

About this task

A path is a specific route between two items on a chart and it includes both entities and links. Most
commonly, a path is between two entities, but it can be between two links or an entity and a link. To
find a path, you must select exactly two items on a chart. The order in which you select the items
defines the direction in which Analyst's Notebook searches for the path. This order can be significant
if you choose to follow link directions for example, or look for events that happened in chronological
order.
By default, Analyst's Notebook finds the path between two items that has the fewest number of links.
When two shortest paths are found, they are both selected. You can specify that the path found must
also take account of:
• Link direction
• Entities or links with attribute values that match a condition that you specify
• Time flow (either forward or backward in time)
• The time gap between successive items on the path

Procedure
1. Select an origin item first, and then select a destination item on the chart.
2. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Find Networks group, click Find Path.
The Find Path window opens.
3. Click the General tab of the Find Path window and specify the general criteria for finding a path
between the two selected items.
4. Optional: To specify date and time criteria when you search for a path:
a) Click the Date and Time tab of the Find Path window.
b) Select the Follow Date and Time check box and specify the required criteria.
5. Click OK to search for a path between the two selected items.
Note: The OK button is displayed only when exactly two items are selected on the chart. If less
than or more than two items are selected, the Find Path Setup window displays a Close button
instead. To search for a path, click Close to save the settings, select two items, and follow the
preceding steps to find paths between the items.

General Find Path criteria

You can choose whether to take account of link direction and specify the items to include when
Analyst's Notebook searches for a path. When a path is found, you can choose what action to take.

Considering link direction

You can choose to consider link direction when Analyst's Notebook searches for paths by selecting
Use Link Directions and selecting one of the following options.

138 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Description
With Arrows Links are only traveled in the direction of their arrows.
Against Arrows Links are only traveled against the direction of their arrows.

Nondirectional links and bidirectional links are always considered as part of the path, regardless of
whether Use Link Directions is selected.

Restricting which items are included in the paths

You can restrict the search so that it looks for paths that contain only entities and links with an
attribute whose value matches a specified condition. Select the attributes from the Include Entities
with Attribute and Include Links with Attribute lists and configure the conditions by using the
controls that appear. To include entities or links with an attribute of any value, select the Is
Present condition. To include entities or links that don't have the selected attribute, select the Is
Absent condition.
If (any) is selected, attributes are ignored when Analyst's Notebook searches for a path.
You can choose whether to include hidden items when Analyst's Notebook searches for a path. To
include hidden items, select the Reveal Hidden check box. All hidden items on the chart are revealed
when a path is found.
Note: If the Reveal Hidden status in the main application is set to Reveal Fully or Reveal in Gray,
this check box is selected by default.

Resulting actions
You can choose the actions that Analyst's Notebook takes when it finds a path:

Action Description
Select Selects all the entities on the path.
Entities
Select Links Selects all the links on the path.
Hide Others Hides all chart items that are not on the path.
This option is disabled when Reveal Hidden is selected.
Tip: To show all the hidden items, click the View tab, and then in the Show and
Hide Items group, click Show All.

Add Depth Adds an attribute to each of the chart items on the path, indicating how many
Attribute entities removed they are from the origin entity. The origin entity has a depth
attribute value of zero.
You can select an existing Number attribute to use, or specify a new one. Only
Number attributes that are defined in your chart are available in the list. If you enter
a new attribute, it is created as a Number attribute.
If you add a depth attribute to all items on the path, you can remove that attribute
from any chart items that are not on the path by selecting the Remove Attribute
from Others check box.

Find networks 139

Date and time Find Path criteria
You can set the rules for finding a path between two items based on the relative dates and times of
chart items along the path.

Searching forward or backward in time

You can search for a path along which the date and time of each successive item must be later
(forward) or earlier (backward) in time than the previous item.

Limiting the path to a specified period

You can limit a path to a fixed time period. Items with dates and times outside this period are not
considered as part of a path.
When you select the Earliest Date and Time check box, the specified date and time defaults to the
date and time of the origin item, if one is selected and it has a date and time. If no items are selected
on the chart or the selected origin item does not have a date and time, it defaults to the earliest date
and time of all items on the chart.
When you select the Latest Date and Time check box, the specified date and time defaults to the
date and time of the destination item, if one is selected and it has a date and time. If no items are
selected on the chart or the selected destination item does not have a date and time, it defaults to the
latest date and time of all items on the chart.

Selecting the type of path to find

You can choose whether Analyst's Notebook searches for the path with the fewest number of steps or
the path, which arrives at the destination item at the earliest date and time. If more than one path
meets the specified criteria, then all such paths are shown.

Setting date and time options

When Analyst's Notebook searches for a path, you can specify whether the date and time is
considered on entities, links, or both.
An item does not need a date or time to be considered in relation to the times of other items on the
path.
If an item has only a date, it is still included in the path if its date does not contradict the specified
flow of time. For example, the date must be the same as or after the date of the previous item on the
path when the time flow is forwards.
You can specify the behavior for items without a date.

Option Description
Stop Stops the search along this path and the item is not included in the result.
This option might be useful for charts that contain telephone call data or financial
transactions, when all links are expected to have both a date and a time.

Continue Includes the item in the path.

This option might be useful when you want the path to continue through theme
lines, which do not have a date.

Continue if If the item is Ordered and is in the correct position relative to the previous item on
Ordered the path, it is included in the path. Otherwise, the search is stopped along this path.

140 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Specifying each item on a path is within a certain time of the previous item
You can restrict the path to contain only successive items that have a date and time within a time gap
that you specify. For example, you can specify that every link on a path must take place within an hour
of the previous link. This option can apply to just links, just entities, or both entities and links,
depending on the options selected in the Date and Time area.

Listing linked entities

The Linked Entities pane lists the entities that are linked to the selected entity. To help you identify
potentially significant entities, you can sort the list on different properties.

Procedure
1. Select an entity on the charting surface.
2. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the List group, click Linked Entities Pane.
The Linked Entities pane opens and lists the entities that are linked to the selected entity.
3. To choose from the full list of properties that the list can be sorted on, click Sort then select a
property from the list.

Property Description
Entity The label of the entity. The list is sorted in ascending alphanumeric order. If an
entity has no label, its identity is used.
Link The label of the link that connects the selected entity and the linked entity. The
list is sorted in ascending alphanumeric order. If the connection consists of
several links, then the number of links is displayed, for example (2 links).
Onward The number of other entities that the linked entity is connected to. The list is
Entities sorted in descending numerical order.
Angle The positional angle of linked entities in relation to the selected entity. Entities
that are positioned directly above the selected entity, at zero degrees, are listed
first, and degree position increases down the list so that entities are listed in
clockwise order.
Position The list is sorted so that panning between entities is minimized. You can walk
through the items, clicking them to view their position in the chart. The entities at
the top of the list are typically the entities nearest the selected entity.

Related tasks
Finding items linked to a selection
You can extend the current selection of items on a chart to include entities that are linked to the
selection, directly or indirectly, and, optionally, the links between them. You can set rules about
which items are selected.

Following a path of linked entities

To explore the selected entity's network, you can choose an entity in the Linked Entities pane and see
what it is linked to.

Procedure
To list all of the onward entities for a linked entity:

Find networks 141

1. In the list, identify an entity of interest, then click it. Analyst's Notebook pans the chart to center
the entity in the window.
Tip: Entities that are connected to many other entities might be significant. The Onward Entities
column helps you to identify these entities. To summarize the immediate network of a linked
entity, hover over its label in the list. If the entity has 12 or fewer onward entities, a tooltip lists
their labels. If the entity has more than 12 onward entities, a tooltip displays the label of the first
10 onward entities, and the number of other onward entities. If an entity has no label, its identity
is used.
2. To see what the entity is linked to, in the list, click the List Linked Entities button beside the entity
label.
The content of the list is replaced.
3. To list the linked entities for your previous selection, click List Linked Entities again. The icon and
identity of the previous selection is displayed again at the top of the Linked Entities pane.

Finding items linked to a selection

You can extend the current selection of items on a chart to include entities that are linked to the
selection, directly or indirectly, and, optionally, the links between them. You can set rules about
which items are selected.

About this task

Options are available on the Select tab of the Analyst's Notebook ribbon, in the Extend Selection
group. Use these options to extend your selection in a number of ways. Alternatively, you can use the
Find Linked Items feature to further extend your selection.
Before you find linked items, you must select one or more items on the chart as a starting point for
the search. Typically, you select one or more entities as the starting point. However, you can select
links. When you select a link, Analyst's Notebook automatically selects the entity at one or both ends
of the selected link, depending on other settings (for example, link directions). It then searches for
linked items.
You can specify that the linked items found must take account of:
• Search depth
• Link direction
• Entities or links, with attribute values that match a condition that you specify
• Time flow (either forward or backward in time)
• The time gap between successive items on the path

Procedure
1. Select one or more items on the chart.
2. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Find Networks group, click Find Linked Items > Find
Linked Items.
The Find Items Linked to Selection window opens.
Note: To use the current settings, select one or more items and click Find Linked Items > Find
Linked Items with Current Setup.
3. Click the General tab of the Find Items Linked to Selection window and specify the general
criteria for finding items that are linked to the selection.

142 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

4. Optional: To specify date and time criteria when you search for items that are linked to the
selection:
a) Click the Date and Time tab of the Find Items Linked to Selection window.
b) Select the Follow Date and Time check box and specify the required criteria.
5. Click OK to find items that are linked to the selection.
Note: The OK button is displayed only when one or more items are selected on the chart. If no
items are selected, the Find Linked Setup window displays a Close button instead. To find linked
items, click Close to save the settings, select one or more chart items, and follow the preceding
steps.
Related tasks
Listing linked entities
The Linked Entities pane lists the entities that are linked to the selected entity. To help you identify
potentially significant entities, you can sort the list on different properties.

General Find Linked criteria

You can choose how far removed from the original selection to search, whether to take account of link
direction, and specify the items to include when Analyst's Notebook searches for linked items. When
Analyst's Notebook finds linked items, you can choose what action to take.

Setting search depth

You can choose how far removed from the original selection to search by setting a search depth. For
example, by using a search depth of one Analyst's Notebook looks for only those entities that are
linked directly to the original selection. By using a search depth of three, Analyst's Notebook looks for
items that can be indirectly linked three levels away from the original selection.
Clear the Search Depth check box to search all entities that are linked to the original selection,
regardless of how many levels of links there are between them.

Considering link direction

You can choose to consider link direction when Analyst's Notebook searches linked items by selecting
Use Link Directions and selecting one of the following options.

Format Description
With Arrows Only links that have an arrow pointing away from the original selection are
searched.
Against Arrows Only links that have an arrow pointing towards the original selection are searched.

Nondirectional links and bidirectional links are always considered when searching for linked items,
regardless of whether Use Link Directions is selected.

Restricting which items are included when searching for linked items
You can restrict the items that are included to only those entities and links with an attribute whose
value matches a specified condition. Select the attributes from the Include Entities with Attribute
and Include Links with Attribute lists and configure the conditions by using the controls that appear.
To include entities or links with an attribute of any value, select the Is Present condition. To include
entities or links that do not have the selected attribute, select the Is Absent condition.
If (any) is selected, attributes are ignored when Analyst's Notebook searches for linked items.

Find networks 143

You can choose whether to include hidden items when Analyst's Notebook searches for linked items.
To include hidden items, select the Reveal Hidden check box. All hidden items on the chart are
revealed when linked items are found.
Note: If the Reveal Hidden status in the main application is set to Reveal Fully or Reveal in Gray,
this check box is selected by default.

Resulting actions
You can choose the actions that Analyst's Notebook takes when it finds linked items:

Action Description
Select Selects all of the entities that are found by the Find Linked operation.
Entities
Select Links Selects all of the links that are found by the Find Linked operation.
Hide Others Hides all chart items that are not linked to the original selection.
This option is disabled when Reveal Hidden is selected.
Tip: To show all of the hidden items, click the View tab, and then in the Show and
Hide Items group, click Show All.

Add Depth Adds an attribute to each of the linked items, showing how many entities removed
Atttribute they are from the nearest item in the original selection. Items in the original
selection have a depth attribute value of zero.
You can select an existing Number attribute to use, or specify a new one. Only
Number attributes that are defined in your chart are available in the list. If you
enter a new attribute, it is created as a Number attribute.
If you add a depth attribute to all items that are linked to the selection, you can
remove that attribute from any chart items that are not found by Find Linked by
selecting the Remove Attribute from Others check box.

Date and time Find Linked criteria

You can set the rules for finding items that are linked to the original selection based on the relative
dates and times of chart items that are linked to the selection.

Searching forward or backward in time

You can search for items that are linked to the original selection along which the date and time of
each successive item must be later (forward) or earlier (backward) in time than the previous item.

Limiting the search to a specified period

You can limit the items that are found to a fixed time period. Items with dates and times outside this
period are not selected.
When you select the Earliest Date and Time check box, the specified time defaults to the earliest
date and time on the chart.
When you select the Latest Date and Time check box, the specified time defaults to the latest date
and time on the chart.

144 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Setting date and time options
When you find linked items, you can specify whether the date and time is considered on entities,
links, or both.
An item does not need a date or time to be considered in relation to the times of other items.
If an item has just a date, it is included in the selection, if the date does not contradict the specified
flow of time. For example, the date must be the same as or after the date of the previous selected
item when the time flow is forwards.
You can specify the behavior for items without a date.

Option Description
Stop Does not find the item. No further items that are linked to this item are considered,
but items up to the item without a date are found.
This option might be useful for charts that contain telephone call data or financial
transactions, when all links are expected to have both a date and a time.

Continue Finds the item and continues to look for further linked items, according to the
Search Depth setting.
This option might be useful when you want to continue through theme lines that do
not have a date.

Continue if If the item is Ordered and is in the correct position, it is included. Otherwise, no
Ordered further linked items are searched.

Specifying each item on a path is within a certain time of the previous item
You can restrict the linked items to contain only successive items that have a date and time within a
time gap that you specify. For example, you can specify that every link on a path must take place
within an hour of the previous link. This option can apply to just links, just entities, or both entities and
links, depending on the options selected in the Date and Time area.

Searching for clusters of entities

A cluster is a group of entities that have more connections to each other than to entities outside the
group. Finding clusters is useful in charts that contain high volumes of data with many interlinked
entities to find potential groupings such as key players in a criminal investigation.

About this task

As part of the search process, Analyst's Notebook measures how interconnected each group of
entities is. This measure of interconnectivity is known as the binding strength.
The method that Analyst's Notebook uses to calculate binding strength is based on link connectivity.
In its simplest form, this method considers the binding strength of a group of entities to be the
number of links that must be deleted to split the group into two distinct chart fragments. For example,
the binding strength of the chart in the following diagram is 1. To split it into two, you need to delete
only the single link between Entity C and Entity E.

Find networks 145

Splitting the chart identifies two chart fragments. To identify clusters Analyst's Notebook continues to
split the groups of entities, until it can no longer divide the chart any further. It assigns the highest
binding strength that it can to each item during the process. Any connected group of entities that has
a binding strength greater than its immediate neighbors is considered to be a cluster. In this chart,
Analyst's Notebook finds two clusters, one with a binding strength of three (entities A, B, C, and D)
and the other with a binding strength of four (entities E, F, G, H, and I). You can filter clusters by
specifying a binding strength threshold. Any cluster with a binding strength below the threshold is not
reported. In the example, if the binding strength threshold is set to three, both clusters are reported.
If the threshold is raised to four, Analyst's Notebook reports only the cluster with a binding strength
of four.
Every group of connected entities has a binding strength; the higher the binding strength, the more
interconnected the entities. Link connectivity clusters cannot overlap, so entities cannot belong to
more than one cluster.

Procedure
To search for clusters of entities:
1. Click the Analyze tab.
2. Optional: To modify or review the search criteria, in the Find Networks group, click Find Clusters
> Find Clusters Setup. The Setup Clusters window opens.
a) Enter a binding strength threshold.
The binding strength threshold determines the minimum binding strength a group of entities
must have before Analyst's Notebook considers it to be a cluster.
b) When you enter a binding strength threshold, you can choose how Analyst's Notebook
determines the binding strength when there are multiple links between entities or values on
the links. This setting is known as the link weight.

146 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Table 1: Link Weight settings

Link Weight Setting Description

Connections Only Treats each connection as a single link regardless of how many links
there are between two entities. This setting is the most common
option.
Connection Links Counts all links between entities. For example, by using the
Connection Links setting, this group of entities has a binding
strength of six because six links must be deleted to split the chart in
two.

Link Attribute Adds the values of a specified Number attribute on each link in a
connection. Select the attribute in the Link Weight Attribute list.
Connection Sum Calculates the total value of all the numeric parts of the link labels
Links between two entities.
c) In the Cluster Members area, specify how Analyst's Notebook handles any clusters that it finds.

Find networks 147

Table 1: Cluster Members settings

Setting Description
Select Selects entities and the links between them that are found in a cluster. The
Cluster selection of all other chart items is cleared.
Members
Hide Others Hides all entities and links that do not belong to a cluster.
Note: If Reveal Hidden mode is selected when you search for clusters, then
the hidden items remain visible.

Cluster Assigns an attribute to every cluster member. You can select an existing Text
Attribute attribute from the list or enter a new attribute name. Analyst's Notebook
creates a new Text attribute with this name. Analyst's Notebook assigns
attribute values to the cluster members:
• C1 for members of the cluster that has the highest binding strength.
• C2 for the cluster that has the next highest binding strength, and so on.
If two clusters have the same binding strength, the cluster with the most
entities takes priority when the cluster attribute is assigned.

Binding Assigns an attribute to every chart item to indicate the binding strength that it
Strength would be assigned if it was part of a cluster. You can select an existing
Attribute Number attribute from the list or enter a new attribute name. Analyst's
Notebook creates a new Number attribute with this name.
3. To search for clusters, in the Find Networks group, click Find Clusters > Link Connectivity
Clusters.

What to do next
To emphasize any clusters that are found, you can change the color or line width of the links in each
cluster. To format the links in a cluster, select all the links in the cluster, right-click on one of the links,
then click Combined Properties. In the Edit Chart Items window, you can collectively format the
links.

Extending clusters
Analyst's Notebook can extend selections to include entities that are connected to a cluster but that
are not bound tightly enough to form part of the cluster itself.

About this task

If you add a binding strength attribute when you find clusters, you can then extend the cluster
selection to include any neighboring entities that have a lower binding strength. For example, the
chart in the following diagram has a central cluster with a binding strength of three. As part of your
analysis, you might decide to select any linked entities that have a binding strength of two and then
analyze the final selection further.

148 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Procedure
To extend the clusters selection to include more entities and links:
1. With the clusters selected, in the Find Networks group, click Find Linked Items.
2. From the Include Entities with Attribute list, select the binding strength attribute that you
assigned when you searched for clusters, select a condition, and then enter any values.
For example, in the chart that is shown, a single cluster is found, which has a binding strength of
three. You might want to select entities that are linked to it that have a binding strength of two by
links that have a binding strength of two. Select the condition equal to and enter a binding
strength value of 2, then repeat the step for the Include Links with Attribute list.
3. Click OK.
In the example chart, two entities and two links are added to the selection.

Find networks 149

150 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Map chart items
To help analyze items with location-based information, chart items can be visualized on map
surfaces.
Mapping chart items can be used when investigating events that occur in a particular location or sets
of locations.

Map chart items in i2 Maps

You can create chart items that contain location data, and visualize them on map surfaces using i2
Maps.
When your i2 Analyze records contain data in geospatial properties, their geographic coordinates and
map locations are displayed in the Properties tab of the Record Inspector.
You can add coordinates for entities that have the Geographic Location property configured in your
schema. For example, location specific entities such as addresses support the inclusion of geospatial
information. By default the coordinate system used is WGS84, where the first value is North (latitude)
and the second is East (longitude). If you have coordinate values from a different system, such as
Easting and Northing, you might be able to convert them to WGS84 datum when you create your new
record.
To work with i2 Maps, go to the Analyse tab of the ribbon and click Map Provider in the Gain Insight
group. Select i2 Maps from the Map Provider list, then click Maps. The i2 Maps window opens and
Analyst's Notebook displays the base map configured by your system administrator. Click Options to
see the base maps and overlays that are available in your deployment.
You can also add entities to the map from the chart surface. For example, you could add a number of
different addresses to the map to understand more about their locations in relation to each other, or
to events that occurred in that location. If a record has coordinate values entered in the Geographic
Location field of the Record Inspector Properties, a small version of the map is displayed with a
location marker. To add to the map, right-click the chart entity and select Add to map from the menu.

Map chart items in i2 Esri

To analyze Analyst's Notebook chart items that contain location data, you can visualize them on map
surfaces in the i2 Esri Maps window.
You can connect to Esri ArcGIS Online and select any publicly available map in the Basemap Gallery.
Alternatively, you might configure Analyst's Notebook to connect to your own internal Esri Portal for
ArcGIS.
Chart items that contain location information in the form of coordinates can be displayed on the map.
For example, you might decide to map chart items if you are investigating information about events
that occurred in a particular location or set of locations.
Access the i2 Esri Maps feature from the Analyze tab of the ribbon in the Gain Insight group. Select
i2 Esri Maps from the Map Provider list, then click Maps. The i2 Esri Maps window opens and
Analyst's Notebook automatically displays the map.
Note: You must have an internet connection to connect to Esri ArcGIS Online and access the publicly
available maps.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 151

Selecting maps
The maps available for selection depend on various security settings. The available maps are located
in the Basemap Gallery.

About this task

When you open the i2 Esri Maps window for the first time, a default map is displayed. The other maps
that are available to you are shown in a gallery at the edge of the window. If the map that you require
is not visible in the gallery, you might need to log in to your ArcGIS portal instance.
When you select a map, it is associated with the chart. When you save your chart, if one or more chart
items have been sent to the map, the association is saved with the chart. The extents and zoom level
of the map are also saved.
If you create a new chart or open an existing chart, Analyst's Notebook displays the last open map
unless another map is already associated with the chart that you are opening.

Procedure
To display a map and associate it with the current chart:
1. Click any map in the gallery to select it. If the gallery is not shown, click Map Gallery to make the
maps available for selection. To close the gallery, click Map Gallery again. Alternatively, double-
click a map to select it and close the map selection at the same time.
2. Optional: If the required map is not visible in the gallery, you might need to log in to your ArcGIS
portal instance. In the i2 Esri Maps window, click Log In and enter your user name and password.
If you do not know your user name or password, see your system administrator.
After you log in, more maps might become available for you to select.
3. If the map that you selected contains layers that are stored on a secure server, you might need to
provide further credentials. If a Windows Security window opens, enter your credentials for the
location where the map is stored. If you do not know this information, see your system
administrator.

Location information
For an entity to be mapped successfully in the i2 Esri Maps window, it must contain location
information in the form of coordinates.
You can enter or store coordinates on entities in one or more of the following places:
• Labels
• Descriptions
• Cards
• Attributes with specific semantic type assignments
• Data records
An entity can contain several coordinates that are stored in different places. After mapping, if the
coordinates are different, then the entity is displayed on the map in each location.

Coordinates in text
You can enter coordinates in labels, descriptions, or cards as part of their summary or description.
Coordinates that are stored in text require an identifying prefix (LOC/) and suffix (//). For example,
LOC/28°16'45.55"N 81°33'59.44"W//.

152 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Coordinates in attributes
You can enter coordinates in a single attribute, or you can split them into their constituent parts and
enter them as a combination of attribute values. The prefix and suffix are unnecessary when you use
attributes. For example, 28°16'45.55"N and 81°33'59.44"W.
Coordinates or the constituent parts of a location are detected in attributes that have the following
semantic type assignments:
• Altitude
• BNG
• Datum Code
• Decimal Degree
• DMS
• Easting
• Hemisphere
• Latitude
• Longitude
• MGRS
• Northing
• UPS
• UTM
• UTM Zone

Coordinates in data records

You can map items from data sources (for example, iBase), if the data records contain coordinates.
Coordinates are detected in data records that use the prefix and suffix LOC/ and //. The appropriate
semantic types must be assigned to the data record properties that make up the location.

Sending chart items to the i2 Esri Maps window

Items with location information in the form of coordinates can be sent to the i2 Esri Maps window.

About this task

When an entity contains coordinates, it is placed at that location on the map. If an entity contains
multiple sets of coordinates, the entity is displayed on the map at each different location. If an entity
does not contain coordinates, you can drag it to the map. The coordinates of the location where it is
dropped are assigned to newly created Latitude and Longitude attribute instances.

Procedure
1. Select the entities that you want to send to the map.
2. Click the Analyze tab on the ribbon.
3. In the Gain Insight group, check that i2 Esri Maps is selected from the Map Provider list, then
click Maps.
The i2 Esri Maps window opens.
4. Ensure that the correct map is open or select the required map.
5. Add entities to the map in one of the following ways:

Map chart items 153

• In the i2 Esri Maps window, click Add Selected Entities. The selected entities that contain
coordinates are added to the map. Entities that do not contain coordinates are not added and a
message is displayed in the status bar of the i2 Esri Maps window.
• Right-click one of the selected entities on the chart and select Add to Map. The selected entities
that contain coordinates are added to the map. Entities that do not contain coordinates are not
added and a message is displayed in the status bar of the i2 Esri Maps window.
• Drag multiple selected entities onto the map. Entities that contain coordinates are added to the
map at their coordinate locations. Entities that do not contain coordinates are not added and a
message is displayed in the status bar of the i2 Esri Maps window.
• Drag a single entity on to the map. If it has coordinates, it is added to the map at that location. If
it does not contain coordinates, the coordinates of the location where the entity is dropped are
assigned to newly created Latitude and Longitude attribute instances.

Results
The map pans to show the selected entities on the map.
If a problem occurs when you send entities to the map, a warning message is displayed at the bottom
of the map. You can try the following resolutions:
• Look at the location information for an entity and check that it is in the correct format. Right-click
the entity on the chart, and from the menu, select Edit Item Properties.
• The coordinates on a chart item might be outside the maximum valid extents of the current map. If
you change to a map that has appropriate maximum valid extents, the chart items are displayed.

Working in the i2 Esri Maps window

Navigate the map window, find or remove mapped items, and copy the map view as a picture.

Navigating the i2 Esri Maps window

To zoom in, double-click the map. To zoom out, press Ctrl and double-click. If your mouse has a
wheel, rotate the wheel forward and back to zoom in and out.
To pan to different parts of the map, drag the map to a different position or use the arrow keys.

Mapped items
When a map contains large numbers of mapped entities, it can be hard to see how those entities
correlate with the entities on your chart. To find an entity on the map, select it on the chart. The map
pans to the corresponding entity on the map and selects it. If you select an entity on the map, the
chart pans to the corresponding entity on the chart and selects it.
To remove entities from a map, select them, then press Delete. Alternatively, right-click one of the
selected items and select Remove Selected or Remove Unselected. The items are removed from the
map but they are not deleted from the chart. You can also remove all entities from the map by clicking
Remove All at the top of the i2 Esri Maps window. Deleting an item on the chart also removes it from
the map.
When you edit the display properties of an entity by editing its chart item properties, the display is
updated on the corresponding entity on the map.

Copy the map as a picture

You can put a copy of the current map into another document as a picture. For example, if you are
writing a report in Microsoft Word, you can include a picture of the map. To copy a picture of the

154 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

current map to the clipboard, at the top of the i2 Esri Maps window click Copy as Picture. The
current extent of the map and any entities on the map are copied to the clipboard for you to paste into
another document.

Drawing shapes on a map

It is sometimes useful to highlight certain areas on a map by drawing shapes.

About this task

A number of shapes are available for you to draw, for example point marker, polygon, or arrow.
Note: Shapes are not geodesic, that is, they do not follow the contours of the map. They are flat
drawings.

Procedure

1. In the i2 Esri Maps window, right-click on the map and click Draw or click the drawing tool.
2. Click the shape that you require.
3. To draw the shape, do one of the following:
Option Description
Triangle, Arrow, Drag an area and release the mouse button to complete the shape.
Rectangle, Circle, Ellipse
Line, Polygon Click to insert the first point, then click to add extra points. Double-
click to complete the line or area.
Freehand Line, Freehand Drag a line or an area and release the mouse button to finish.
Polygon
Point Click the required position.
4. Optional: To delete a shape, select it and press Delete.
Note: You can close the drawing pane at any time by clicking the drawing tool.

Opening a bar chart that shows distance from a selected entity

When a single entity is selected on the map, you can open a bar chart and see the distribution of other
entities on your chart. Compare how far they are from the selected entity, based on their location
information.

About this task

It can be useful to see how close other chart items are to a specified mapped entity and how the
other chart items are distributed in relation to it. For example, if you know the location of a stolen car,
you can look at other crimes that happened at a range of distances from this location. You can then
add some or all of these entities to the map. If you then open a histogram that indicates the dates and
times of those crimes, you can use filters to discover other crimes in nearby areas that occurred in a
similar time period.
When you open a bar chart that shows the entity distribution, you can choose the number of steps
(rows) for the bar chart and the distance range to use for each step.
You can open more than one bar chart to show a range of distances from different entities.

Map chart items 155

Procedure
1. Select a single entity on the map, then click Distance Bar Chart.
The Bar Charts page of the Bar Charts and Histograms pane opens with a new bar chart. The bar
chart shows a range of distances away from the selected entity and how many entities are located
within each range.
Note: At any time, you can select the central entity that was used for the bar chart by clicking the

select central item button next to the Steps list.

2. Optional: To change the number of rows, select the required number of steps from the Steps list at
the top of the bar chart.
Note: By default, empty rows are not shown. To show empty rows, go to the Options page of the
Bar Charts and Histograms pane and select the Include Empty Rows check box.
3. Optional: To change the distance range for each step, select the required value from the list of
distances next to the Steps list.

Results
The bar chart shows how many entities are located in each distance range from the original entity.
Any items that are located outside the furthest range are not counted.
Select a row of the bar chart to focus on entities that are in a specified distance range and filter out
the other entities. The entities in the selected row are selected on the map and on the chart.
Related concepts
Focus on items of interest
You can focus on specific chart items or categories of data by viewing distributions for a selection of
your chart data. For example, in a histogram you might want to see a count of only those items that
are currently selected on your chart. You can also apply filters to bar charts and histograms to look at
specific areas of interest.

Configuring an Esri Portal for ArcGIS

By default, i2 Esri is configured to connect to Esri ArcGIS Online. You can configure the connection to
point to your own Esri Portal for ArcGIS by editing the configuration file.

About this task

To connect to your own Esri Portal for ArcGIS, you must edit the portal.config file. This file is
located in the following folder:
%AppData%\Local\i2\i2 Analyst's Notebook 9\ESRI Portal
The Microsoft constant special item ID list (CSIDL) is used to represent the standard folder. The
actual location might vary between different versions of Microsoft Windows.
The configuration file contains the following information:

<Portal>
<Uri>http://www.arcgis.com/sharing/rest</Uri>
<ItemId>c0a0cb9dbefb452b89f38ce4a9477834</ItemId>
</Portal>

Where:

156 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Uri Is the URI of the Esri Portal for ArcGIS that you want to connect to.
Note: This URI should be in the following format http://<host
name>/sharing/rest

ItemID (optional) Is the ID of the map that you want to connect to by default in your
Esri Portal for ArcGIS.

Procedure
1. Locate the portal.config file and open it in your preferred editor.
2. Replace the URI with the URI of your Esri Portal for ArcGIS.
3. You can specify a map to open by default or use the first available map on your Esri Portal for
ArcGIS:
• To specify a default map, replace the ItemID with the ID of the required map.
To obtain the ID of a map, go to the portal home page and click the map to open it. The ID is the
number at the end of the address. For example, the map http://www.arcgis.com/home/
webmap/viewer.html?webmap=c0a0cb9dbefb452b89f38ce4a9477834 has an ID of
c0a0cb9dbefb452b89f38ce4a9477834.
• To use the first available map, delete the following line:

<ItemId>c0a0cb9dbefb452b89f38ce4a9477834</ItemId>

4. Save the file.

Results
You are now configured to connect to your own Esri Portal for ArcGIS. You must restart Analyst's
Notebook for the change to take effect.
To return to the default settings after you edit the configuration file, delete the portal.config file.
If the configuration file or the folder that contains it is deleted, a new configuration file is
automatically created that contains the default settings.

Map chart items in Google Earth

You can map entities and links in Google Earth where they are displayed with their Analyst's
Notebook icons, labels, and link colors. Descriptions that contain coordinates, and card summaries
from cards that contain coordinates, are also displayed in Google Earth.
Google Earth adds the entities as temporary places, which are grouped under the chart name. You
can save these temporary places for reuse later by adding them to the My Places folder in Google
Earth.
Google Earth mapping has its own Google Earth pane that reports on the items sent to the map
surface and provides options for changing the way that mapping works.

Map chart items 157

Google Earth settings
Analyst's Notebook configuration options determine where addresses and coordinates are detected
when entities are sent to a mapping surface.
Analyst's Notebook can be configured to restrict which entity properties it looks in for location
information. Restricting the properties helps to improve mapping performance and can also ensure
that specific data is used as the source of mapping information. For example, you might choose that
Analyst's Notebook looks only for location information in labels and attributes because it is the
standard place for your organization to store this type of information.
For successful mapping, entities must contain either coordinates or addresses.
Note: Coordinates or addresses are not required for links because their position is determined by the
entities at each link end. Links are always plotted as a single line.
The following entity properties can be specified as holding location information:
• Labels
• Descriptions
• Card summaries
• Card descriptions
• Attributes
• Data records
Specify the properties to search in the Chart Items panel of the Options page in the Map Chart Items
pane.
Coordinates
Coordinates can be entered as text (identified by a prefix and suffix) or as attribute values. For
example, you might enter the coordinates in the description and the datum as an attribute value.
If you do not want to use the standard LOC/ prefix and // suffix for text coordinates, you can
change the values. On the Chart Items panel of the Options page, click Specify Details under the
Labels, Descriptions and Cards check box.
When you enter multiple coordinates for the same entity, consider how the chart item is displayed
on the map. Each mapped chart item is displayed with the same label appended with a number,
and has the same description. This description might be confusing where a chart item has
coordinates in the label, description, and card summary.
Addresses
Address information that can be converted by Analyst's Notebook into coordinate values can be
added to a mapping surface.
Two ways of identifying addresses are available:
• By using a prefix of ADDR/ and a suffix of //
For example, ADDR/ My street, My city, My postal code//
If you do not want to use the standard ADDR/ prefix and // suffix, you can change the values.
On the Chart Items panel of the Options page, click Specify Details under the Labels,
Descriptions and Cards check box.
• By deriving it from the label, description, and card properties as a whole.
Note: If an address is converted into a coordinate, then the item is focused when you map it. A
message is displayed if the address is not able to be converted.

158 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Where an entity has multiple coordinates or addresses, at more than one location, then the entity is
displayed at each of those locations on the map surface.

How sending coordinates to Google Earth works

When you send chart items to Google Earth, Analyst's Notebook starts Google Earth. Google Earth
zooms to the mapped items, which are shown as placemarks. Google Earth also lists the chart and the
mapped items in the Temporary Places folder in the Places panel.
Relevant chart item properties are used as placemark properties:
• The entity or link label becomes the name of the placemark.
• The Analyst's Notebook icon is used as the placemark icon.
• Your coordinates are displayed as longitude and latitude values.
• The description is displayed as the placemark description.
• For entities, the card summary is displayed if the card contains coordinates. For links, card
summaries and descriptions are never displayed.
Analyst's Notebook saves placemark information in a temporary file, and it is this file that is sent to
Google Earth. When you close Google Earth, all Analyst's Notebook placemarks are lost unless you
move them to the Google Earth My Places folder, for example by saving.
Note: When you send further items to Google Earth from the same chart, you are prompted to reload
the temporary file. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel. Alternatively, you can choose to disable this
prompt in Google Earth.

Sharing mapping data with other users

Sending chart items to Google Earth

Items with coordinates and addresses can be sent to Google Earth.

About this task

Any entity that you want to send to Google Earth must have an address, or coordinates. Links do not
require coordinates because they are drawn according to the coordinates entered for their link ends.
If just one of the link ends has multiple coordinates, then a link is drawn to each of those locations in
Google Earth.

Procedure
1. Select the chart items that you want to send.
2. Click the Analyze tab on the ribbon.
3. If more than one map provider is available, in the Gain Insight group select Google Earth from the
Map Provider list.
If Google Earth is the only map provider, in the Gain Insight group, click Maps.
The Google Earth pane opens.
4. In the Map Chart Items pane, click the Sent Items tab.
5. Click Send Chart Item.

Map chart items 159

When coordinates cannot be found
When you send chart items to Google Earth, you might see the message: No coordinates found
on the Map Chart Items page.

Procedure
To work out what is wrong, you can try:
• For a single entity, right-click the selected entity, and from the menu, select Edit Item Properties.
Browse the pages to find out where the coordinates are entered.
• For multiple entities, right-click the selected entities, and from the menu, select Combined
Properties. This enables you to determine whether there are coordinates that are set, for
example, as attributes.
Note: If the coordinates are correct, and are entered as attributes, check how the attributes are
set in the Specify Attribute Details window.

Finding a mapped chart item

When large amounts of data are placed on a mapping surface, it can be hard to correlate charted
items with their representations on a chart surface. Items that are listed as sent to the chart surface
can be used to control the focus of the mapping application.

Procedure
To find a mapped item:
1. Select a chart item on the charting surface or on the Sent Items page of the Google Earth pane.
2. Click Find Selected Item in Google Earth.
This command causes Google Earth to center and zoom to that location.

Showing and hiding chart items based on date and time

When you send chart items to Google Earth that have a date, time, or both, all items are initially
mapped and a time slider is displayed.
The time span is from the earliest date/time of the mapped items to the latest date/time.
To select a period to view, move the time slider and Google Earth shows and hides the appropriate
place marks.
Note: Date and time properties are used as start time, there is no end time so as you advance the
time slider, the collection of entities and links increase until they are all visible.

Setting up mapping options

The options that you select in the Options page are unique to each chart and are saved with it.

Sending more items or replacing items on the map

You can send chart items that have addresses or coordinates to a map. If you change item properties,
the item is replaced on the map.

Procedure
On the Options page of the Map Chart Items pane, do one of the following steps:
• Select Adds to the Map to add the selected chart items to the map.

160 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

• Select Replaces Items on the Map to remove existing chart items from the map and replace them
with new items.

Sending items immediately to a map

You can immediately send selected chart items to a map.
Select the Selecting Items Sends them Immediately check box to instantly map the currently
selected chart items whenever the selection is changed by using, for example:
• Select all
• Select sets
• Visual Search
• List Items, bounding box selections
Note: If an item on the chart is updated, it is automatically updated on the map.

Sending links and inverting link colors

You can prevent links from being displayed and invert link colors on items on the map.

Procedure
Do one of of the following steps:
• Clear the Send Links check box to prevent the display of links in Google Earth even if selected on
the chart. When the check box is selected, links are displayed on the map when selected in
Analyst's Notebook and sent to Google Earth.
• Select the Invert Link Colors check box to improve the clarity of the Google Earth map when the
links are drawn in a color that does not display well on the map.

Mapping theme lines (virtual paths)

You can map theme lines, such as people or vehicles, that have links to chart items with dates and
times. The items must have coordinates and not addresses.

About this task

In Google Earth:
• If the entity represented as the theme line has no coordinates, then, all the other mapped entities
are displayed with the theme line icon. If the theme line entity has coordinates, then all the other
mapped entities display with their own icon.
• Each link between the theme line and an entity is displayed as a single wide line provided the entity
has a date and time.
• The label of the theme line is merged with the label of the entity that it is linked to.
• In the sidebar, each link is listed separately as a Virtual Path Link, which is appended with a
number.

Procedure
1. In the Map Chart Items pane, click the Options tab.
2. To map theme lines in this way, select the Show Virtual Paths check box.

Map chart items 161

Specifying how coordinates are used
You can specify how coordinates are used in the Label, Description, and Cards window.

Procedure
To specify how coordinates are used.
1. Show the Label, Descriptions, and Card Details window by selecting one of the check boxes in
the Chart Items panel of the Options page.
2. Use the following check boxes to specify where Analyst's Notebook looks for coordinates:
Option Description
Labels, Descriptions, and Coordinates are entered in the labels of entities, entity
Cards descriptions, and on cards (and you want to use these
coordinates when mapping).
Attributes Coordinates entered in attributes.
Data Records Coordinates entered in data records.
3. Coordinates entered as text in labels, descriptions or on cards must be identified by enclosing
them in a prefix and suffix. If required, you can change these identifiers. The change applies to
your charts. However, existing prefixes and suffixes on charts are not updated.
Note: The prefix and suffix are not case-sensitive.

Specifying how addresses are used

You can specify how addresses are used in the Label, Description, and Cards window.
To specify where Analyst's Notebook looks for addresses:
• Select or clear the Labels, Descriptions, Card Summaries, and Card Descriptions check boxes.
There are three types of address:
• Text that is enclosed in an ADDR/ prefix and // suffix is always an address
• Any text in the item properties is potentially an address
• The label of any chart item assigned the Mailing Address semantic type is always an address
Note: If required, you can change the address prefix and suffix. The prefix and suffix are not case-
sensitive.

Supported coordinate formats

Coordinates are entered in the appropriate format for the coordinate system that is used by your
organization. When sent to Google Earth, these coordinates are converted into the corresponding
WGS84 latitude and longitude values.
You can enter coordinates for the following coordinate systems by using Analyst's Notebook:

Coordinate Format Description Example

system
British National Grid reference (a two letter code), easting value (a NZ346134 Or with a datum
Grid (BNG) three number code), northing value (a three code prefix:
number code). OGB-7*NZ346134

162 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Coordinate Format Description Example
system
British National You can enter a pair of values up to six digits long. 500100 123099 Or, with a
Grid (Decimal) The values in the pair must have the same number datum code prefix: OGB-
of digits. You can also enter the grid letters. A*500100 123099
Decimal Degrees Degrees north, degrees east. 13.34 90.76 Or, with a
(DD) datum code prefix: WGE *
13.34 90.76
Degrees Minutes DMS North, DMS East. 35:54:15 14:31:8
Seconds (DMS)
You can enter degrees, minutes, and seconds in 35° 54'15" 14° 31'8"
any of these formats:
• 35:54:15 14:31:8
• 35/54/15 14/31/8
• 35°54'15", 14°31'8"
• 52°14'36.61”, 0°42'57.09”//
• WGE * 12°34'56" 98°76'54"
Note: Do not leave spaces after the characters
used for degrees, minutes, and seconds. Do not
use 'd' for degrees or 'm' for minutes. For the
minute and second symbols, use the plain
quotation mark character (' or ") and the closing
quotation mark character (' or ”).

Military Grid Grid zone UTM zone Easting Northing 4QFJ12345678 Or, with the
Reference datum code prefix:
Note: Eastings and northings can be up to five
System (MGRS) WGE*4QFJ12345678
digits long. You can also enter the grid and UTM
zones.

Universal Polar Hemisphere Easting Northing N 2500000 1850000

Stereographic
For example:
(UPS)
• N 2500000 1850000
• N 2500000E 1850000N
• N 2500000 mE 1850000 mN
The northern hemisphere is assumed if no
hemisphere is specified. For example, these two
coordinates give locations in different
hemispheres:
• 2001125.58678e 1666857.45654668n
• S 2001125.58678e 1666857.45654668n

Universal Zone number Hemisphere Easting Northing 11U 465586 3973426

Transverse
Note: There must be a space after the
Mercator (UTM)
hemisphere.

Map chart items 163

Indicating directions for coordinates
Unless you specify otherwise, the first value is North (latitude) and the second is East (longitude). The
first meter value is the easting and the second meter value is the northing.
Indicating directions for latitudes and longitudes
To specify a different direction or to indicate that the values are reversed, use the following (these
values are not case-sensitive):
• N, North, or Y
• S, South or - (minus)
• E, East, or X
• W, West or - (minus)
These examples are for the same location:
35:54:15 14:31:8
35:54:15N, 14:31:8E
North 35:54:15, east 14:31:8
y35:54:15 x14:31:8
Indicating directions for eastings and northings
To specify a different direction or to indicate that the values are reversed, use the following (these
values are not case-sensitive):
• N, North, or Y
• S or South
• E, East, or X
• W or West
Separating pairs of values
You can use these characters or separate pairs of values:
• Space
• Comma followed by a space.
For example:
• 34.138 118.354
• 34.138, 118.354
Note: If the thousand separator in your Windows regional settings is not a comma, then, you can
also separate value pairs with just a comma.

Work with a datum

By default, Analyst's Notebook uses the WGS84 datum. However, depending on the coordinate
system, it might use a more suitable alternative, such as OGB-7, in the case of British National Grid
coordinates. WGS84, is the only worldwide reference system currently in place, and it is the most
common datum in place today. When the WGS84 datum is not applicable, you must specify the
datum as part of the entered coordinates. To use an alternative datum, you can enter coordinates
with an explicit datum code prefix. Coordinates cannot be accurate unless you also supply the
reference geodetic system that was used to calculate them.

164 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

For example, for Degrees Minutes Seconds, you can enter coordinates with or without the datum code
prefix:
WGE * 12°34'56" 98°76'54"
35°54'15", 14°31'8" (the WGS84 datum is assumed)
Alternatively, you can create an attribute class to hold a different datum code prefix.

Distributing mapping data

You can export the mapping data from an Analyst's Notebook chart to a file that you can give to other
users. Exporting the mapping data in this way, enables the exported item to display the entity icons
and links in Google Earth or in any other mapping application that supports KMZ or KML files.
Other mapping applications might include:
• Google Maps
• Microsoft Virtual Earth
• ArcGIS Explorer
Analyst's Notebook can export data as a KMZ (Keyhole Markup Zip) file. This file contains:
• Mapping data that is converted to Keyhole Markup Language (KML), and saved in a file with a .kml
extension
• Converted Analyst's Notebook icons
It can also export mapping data as a KML file, in which case the icons are not exported.
Successful interpretation of the mapping data in applications other than Google Earth depends on
whether the application supports the KMZ or KML file formats.

Map chart items 165

166 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
List the contents of your chart
Listing items, cards, and data records allows the information they contain to be sorted, filtered, and
copied to spreadsheets or other external documents. This allows you to analyze data that is not
necessarily visible on chart surface.

Procedure
To open a list view, click the Analyze tab, and then in the List group select one of the following
options:
Option Description
List Items A summary of all the items on the current chart separated into lists of
entities and links. For more information, see “Listing all the contents of your
chart” on page 167.
List Most Connected Open the List Most Connected pane to list the entities with links on the
current chart. For more information, see “Listing the most connected items”
on page 168.
List Cards A summary of all the cards that items on the current chart contain.
List Data Records A summary of all the records that items on the current chart contain.
Linked Entities Pane A summary of all the entities that are linked to selected entities.

Listing all the contents of your chart

In order to view and sort all the data that has been entered into chart items, you can list the items to
display them in a separate dialog. Viewing the details in this manner allows you to see information
that may not be present on the chart surface.

Procedure
1. To open the List Items windows, click the Analyze tab, and then in the List group select List
Items.
2. To work with these results you can:
Option Description
Options Set options that relate to the items in your list, and to the formatting of text when
copied to the clipboard.
Sort Specify the ordering of items based on specified columns.
Filter Reduce the list of items to those that you have selected.
Reveal Remove any filtering you have set.
Copy Copy the information for selected items to the clipboard.
Delete Remove items from the list view.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 167

Listing the most connected items
Highly connected items are often significant in analysis. You can list the entities and the links
between them based on the number of links present, then change the format of selected items to
highlight them on the chart.

About this task

You can choose to list highly connected items according to several different criteria. For example, you
can select links of a particular type, or concentrate on links in a particular direction.
After you list the entities that might be significant, you can change the format of these entities and
relevant links on the chart to highlight them. For example, if you list entities based on total inbound
links, when you click Highlight Top 10, the entity and its inbound links are formatted.

Procedure
1. To list the connections on your chart. click the Analyze tab, and then in the List group select List
Most Connected.
2. In the Counts pane, select the connection type you are interested in from the Connected by list.
If you would like to list all the types of links, you can select Links of type: Any. To display only the
links that contain records, select Records of type: Any.
3. Select the option to use to list items:
Option Description
Most links Lists entities based on the number of links.
Most linked records Lists the entities based on the number of connections that contain
records.
Most connected entities Lists entities based on the number of entities to which they are
connected.
Most inbound Lists entities based on the number of links that are directed towards
the entity, excluding bidirectional links.
Most inbound records Lists entities based on the number of link records that are directed
towards the entity, excluding bidirectional links.
Most outbound Lists entities based on the number of links that are directed away
from the entity, excluding bidirectional links.
Most outbound records Lists entities based on the number of records that are directed away
from the entity, excluding bidirectional links.
Connections with the Lists entity-link-entity combinations based on the number of links in
most links the connection.
Connections with the Lists entity-link-entity combinations based on the number of records
most records in the connection.
4. Optional: You can use the Restrict options to the reduce the list to items that you have selected on
the chart surface:
• Restrict Results to Selected Entities - Only show entities that are also selected on the chart.
• Count Only the Selected Links - Only count links that are also selected on the chart.

168 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Tip: Analyst's Notebook shows active restrictions above the list of entities.
5. Optional: As you add items to the chart, you can use the Update option to refresh your list.
6. Optional: You can use the Copy options to export the contents of the list most connected window
to the clipboard in different formats.

Refining the list of connected items

In addition to filtering the most connected items based on link type, you can also use numerical
values that are stored in either the link label, or a record properties. Filtering based on the value of
numerical properties allows you to work with links which use counts, for example, to evaluate links
that have been combined to indicate multiple calls between to phones, or links that contain
information about financial transactions.

About this task

When Analyst's Notebook calculates numerical link label values, the first numerical element of a link
label is used. For example, the following link labels all have a numerical value of seven:
• 7
• Calls: 7
• 7 transfers
• 7 and 8
Negative values are considered in the calculation. For example, the link label -7 has a numerical
value of minus seven. So a negative value will count as 7 links in the reverse direction of the link.

Procedure
1. To list the connections on your chart. click the Analyze tab, and then in the List group select List
Most Connected.
2. In the Values pane, select the connection type you are interested in from the Connected by list.
If you would like to list links of all types, you can select Links of type: Any.
3. Select the Value to use to refine your list.
4. Select the option used to list items:
Option Description
Total inbound Lists entities based on the total value of the numerical link labels of the
connected links that are directed towards the entity.
Numerical values on bidirectional links are not included in the count.

Total Lists entities based on the total value of the numerical link labels of the
outbound connected links that are directed away from the entity.
Numerical values on bidirectional links are not included in the count.

Net inbound Lists entities based on the net inbound value of the numerical link labels of the
connected links. The resulting value is the total of the numerical link label
values for the inbound links minus the values for the outbound links.
For example, if an Account entity has two Transaction links, one paying in 600
from Account1 and one paying out 400 to Account2, the net inbound value is
200.

List the contents of your chart 169

Option Description
Net outbound Lists entities based on the net outbound value of the numerical link labels of
the connected links. The resulting value is the total of the numerical link label
values for the outbound links minus the values for the inbound links.
For example, an Account entity might have three Transaction links, one paying
in 600 from Account1 and two paying out a total of 1000, 500 to Account2 and
500 to Account3. The net outbound value is 400.

Total value of Lists the total of the numerical link label values for all links, including links with
links no directions and bidirectional links.
For example, if an Account entity has two Transaction links, one paying in 600
from Account1 and one paying out 200 to Account 2, the total value is 800.

Total relative For entities where the total of the numerical link label values is at least 10
to net change times the net total, lists entities based on the total.
For example, you can use this option to highlight accounts where large amounts
of money are passing through without remaining in the account, which might be
an indication of money laundering.

Connection Lists entity-link-entity combinations based on the total of the numerical link
totals label values for all links in a connection, including links with no directions and
bidirectional links.
For example, Account1 and Account2 might have two Transaction links
between them, one paying 400 from Account1 to Account2 and the other
paying 600 from Account2 to Account1. The connection total is 1000.

Connection Lists entity-link-entity combinations based on the net total of the numerical link
net totals label values for all inbound and outbound links.
For example, Account1 and Account2 might have two Transaction links
between them, one paying 400 from Account1 to Account2 and the other
paying 600 from Account2 to Account1. The connection net total is 200.
Numerical values on bidirectional links are not included in the count.

5. Optional: You can use the Restrict options to the reduce the list to items that you have selected on
the chart surface:
• Restrict Results to Selected Entities - Only show entities that are also selected on the chart.
• Count Only the Selected Links - Only count links that are also selected on the chart.
Tip: Analyst's Notebook shows active restrictions above the list of entities.

Highlighting connections on your chart

When you have a list of connected items in the List Most Connected Pane, you can use that list to
navigate these items on your chart surface, and highlight information.

Before you begin

Ensure that you have the List Most Connected pane open, and that you have some results to view.
For more information, see “List the contents of your chart” on page 167.

170 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

About this task
When you display items in the List Most Connected pane, each row contains the following
information:
• Highlighting status - The color that is being used to highlight the connections on the chart surface.
• Icon - The icon that is being used to identify the entity.
• Label - The label text.
• Count - The number of links or link records of the selected type in the view.
• Distribution - How the count of the selected link or record type is reflected in the overall link count
for the entity.

Procedure
1. To locate items on the chart, you can select items in the list. To select items in the list and on the
chart surface:
• Label - Selects the entity.
• Count or Distribution - Selects the links that are included in the current count (for record
counts, this action selects links that contain those records).
• Both - Selects both the entity and links.
Tip: You can select multiple items by holding either Shift or Ctrl while making your selection.
2. To highlight items of interest, click the highlighting status indicator found to the left of the item's
icon.
Tip: You can use the Highlight Top 10 option to highlight the top ten connections in the list.
3. Optional: To change the color scheme that is used to highlight items, select Highlight Colors .
You can choose between 4 standard color schemes that allow you to specify up to 10 highlight
colors. You can also edit these color schemes to match your color scheme. When you highlight
more than 10 items, the color scheme entries are repeated.
4. Optional: To further accentuate links that have been highlighted, you can use the Set Line Width
to increase the line width of highlighted links.
5. Optional: To remove all highlighting, select Undo Highlighting.

Listing linked entities

The Linked Entities pane lists the entities that are linked to the selected entity. To help you identify
potentially significant entities, you can sort the list on different properties.

Property Description
Entity The label of the entity. The list is sorted in ascending alphanumeric order. If an
entity has no label, its identity is used.

List the contents of your chart 171

Property Description
Link The label of the link that connects the selected entity and the linked entity. The
list is sorted in ascending alphanumeric order. If the connection consists of
several links, then the number of links is displayed, for example (2 links).
Onward The number of other entities that the linked entity is connected to. The list is
Entities sorted in descending numerical order.
Angle The positional angle of linked entities in relation to the selected entity. Entities
that are positioned directly above the selected entity, at zero degrees, are listed
first, and degree position increases down the list so that entities are listed in
clockwise order.
Position The list is sorted so that panning between entities is minimized. You can walk
through the items, clicking them to view their position in the chart. The entities at
the top of the list are typically the entities nearest the selected entity.

Following a path of linked entities

To explore the selected entity's network, you can choose an entity in the Linked Entities pane and see
what it is linked to.

Procedure
To list all of the onward entities for a linked entity:
1. In the list, identify an entity of interest, then click it. Analyst's Notebook pans the chart to center
the entity in the window.
Tip: Entities that are connected to many other entities might be significant. The Onward Entities
column helps you to identify these entities. To summarize the immediate network of a linked
entity, hover over its label in the list. If the entity has 12 or fewer onward entities, a tooltip lists
their labels. If the entity has more than 12 onward entities, a tooltip displays the label of the first
10 onward entities, and the number of other onward entities. If an entity has no label, its identity
is used.
2. To see what the entity is linked to, in the list, click the List Linked Entities button beside the entity
label.
The content of the list is replaced.
3. To list the linked entities for your previous selection, click List Linked Entities again. The icon and
identity of the previous selection is displayed again at the top of the Linked Entities pane.

172 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Copying list information
You can copy any information from a list to the clipboard. For example, you can copy a list of items
and paste it into a spreadsheet.

About this task

You can copy information from a list as tab-delimited text and paste it into any application that
supports text. In addition, you can copy a list of most connected items as a picture, text, rich text, or
HTML and paste it into an appropriate application.

Procedure
• To copy information in a table as text:
a) Select the entries in the table that you want to copy. To select multiple entries, use the Ctrl or
Shift keys.
b) Click Copy.
c) Open the application into which you want to paste the information, and press Ctrl + V.
• To copy a list of most connected items:
a) In the List Most Connected window, select an option from the Copy list.
The displayed list of items is copied to the clipboard.
b) Open the application into which you want to paste the information, and press Ctrl + V.

List the contents of your chart 173

174 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Statistical views of chart data
You can view data distribution and select and filter your data based on categories and ranges of data.
Viewing distribution and filtering helps you to identify, for example, peak activity in your chart.
You can view the distribution of your data in different ways:

Bar charts Useful for viewing the distribution of data across different categories. For example,
in a chart that contains transaction data, you might want to look at the distribution of
data across different account types.
Histograms Useful for viewing ranges of data. For example, in a chart that contains transaction
data, you might choose to look at the distribution of the data according to values of
the transactions within specific ranges.
Heat matrices Useful for comparing data distributions across two dimensions. For example, in a
chart that contains transaction data, you might want to look at how many
transactions fall into each combination of the hour of the day and the day of the
week.

The categories or ranges that you focus on can apply to the ends (or entities), links, or both. For
example, on a chart that contains bank accounts of different types with transactions between them,
available bar charts might include:
• Ends - Account Type
• Links - Transaction date and time
• Both - Label text
You can then apply filters to focus on one or more categories or ranges of your data to gain a better
understanding of specific parts of your data.

Showing data distribution as bar charts and histograms

Using bar charts and histograms to look at the distribution of data in your chart and drill down into the
contents to concentrate on information that is of interest.

Procedure
To open a bar chart or histogram:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Bar Charts and Histograms.
The Bar Charts and Histograms pane opens.
2. Click the New tab.
Analyst's Notebook inspects the content of your chart and lists a useful set of bar charts and
histograms that apply to your data. Any entry that would produce a bar chart or histogram with just
one category or an even spread with just one entry in each category is not displayed in the list.
Each list entry includes up to three components.

Component Description

Label A description of the bar chart or histogram. For example:

• Link Type - lists the available types of link on your chart.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 175

Component Description

• Label Value - lists the values of chart item labels.

Count Summary A count of the total number of items on the current chart that match the
criteria. This count is split into ends (or entities) and links.
(as histogram) Any list entry with this component can be opened as a histogram or a bar chart.

Note: To list all possible bar charts and histograms, select the Show All check box.
3. Enter the name of a property or attribute in the Search properties field.
The list updates as you type to show the available bar charts and histograms that match your
search text.
4. Click the label to open a bar chart or if (as Histogram) is appended to the label, you can click (as
Histogram) to open a histogram.
You can open as many bar charts and histograms as you want. To open a bar chart but remain on
the New page of the Bar Charts and Histograms pane, for example to add further bar charts or
histograms, right-click an entry and select Add Bar Chart.
Note: If a bar chart is open for the histogram that you select, you cannot open it as a histogram
without first closing the bar chart. In the same way, you cannot open a bar chart without first
closing a corresponding histogram. Analyst's Notebook prompts you to change it from one to the
other.

Results
Each bar chart that you open appears on the Bar Charts page of the Bar Charts and Histograms
pane. By default, if the value for a row in a bar chart is zero, the row is not displayed. To display rows
that have a zero value, on the Options page of the Bar Charts and Histograms pane, select the
Include Empty Rows check box under Bar Chart Rows.
Any histograms that you open appear in a separate Histograms window.
You can now focus on specific chart items or apply filters to investigate your data further. You can
also look at combinations of properties by viewing heat matrices for the histograms that are open.

View data on a heat matrix

Heat matrices visualize the relationship between the properties of chart items in a grid that shows the
number of occurrences of different combinations of values.
Individual values in the heat matrix are represented by colors from a predefined range of colors. For
example, the lowest value is displayed in the lightest color, through to the highest value, which is
displayed in the darkest color.
Heat matrices can be used to quickly gain insight into your data, and identify areas for further
analysis, such as peak periods when events occur. They are displayed below the histogram in the
Histogram window.
Note: Show and hide heat matrices by clicking Heat Matrix at the top of the Histogram window. If no
heat matrix is selected, when you click this option, a list of available heat matrices is displayed so that
you can select one.

176 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Displaying a heat matrix
Heat matrices can help identify areas for further analysis, such as peak periods of activity. You can
change the time scale to help identify any patterns or trends. You can see how events occur, for
example, over days or months.

Procedure
1. On the New page of the Bar Charts and Histograms pane, click the words (as Histogram) to open
a histogram.
2. From the Heat Matrix list, at the top of the Histogram window, select a heat matrix to display.
For example, the Date & Time:Day of Week heat matrix shows the number of occurrences of an
event on days of the week.
3. Optional: Select a scale from the Scale list at the top of the Histogram window.
Note: The Scale list is available only when results contain date and time information without a
predefined scale.
4. Optional: Select whether to use the chart time zone or the time zones on each chart item from the
Timezones list at the top of the Histogram window.
Note: The Timezones list is available only when results contain date and time information.
5. Optional: Customize the display of the heat matrix by changing the heat matrix options.

Heat matrix options

You can specify the way that your heat matrix is displayed. A display option might be the color scale,
range, whether to display all chat items or only selected items, and whether cell counts are displayed
in the heat matrix cells.

Specifying a color scale

By default, the heat matrix colors are displayed from light to dark. You can select an alternative range
of colors and reverse the colors by clicking the arrow to the right of the legend. Select Reverse Colors
to display the color scale in reverse, from dark to light. Select a different color scale to change the
range of colors that are used.

Spacing chart items by using a range

Ranges can be used to space chart items in heat matrices. A range might be linear, logarithmic, or
sequential. Ranges apply to count values.
Click the arrow to the right of the legend and select an option to display values according to different
ranges:

Range Description
Linear Range Map from the range of count values to the range of colors.
(space values For example, a heat matrix contains count values in the range 3 - 22. A linear
equally) interval of 4 might be used to generate a series of scale color. These colors
represent the ranges 1-4, 5-8, 9-12, 13-16, 17-20, 21-24.

Logarithmic Similar to the linear range. The best linear interval between the minimum and
Range maximum count value is found and mapped to a logarithmic scale.
(space smaller This range results in a scale where the first item in the range covers many
values more) values, and subsequent items cover decreasing numbers of values.

Statistical views of chart data 177

Range Description

This scale is useful where you have few high count values and you want to
emphasize this distribution. For example: 1-50, 51-75, 76-86, 87-93, 94-95.

Sequential The default option.

(space colors Sort the cell count values into order and partition into roughly equal-sized
equally) groups, one group for each color.
For example, if the ordered unique nonzero count values on the heat matrix are
as follows: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 11, 13, 17, 18, 20, 27, 36, 51, 59, 60, 63, 68, 75, 80, 81,
90, and 99. The unique count value is a total of 22. The range is broken further
down into ranges that contain approximately the same number of unique values.
In this example, approximately every four numbers are taken resulting in the
following scale: 1-7, 11-20, 27-59, 60-75, 80-99. The generated scale is not
contiguous.

If your heat matrix is based on numerical values, you can choose to limit the number of rows in the
heat matrix to a maximum of 10, 50, or 100. For example, if you open a date and time histogram and
then create a heat matrix based on label value, you can choose to limit the number of rows.

Display cell counts in matrices

You can display cell counts in a heat matrix. Cell counts display the number of items on the chart that
use the filter. Selected cells in a heat matrix are selected on the chart.
Change whether cell counts in heat matrix cells are displayed by clicking the down arrow to the right
of the legend, and selecting Show Cell Counts.

Displaying selected chart items

You can choose whether to display cells in a heat matrix for all chart items or only selected chart
items by clicking the required Count option at the bottom of the heat matrix. The Selected Chart
items option is only available if Brush Selection onto Bars is turned on in the Options page of the
Bars Charts and Histograms pane.
Note: When you click Selected Chart Items, any individual cell selections that exist in the heat
matrix are lost.

Selecting ranges of cells

Select a range in the legend by pressing the Shift key and clicking the first range, then clicking the last
range. Alternatively, click and drag a rectangle around the cells that you want to select. All cells that
correspond to that range are selected on the heat matrix. Corresponding chart items and bars in the
histogram are also selected. All other items on the chart are removed from the selection.
You can select a range of cells only when the Count option All Chart Items is selected.

Focus on items of interest

You can focus on specific chart items or categories of data by viewing distributions for a selection of
your chart data. For example, in a histogram you might want to see a count of only those items that

178 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

are currently selected on your chart. You can also apply filters to bar charts and histograms to look at
specific areas of interest.

View selected chart items in bar charts and histograms

You can select chart items and see how selected data is distributed across any open bar charts or
histograms. For example, you might select a number of transactions on your chart as a result of a
Visual Search operation. By default, the distribution of these selected chart items is highlighted
(brushed) back onto any open bar charts and histograms.
You can choose to turn off brushing in the Options page of the Bar Charts and Histograms pane.

View selected chart items in heat matrices

When items are selected on the chart, you can choose whether to view all chart items on a heat
matrix or only the selected items. Click the required Count option at the bottom of the heat matrix.

Filtering data
You can apply (activate) filters in bar charts and histograms by clicking the bars. The resulting actions,
such as whether chart items are selected and how filters are combined across the open bar charts
and histograms, depend on the settings on the Options page of the Bar Charts and Histograms pane.
If the chart items that correspond to the filters are selected, by default the selection is brushed back
onto any open bar charts and histograms.
You can choose what filters to apply across multiple bar charts and histograms. For example, you can
select:
• A single bar on a single bar chart or histogram. Click a bar to select it.
• Multiple bars on a single bar chart or histogram. Press Ctrl and click to select multiple bars or Shift
and click to select groups of bars. When you combine filters, this selection is treated as one filter.
• Multiple bars across multiple bar charts and histograms. Press Ctrl and click to select multiple bars.
When you combine filters, this selection is treated as multiple filters, one filter per bar chart or
histogram.
To deselect all chart items, click the background of your Analyst's Notebook chart. The chart items
are deselected but the filters are retained in the bar charts and histograms. To clear the filters across
all of the bar charts and histograms, click Clear All Filtering at the bottom of the Bar Charts page or
Histogram window.
Related concepts
Bar chart and histogram options
When you click on bars in a bar chart or histogram, a filter is applied (activated). You can control how
active filters are shown on a chart and how the results of multiple active filters are combined. The
settings that you choose in the Options page remain set even after you close and restart Analyst's
Notebook.

Working with bar charts and histograms

You can choose to copy the information in a bar chart or histogram as a picture or as text to the
clipboard. You can also manage the view of your bar chart or histogram and drill down into the results
of a histogram.
Several selection and copy options are available on the Bar Charts page of the Bar Charts and
Histograms pane and in the Histograms window:

Statistical views of chart data 179

Option Description
Select All Selects all bars in the bar chart or histogram and all the cells in a heat matrix.
Clear Selection Clears any bars or cells that are selected in the bar chart, histogram, or heat
matrix.
Clear All Filtering Clears any filters and reveals any chart items that were hidden.
Copy as Picture Exports the bar chart or histogram and heat matrix (if one is displayed) as a
picture to the clipboard. You can paste this picture into another application, for
example Microsoft Word.
Copy as Text Saves all the data in a bar chart, histogram, or heat matrix as text to the
clipboard. You can paste this text into another application, for example
Microsoft Word.
Drill Down Drills down further into the results. This option is only available for histograms
that have filters that are based on ranges such as label value or date and time.
The range of values must be large enough to drill down into more detail.

You can copy the chart items that are selected as a result of one or more filters into a new chart by
using the Copy to New Chart options on the Analyze tab of the Analyst's Notebook ribbon. Other
options are available on the Analyze tab to list the selected chart items or their data records.

Histogram and heat matrix animation

You might want to play through the values of your quantitative or temporal data, for example to see
what activity occurred over a time period and how the chart changed over that time. You can play
through the values by animating histograms and heat matrices.
You animate heat matrices and histograms in the Histograms window.
Two animation modes are available from the list at the upper left of the histogram or heat matrix.

Option Description
Move Use the selected bars or heat map cells as the starting point and move the selection across
the x-axis. This action is the equivalent of selecting each bar or cell in turn.
Expand Use the selected bars or heat map cells as a starting point and expand the selection from
there across the x-axis. This action is the equivalent of adding each bar in turn to the
previous selection.

Run an animation by selecting the bars or heat matrix cells of interest and clicking Play. When
animation mode runs, the Play button changes to Pause. Click this button to stop the animation.
By default, the animation ignores empty columns. To include empty columns in the animation, on the
Options page of the Bar Charts and Histograms pane, select the Include Empty Columns check box
under Histogram Animation.
Tip: Select a bar, heat matrix cell, or range of bars and cells and use the Left or Right arrow keys to
move manually through a histogram.

180 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Drill down into histograms
You can analyze data by focusing on areas of interest. Drill down to examine data in finer detail. For
example, if you are analyzing data about years, you can drill down further to find information about
days of the week.
In a histogram, the Drill Down command is available for any type of data, but only if that bar has
further information to drill down into.
Right-click a bar and select Drill Down. If you have more than one selection range in the Histogram
window, the Drill Down command is unavailable.
Note: As you drill down, a path is displayed at the upper left of the Histogram window that describes
the steps. Click any item that is displayed in blue in this path to return to the previous drill-down
results. Click All to see all results before you drilled down.

Bar chart and histogram options

When you click on bars in a bar chart or histogram, a filter is applied (activated). You can control how
active filters are shown on a chart and how the results of multiple active filters are combined. The
settings that you choose in the Options page remain set even after you close and restart Analyst's
Notebook.

Showing results on the chart

When you activate a filter on a bar chart or histogram, you can choose what is selected and displayed
on the chart.

Option Description
Select Chart Selects the items on the chart that correspond to the active filters in the bar charts
Items and histograms.
Hide Other Hides all the items on the chart that do not correspond to the active filters in the bar
Chart Items charts and histograms. Chart item selection remains unchanged.
Selecting the Reveal Hidden in Gray check box reveals the hidden items in gray.
Note: If a link passes the filter conditions, it can be displayed only if both of its ends
are also displayed. As a result, some ends might be displayed that do not pass the
filter conditions.

Select Chart Selects the items on the chart that correspond to the active filters in the bar charts
Items and and histograms and hides all other chart items.
Hide Others
Selecting the Reveal Hidden in Gray check box reveals the hidden items in gray.
Note: If a link passes the filter conditions, it can be displayed only if both of its ends
are also displayed. As a result, some ends might be displayed that do not pass the
filter conditions. However, these ends are not selected.

Combining active filters

You can control how active filters are combined.

Statistical views of chart data 181

Option Description
Match Any Finds entities that pass ANY active entity filters. You can apply multiple filters across
Entity multiple bar charts and histograms, each filtering different types of information. Chart
Filters items that pass any of the active entity filters are found. For example, you might be
looking for all bank accounts that were opened after a specific date OR that have a
balance over a specific amount.
If this check box is cleared, only those chart items that pass ALL of the active entity
filters are found. For example, you might be looking for all bank accounts that were
opened after a specific date, which also have a balance over a specific amount.
Note: In the case where any of your bar charts or histograms include both ends and
links (rather than just ends or just links), any active filters in these bar charts or
histograms, in combination with other active filters, impact on the results for BOTH
ends and links. All ends and links that do not pass the filter are excluded. For example,
on a Label text bar chart that includes ends and links, if you apply a filter that selects
only links, all entities are therefore intrinsically excluded. If you now apply an extra
entity filter on a different bar chart and the Match Any Entity Filters check box is
cleared, no entities can match all the active filters. They are excluded by the filter on
the original Label text bar chart that selected only links.

Match Any Finds links that pass ANY active link filters. You can apply multiple filters across
Link Filters multiple bar charts and histograms, each filtering different types of information. Chart
items that pass any of the active link filters are found. For example, you might be
looking for transactions on a specific day of the week OR of a specific amount.
If this check box is cleared, chart items that pass ALL of the active link filters are
found. For example, you might be looking for transactions on a specific day of the
week AND of a specific amount.
Note: In the case where any of your bar charts or histograms include both ends and
links (rather than just ends or just links), any active filters in these bar charts or
histograms, in combination with other active filters, impact on the results for BOTH
ends and links. All ends and links that do not pass the filter are excluded. For example,
on a Label text bar chart that includes ends and links, if you apply a filter that selects
only entities, all links are therefore intrinsically excluded. If you now apply an extra
link filter on a different bar chart and the Match Any Link Filters check box is cleared,
no links can match all the active filters. They are excluded by the filter on the original
Label text bar chart that selected only entities.

Matching Matches link and entity combinations. Entities that pass the active entity filters,
Entities according to the Match Any Entity Filters option and links that pass the active link
with filters, according to the Match Any Link Filters option, are inspected. Only the entity-
Matching link combinations that pass the entity and link filters are found. For example, you
Links might be looking for bank accounts with a balance over 40,000 that were involved in
at least one transaction over 3000 on a Tuesday.
Note: In the case where your bar chart or histogram contains both ends and links, you
might find that some or all, entities or links are excluded as result of matching all
active entity or all active link filters.

Showing the distribution of selected chart items on bar charts and histograms
If you select items on your chart, by default the selection is shown (brushed) onto the bars of any
open bar charts and histograms. The distribution of the selected chart items is shown highlighted in

182 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

the bars of the bar charts and histograms. You can choose not to brush the chart item selection onto
the open bar charts and histograms by clearing the Brush Selection onto Bars check box.

Including empty rows or columns

You can control whether to include empty columns in histogram and heat matrix animation and
whether rows that contain a zero value are displayed on bar charts.

Option Description
Include Empty Includes empty columns in a histogram or heat matrix animation.
Columns
Include Empty Displays all the rows in a bar chart, including any rows that have a zero value.
Rows For example, you might want to display rows that have a zero value to
highlight periods of inactivity.

Related concepts
Focus on items of interest
You can focus on specific chart items or categories of data by viewing distributions for a selection of
your chart data. For example, in a histogram you might want to see a count of only those items that
are currently selected on your chart. You can also apply filters to bar charts and histograms to look at
specific areas of interest.

Statistical views of chart data 183

184 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Investigate item activity
Any temporal data that is stored on an item can be described as item activity. You can investigate this
information to discover common themes or discrepancies.
Activity information is displayed as either single occurrences, or as events that occur over a duration.

Adding items to the Activity View

When you add items to the Activity View, any temporal data that is associated with them can be
represented as activity indicators on the item timeline. The activity indicators provide greater visibility
of timings and sequences, making it easier to compare items.

About this task

Each item is represented as a row in the Activity View. The dates and times of sightings, meetings,
interactions, and other events, are represented by activity indicators within each row.
By adding several items to the Activity View, you can see how relationships proceed and develop
over time. In addition, patterns in the data can be identified.
Temporal data for chart items can be stored in several places, for example on the item itself and in
cards, data records, and attributes. You can choose which properties are used to generate activity
indicators. For example, your data might contain date and time information for a series of messages
and also date of birth information for the people involved. You can choose to include only the date
and time information from the messages and exclude the dates of birth.
You can choose to include properties on the items that you add to the Activity View and on their
connected links. You can also include properties on any items that are connected to the added items
and on their onward links. For example, you might choose to include properties for the onward links if
your primary items are people who are connected to telephones. Relating the call information on the
onward links to the people might be important to you.

Procedure
To add items to the Activity View:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. From the menu at the upper left of the Activity View, select the items to add:
Option Description
Add All Entities Adds each entity on the chart.
Add Selected Entities Adds each entity that is selected on the chart.
Add All Links Adds each link on the chart.
Add Selected Links Adds each link that is selected on the chart.
Add Ends of Selected Links Adds entities at the ends of selected links, without adding the
link as a primary item.
Add Ends Linked to Selected Adds all the entities that are linked to the selected entities,
Ends without adding the selected entities or links as a primary item.
Add Items of Type Adds all items of the type that you select.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 185

Option Description
Add Items of Semantic Type Adds all items that are assigned the semantic type that you
select.

Tip: You can also add items to the Activity View by right-clicking on an item on the chart and
selecting one of the Activity View options.
3. Choose which temporal properties to use to generate activity indicators for the items that are
added and any items that are connected to them. From the Added Items and Items Linked to
Added Items lists, select each property that you want to use to generate activity indicators.
Only properties that contain date and time information are available for selection. If the same date
and time data is contained in more than one property, select only one of those properties to
generate the activity indicator. If you select two properties that contain the same information, the
activity is counted twice. Any dates with a value of greater than December 31, 2499 are ignored.
Tip: The number next to each property list indicates how many properties are selected. To clear all
the properties in a list, hover over the number and click the cross that appears.

Results
Items are added to the Activity View and only the selected properties are used to generate activity
indicators.

Interpreting activity data

The Activity View displays information about item activity. It is important to understand the activities
that the view detects and how to interpret the display when you analyze your data.
Each item that is added to the Activity View is represented by an individual row. If temporal data is
selected for either an attached link or connected entity or onward link, secondary rows are added for
each related item. You can choose whether these secondary rows are listed as groups of links in each
connection or listed as separate links. To choose how the secondary rows are displayed, select or
clear the Group by Connection options on the Added Items and Items Linked to Added Items lists
where you select which properties to use.
For each row, each piece of temporal data is shown as a symbol that is placed against the timeline.
The rows that belong to primary items contain indicators for all connected items, in addition to data
stored on the primary item. Depending on the amount of activity and the scale of the timeline, the
indicators might be merged to represent multiple properties.
Note: Some of these activity indicators, for example link direction, are only visible if the relevant
Indicator Colors options are selected in the Formatting Options window.

Table 9. Activity indicators

Activity Description
indicator
Activity with a single temporal value stored on an entity.

Activity with start and end values that relate to two temporal values of an entity. When
an invalid duration occurs, for example when the start date and time occurs after the
end date and time, the duration bar appears in an error color.

186 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Table 9. Activity indicators (continued)
Activity Description
indicator
Activity with a single temporal value that is stored as a property on a bidirectional link.

Activity with a single temporal value that is stored as a property on a nondirectional

link.

Activity with a single temporal value that is stored as a property on a link that is
directed from the primary entity.

Activity with a single temporal value that is stored as a property on a link that is
directed to the primary entity.

Multiple temporal values detected.

Note: If more than nine temporal values are detected, this number is replaced by an
asterisk.

Activity indicator selected.

Multiple temporal values, some but not all of which are selected.

Hover over an activity indicator or the label of an item row for more information about the temporal
data that is associated with the item. The summary provides the item label, and the data that is
detected. For example, John Smith (Date & Time) 12/12/2013 06:00.

Changing the scale

When items are added to the Activity View, the linear scale is determined by the earliest and latest
times that are detected. Changing the scale allows specific periods of the view to be investigated in
more detail.

About this task

Zoom into and out from the Activity View timeline to analyze activity data at different resolutions.
The timeline is affected by the properties that you select to generate activity indicators. Ensure that
you select the required properties before you change the scale. For example, if you are investigating
specific events that relate to people, you might choose to clear the properties that contain their date
of birth and date of death. Otherwise, these properties might affect the earliest and latest times on
the timeline.

Investigate item activity 187

Procedure
To change the timeline scale:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. In the Scale list, select one of the following linear scale values:
• Milliseconds
• Seconds
• Minutes
• Hours
• Days
• Months
• Years
Tip: You can also change the scale by clicking in the timeline header and then by using the mouse
wheel to zoom in and out.

Results
The view is redrawn to use the selected scale. If the scale is such that all the activity indicators no
longer fit in the view, a horizontal scroll bar is added to aid navigation.

Looking for patterns of activity

You can study patterns of activity to identify trends and deviations in temporal data. To see these
patterns, you can change the Activity View to compare activity over recurring time periods.

About this task

Areas of activity can be grouped by a set time period to look for patterns of activity. For example, you
can examine meetings that occur every Monday, or on the second day of every month. Establishing
regular patterns of activity is important in identifying suspicious behavior. For example, establishing
the regular payments into a bank account can remove legitimate payments from further investigation.

Procedure
To look for patterns of activity:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. From the Scale list, select a comparison scale from the Repeating Scales or Repeating Scales
with Grouped Rows sections of the list.
Option Description
Every 60 Seconds Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in seconds of the minute.
Rows that contain the secondary level items are grouped by minute.
Every 60 Minutes Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in minutes of the hour.
Rows that contain the secondary level items are grouped by hour of the
day.

188 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Description
Every 24 Hours Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in hours of the day. Rows
that contain the secondary level items are grouped by date.
Every 7 Days Sets the timeline header scale to show the day of the week. Rows that
contain the secondary level items are grouped by week.
Every Month Sets the timeline header scale to show the day of the month. Rows that
contain the secondary level items are grouped by month.
Every 60 Seconds Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in seconds of the minute.
by their Hour Rows that contain the secondary level items are grouped first by minute of
the hour, and then by hour of the date.
Every 60 Minutes Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in minutes of the hour.
by their Day Rows that contain the secondary level items are grouped first by hour of
the day, and then by date.
Every 24 Hours by Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in hours of the day. Rows
their Day of Week that contain the secondary level items are grouped first by day of the week,
and then by date.
Every 24 Hours by Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in hours of the day. Rows
their Day of Month that contain the secondary level items are grouped first by day of the
month, and then by date.
Every 24 Hours by Sets the timeline header scale to show the time in hours of the day. Rows
their Year that contain the secondary level items are grouped first by day of the year,
and then by date.
Every Month by Sets the timeline header scale to show the day of the month. Rows that
their Year contain the secondary level items are grouped first by month, and then by
date.

Results
Rows are added to each primary item in the Activity View that group secondary item rows by the
selected comparison value. To zoom the view, click in the timeline header and use the mouse wheel
to scroll.

Configuring duration indicators

If activity occurs over a specific duration, the Activity View can indicate the duration as either a start
time and a duration or as start and end time indicators. You can configure which properties are used
to indicate duration.

About this task

When you configure duration information, you can specify as many start and end or start and duration
property pairs as you like. If any attributes or data record properties exist that have the semantic type
of Event Start Date & Time and Event End Date & Time, they are configured for you.

Procedure
To configure a duration:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.

Investigate item activity 189

The Activity View opens.
2. Click Durations.
The Durations Setup window opens.
3. To specify a duration that uses a start and end time, in the Durations (Start and End) table:
a) From the Start Property list, select a property to use as the start date and time.
b) From the End Property list, select a property to use as the end date and time.
To specify a duration that uses a start time and duration, in the Durations (Start and Elapsed
Time) table:
a) From the Start Property list, select a property to use as the start date and time.
b) From the Duration Property list, select a number property to use as the duration.
c) Select the units to use for the duration.
Any items in a list that have a value present on the chart, for example in an attribute or data
record, appear in the list as bold. They are also moved to the top of the list.
Note: To delete a row, click the cross at the end of the row.
4. Optional: To specify the units for any duration property pairs that are automatically configured for
you, select your chosen units from the Units for automatic duration properties list.
Duration property pairs are automatically configured for any attributes or data record properties
that have the semantic type of Event Start Date & Time and Duration.
5. Optional: To use these settings for any new charts that you create, select Set as Default.
6. When you finish configuring all of the duration combinations, click OK.

Results
Any pairs that you configure become available to select as properties on the appropriate property lists
in the Activity View.

Configuring indicator formatting

Activity indicators can use shading and color information from the associated item. Color can help
highlight areas of related activity.

About this task

When activity of interest is identified, you can show the color of the indicator to signify related events.
Activity indicators can reflect the colors of entity frames, entity shading, and links.
For example, by adding frames of the same color to the people at a meeting, you can highlight other
activity that they have in common.

Procedure
To set the Activity View to reflect item color:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. At the top of the Activity View, click Formatting.
The Formatting Options window opens.
3. Select one or more of the following options:

190 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Description
Show entity color Updates activity indicators to reflect the icon frame color, entity color,
or entity shading color.
Show link color Updates activity indicators to reflect the color of the link.
Show link direction Indicates the link direction for activity information on directed links.
Overlap indicator color Specify the color of the overlap indicator that is displayed when part of
an activity's duration coincides with another.
4. Optional: To use these settings for any new charts that you create, select Set as Default.
5. Click OK.

Handling activity with partial information

The Activity View needs temporal data that includes dates and times. You can configure the behavior
for properties that contain a date but no time or a time with no date.

About this task

If the date and time information is contained in separate properties, Analyst's Notebook can
recognize the properties as a combined date and time pair. To recognize them as a pair, the
properties must be assigned the semantic types Event Start Date and Event Start Time, or Event End
Date and Event End Time.

Procedure
To configure how date-only and time-only properties are handled:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. Click Partial Properties.
The Partial Properties Setup window opens.
3. To configure how to handle properties that contain date-only information, in the Date-only
Properties area, select one of the following options:
Option Description
Don't Show Ignores any date-only temporal data.
Show At Assigns a time that you specify to date-only temporal data.
Show over the entire day Assigns a default duration of 24 hours to date-only temporal data.
4. To configure how to handle properties that contain time-only information, in the Time-only
Properties area, select one of the following options:
Option Description
Don't Show Ignores any time-only temporal data.
Show On Assigns a date that you specify to time-only temporal data.
5. Optional: To use these settings for any new charts that you create, select Set as Default.
6. Click OK.

Investigate item activity 191

Interacting with items in the Activity View
Adding items to the Activity View provides a different view of the information that is present in the
chart. Items can be selected, edited, and centered on the chart.

Procedure
• To focus the chart on the selected item, right-click the item and select Center on Chart.
• To automatically focus the chart on an item when you select it in the Activity View, from the
Options list, select Pan on Selection.
• To open and edit the properties of an item, right-click the item and select Edit Item Properties.
• To remove the selection from the Activity View, right-click an item and select Remove Selected.
• To remove the items that are not selected from the Activity View, right-click an item and select
Remove Unselected.
Tip: To remove all items, click Remove All at the top of the Activity View.
• To change the order of items in the Activity View, from the Sort list, select one of the following
options:
Option Description
Most Active Moves the items with the most activities to the top of the grid.
Earliest Moves the items that contain the earliest activities to the top of the grid.
Latest Moves the items that contain the latest activities to the top of the grid.
Alphabetical Sorts the items in the grid into alphabetical order, based on their labels.
Least Active Moves the items with the fewest activities to the top of the grid.

Primary items are sorted according to the selected option. Within each primary item, secondary
items are also sorted according to the selected option.

Specifying the time zone

Depending on the information that is contained within the chart, you might have data that uses
different time zones. The time zone that the Activity View uses for an activity indicator can come from
either the data itself, or from the chart.

Procedure
To specify which time zone to use in the Activity View:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. From the Options list in the Activity View, select one of the following options:
Option Description
Use Chart Time Zone Shows the date and time values of activity indicators in the time zone of
the chart. The chart time zone is typically the local time zone.
Use Property Time Shows the date and time values of activity indicators in the time zone of
Zones the item, card, or data record.

192 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Prefixing row labels
Within the Activity View, row labels can be prefixed with an attribute value. Adding an attribute prefix
allows items to be sorted by that value.

About this task

The label for each row of the Activity View does not necessarily match the item label on the chart. By
default:
• The label for an entity row matches the chart label of that entity.
• The label for a link row is constructed from the chart label of that link, and the labels of the entities
at each end.

Procedure
To categorize items in the Activity View, and to change their sort order:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. At the top of the Activity View, click Formatting.
The Formatting Options window opens.
3. Select the Prefix row labels with values of check box, and choose the attribute class to use as a
prefix from the list.
4. Click OK.

Results
The labels are updated in the Activity View. The labels on the chart remain unchanged.

Filtering the Activity View

Like items on the chart surface, data in the Activity View updates to reflect the status of any filters
that are applied. Depending on the filter options that you select, you can control the visibility of data
within the view.

About this task

When filters are applied to the chart, items that do not match the selected filters are hidden or
become revealed in gray on the chart surface. In the Activity View, activity data that relates to hidden
items is removed from the view. However, you can control the visibility of activity data that relates to
items that are revealed in gray.
Note: To ensure that the required items are placed in a gray state when filters are applied, make sure
that the filtering options are set up appropriately. Alternatively, to change the setting to show all
hidden items in a gray state, click the View tab, and then in the Show and Hide Items group, click
Reveal > Reveal in Gray.

Procedure
To configure how to display items that are made revealed in gray as the result of a filter:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Activity View.
The Activity View opens.
2. From the Options list in the Activity View, select one or both of the following options:

Investigate item activity 193

Option Description
Include Revealed Hidden Show primary rows for entities and links that are revealed in gray.
Items
Include Revealed Hidden For items that are shown on the chart, show activity of connected
Activity items that are revealed in gray.

Presenting your findings

A picture of the information that is visible in the Activity View can be copied as an image. You can use
images to present information from the Activity View in other applications for reporting.

Procedure
To create an image of the current state of the Activity View:
1. In the Activity View, change the size of the view to ensure that all of the data that you want to
report on is visible.
2. Click Copy as Picture.
An image of the contents of the Activity View is copied to the clipboard.
3. Paste the picture into a document that supports images.

194 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Conditional formatting
You can use conditional formatting to change the appearance of items on the chart to emphasize
information of interest to your investigation. You can change the appearance of both entities and links
based on rules that you define.
You can use conditional formatting to emphasize significant information, and downplay or hide
information of lower interest. Conditional formatting is useful for both analytical and presentation
purposes.

Specifications and rules

When you create a conditional formatting specification, you must add at least one rule. Each rule
changes one style based on conditions that you specify. The following styles can be changed:
• To a specific style setting.
• To styles stored in a selected attribute or property by setting the style to the value of the attribute
or property.
• To styles from a color spectrum that is based on a selected attribute or property.
• To styles from a gradual scale that is based on a selected attribute or property.
• To styles from a threshold or range that is based on a selected attribute or property.
• To styles from a lookup table that is based on a selected attribute or property.

Applying a conditional formatting specification

When you open the conditional formatting pane, a number of default conditional formatting
specifications are available. You can apply these specifications directly to the items on your chart.

Procedure
To apply a conditional formatting specification:
1. To open the Conditional Formatting pane, click the Style tab, and then click Conditional
Formatting > Conditional Formatting Pane.
2. In the Conditional Formatting pane, from the commands in the Actions panel at the bottom of the
pane, select:
Option Description
Format with Selected Use the specification that is selected in the upper part of the
Specification Conditional Formatting pane to format all items on the current
chart.
Format Selected Items Use the specification that is selected in the upper part of the
with Selected Conditional Formatting pane to format items that are selected on
Specifications the chart.
Undo Formatting Remove the last conditional formatting specification that was
applied.

Any items on your chart that meet the criteria will be modified, a “Formatting progress” on page
196 status window will notify you of the changes that are made.
3. Click Close to return to your chart.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2018 195

Formatting progress
When a Conditional Formatting Specification is running, a progress window will be displayed. You can
see reports about the various stages of the conditional formatting process, including any errors that
occur.

Formatting started
As soon as the formatting starts, information about the formatting start time and current rule is
displayed. During this stage, you can stop the formatting process by clicking Cancel.

Error or errors occurred

If errors occur, formatting will be stopped and additional details will be displayed. For example, an
error occurs if a rule is based on an attribute class or record value of one data type, but you try to
apply it to a chart that has an attribute class or record value with the same name but a different data
type.
If you encounter errors, edit the specification in the Edit Conditional Formatting Specification
window before rerunning the specification.
Note: Any formatting changes that result from rules that were processed before the error occurred,
are applied to the chart.

Formatting completed
The end of the formatting process. A message is displayed to show the formatting end time, total
formatting time, and the number of entities and links that were formatted. Any formatting changes
are applied to the chart after the last rule in the specification is processed. Click Close to close the
window.

Creating and editing conditional formatting specifications

You can create conditional formatting specifications that contain rules that are specific to the work
that you are currently undertaking. By creating you own specifications, you can ensure that the rules
that are set up match the conditions that you would like to extenuate in your data.

Procedure
To create, edit, delete, or duplicate a conditional formatting specification:
1. To open the Conditional Formatting pane, click the Style tab, and then click Conditional
Formatting > Conditional Formatting Pane.
2. In the Conditional Formatting pane, from the commands in the Actions panel at the bottom of the
pane, select:
Option Description
New Specification Create a conditional formatting specification to which you can add rules.
The Edit Conditional Formatting Specification window is shown.
Edit Selected Edit the conditional formatting specification that is selected in the upper
Specification part of the Conditional Formatting pane. The Edit Conditional
Formatting Specification window is shown.

The Edit Conditional Formatting Specification window opens.

196 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

3. Using the following options, you can add and modify the rules that the specification contains. In
the Rules page, select:
Option Description
New To add a conditional formatting rule. The New Rule window is shown, in which you
specify what the rule affects and what the actions of the rule are based on. For more
information, see “Adding rules to a conditional formatting specification” on page 197.
Edit To edit an existing conditional formatting rule. The Edit Rule window is shown. You
can edit the rule to change what the rule affects and what the actions of the rule are
based on. For more information, see “Adding rules to a conditional formatting
specification” on page 197.
Duplicate Duplicate a rule. By duplicating an existing rule, you have a copy to edit.
Delete To delete a rule.
Up To move a rule upwards in the order in the list of rules.
Note: Rule ordering is significant as rules are carried out sequentially, and previous
rules may prevent subsequent actions.

Down To move a rule downwards in the order in the list of rules.

Note: Rule ordering is significant as rules are carried out sequentially, and previous
rules may prevent subsequent actions.

4. You can enter the following properties on the Details page:

• Subject
• Author
• Keywords
• Category
• Comments
• Custom properties
5. Click Save.

Adding rules to a conditional formatting specification

Emphasize significant information or de-emphasize information of lower importance by adding rules
to a conditional formatting. Applying a specification to your chart that contains rules changes the
appearance of chart items, based on their properties.

About this task

A conditional formatting rule applies formatting to chart items, you specify what the actions are based
on, and the action that you want to apply.
A conditional formatting rule is defined over four steps, involving:
• Choosing the type of item or representation to be formatted.
• Choosing the criteria to identify items, such as links with the Transaction attribute, or event frames
with the Day of Week analysis attribute.
• Choosing a style to change, such as enlargement or shade color.
• Specifying how the style changes, by selecting a particular value, or by looking up a value in a table
for example.

Conditional formatting 197

Note: The options available for changing the style depend on the choices you make in earlier steps.

Procedure
To define a rule:
1. In the Edit Conditional Formatting Specification window, click New to show the New Rule
window.
2. In the Items to be formatted section, select the item type to apply the rule to by selecting
Entities or Links. If you select Entites, you also need to select the types of representation to apply
the rule to.
3. In the Item criteria section, select what the rule is based on by selecting an option:
• All items - create an unconditional rule that is applied to all items of the selected
representation.
• Items that contain records - set up rules that apply to items with records that contain specific
property types.
• Items with attribute - set up rules that apply to items with a specified attribute.
• Items with analysis attribute - set up rules that apply to items with a specified analysis
attribute.
4. In the Style to be changed section, select the aspect of style to be changed.
For example, the rule can change the enlargement of the icon on the chart, or the color of links.
5. In the Style will be changed to section, specify how the style is changed by selecting an option.
For some styles, you must click Edit to specify more options in another window.
You can set the style:
• To the value of the selected attribute or property type.
• To values from a color spectrum that is based on the selected attribute or property type. For
more information, see “Changing the color of items based on a specific range” on page 199.
• To values from a lookup table that is based on the selected attribute or property type.“Setting
styling based on specific values” on page 200
• To a specified value from a threshold or range that is based on the selected attribute or property
type.“Setting styles for a range of values” on page 201
Note: To leave the style unchanged, select Leave unchanged.
6. Optional: In the Options section, you can specify the behavior of subsequent rules and the styling
of items that do not match your rule:

• Prevent later rules changing the chart item style - locks the style for items that are matched
by the current rule. This locking information is listed in the Edit Conditional Formatting
Specification window for the current rule.
• For items which don't match the rule, set the chart item style to - select the behavior of items
that do not match the rule:
– To a specified value:
- Select Shown or Hidden to set Visibility.
- Select Specified Value and choose a style setting from the list set Font Style, Enlargement,
Icon Frame Margin, Line Width, or Line Strength.
- Select Specified Value and choose a color from the color picker to set shade or icon frame
color.
- Select Specified Value and click Edit to set an entity or link type.

198 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

To leave the style unchanged, select Leave unchanged.
7. To save the rule, click OK.

Results
New rules are added to the end of the list of rules for the conditional formatting specification.

What to do next
After you complete a rule, you can continue to add and edit rules until you are ready to apply the
specification to the chart. See “Applying a conditional formatting specification” on page 195 for
details.

Changing the formatting style based on attribute or property values

If you decide to use an item criteria that uses attribute or property values to distinguish items, you
can set a formatting style that uses a color spectrum or scale to display different values based on
lookup tables, thresholds, or ranges. The formatting emphasizes chart items according to the
formatting style that is set.

Changing the color of items based on a specific range

You can use color changes, based on the values of a selected attribute or property to indicate how
data falls within a range. You can decide how different values determine which color to use from the
color scheme.

About this task

Formatting changes can use a color scheme to visualize how data falls within a set range. The first
and last colors in the scheme correspond to the lowest and highest or earliest and latest values of a
selected attribute or property. Any items with values in between the two limits are then set by using
either a linear or logarithmic scale.
Note: You can only use a color scheme in a rule whose criteria specify numeric or date and time
values.
You can use a color spectrum to change the following styles:
• The dominant shade color of icons, event frames, and theme lines
• The icon frame color of icons and theme lines
• The item type of entities and links.

Procedure
To specify how the lower and upper limits are set:
1. Follow the instructions in “Creating and editing conditional formatting specifications” on page 196
to create or edit a conditional formatting specification.
2. Follow the instructions in “Adding rules to a conditional formatting specification” on page 197 to
create a rule, and in the Style will be changed to section, select Values from a Color Spectrum
based on rule basis, and click Edit.
3. Specify how the lower limit of the scale is set:
a) If you select From chart, the lower limit is automatically set to the earliest or lowest value of
the attribute or property on the chart.
b) If you select Specified value, enter a number, or date and time. Items with values at or below
this value are mapped to the color on the left of the selected scale.
4. Specify how the upper limit of the scale is set:

Conditional formatting 199

a) If you select From chart, the upper limit is automatically set to the latest or highest value on
the chart.
b) If you select Specified value, enter a number, or date and time. Items with values at or above
this value are mapped to the color on the right of the selected scale.
5. If you change the link type, icon frame, or entity shade color, choose the type of scale you want to
apply to the chart:
• Ordered - A scale that increases in intensity towards one of the ends.
• Diverging - To accentuate data that is at the lower and upper ends of the scale, you can choose
to use a scale that either only modifies items that match the lower and upper ends of a scale, or
scales that make this data more obvious.
• Categories - For values that can be divided into discrete groups rather than on a particular
rising scale, you can use categories to highlight specific bands of data.
• Legacy Spectrums - To match charts that have been created in earlier versions of Analyst's
Notebook you can select to use the legacy color scales.
6. Select the specific scale to be applied.
Tip: To reverse the scale, select the Reverse check box.
7. In the Values of rule basis in between section, select how color is applied to items with values
between the lower and upper limits:
• Linear scale - the values are spaced equally to determine which color is used.
• Logarithmic scale - the spacing between smaller values is greater. This type of scale is useful
when your attribute values cover a large range.
8. Click OK to finish defining the rule.

Setting styling based on specific values

You can use a lookup table to change the formatting of items based on specific values of an attribute
or property. Using a table of values allows you to specify multiple changes to a style in the same rule.

About this task

A table of specific conditions, values and formatting changes can be defined for specific attributes
and properties.
You can use a table to change the following styles:
• The visibility of entities and links.
• The font style of entities and links.
• The entity or link type of any chart item except labels.
• The enlargement (icon size) of icons, event frames, and theme lines.
• The dominant shade color of icons, event frames, and theme lines.
• The icon frame color or margin size of icons and theme lines.
• The line width of links, event frames, theme lines, boxes, circles, text blocks, and OLE objects.
• The line strength of links, event frames, theme lines, boxes, circles, text blocks, and OLE objects.

Procedure
To set a formatting style from a lookup table:
1. Follow the instructions in “Creating and editing conditional formatting specifications” on page 196
to create or edit a conditional formatting specification.

200 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

2. Follow the instructions in “Adding rules to a conditional formatting specification” on page 197 to
create a rule, and ensure that you have selected an item record property or attribute to base your
actions on, and a type of style change that supports lookup table values.
3. In the Style will be changed to section, select Values from a Lookup Table based on rule basis
and click Edit.
4. Click New. An entry with a default condition and style setting is added.
5. Set a Condition and Value for the lookup entry:
Option Description
Contains Items with an attribute that includes the value.
Doesn't Contain Items with an attribute that does not contain the value.
Doesn't end with Items with an attribute that does not end with the value.
Not equal to Items with an attribute that does not match the value.
Doesn't start with Items with an attribute that does not start with the value.
Ends with Items with an attribute that ends with the value.
Equal to Items with an attribute value that matches the value.
Starts with Items with an attribute that starts with the value.
6. Set the style requirement for matching chart items.
Note: The requirements that are listed change, based on the rule type.
7. Enter additional entries by repeating steps 4 to 6.
Note: A chart item style is set according to the first matching entry in the list. Therefore,
depending on the type of condition that is used, position more specific lookup table entries at the
top of the list.
8. Click OK.

Setting styles for a range of values

When you are working with attributes and property types that have values that are chronological or
numerical, you can set the style to change based on a specific range. This allows you to emphasize
information before, after or between specific values.

About this task

You can use a threshold or range to change the following aspects of style:
• The visibility of entities and links.
• The font style of entities and links.
• The entity or link type of any chart item except labels.
• The enlargement (icon size) of icons, event frames, and theme lines.
• The dominant shade color of icons, event frames, and theme lines.
• The icon frame color or margin size of icons and theme lines.
• The line width of links, event frames, theme lines, boxes, circles, text blocks, and OLE objects.
• The line strength of links, event frames, theme lines, boxes, circles, text blocks, and OLE objects.

Conditional formatting 201

Procedure
1. Follow the instructions in “Creating and editing conditional formatting specifications” on page 196
to create or edit a conditional formatting specification.
2. Follow the instructions in “Adding rules to a conditional formatting specification” on page 197 to
create a rule, and ensure that you have selected an item record property or attribute to base your
actions on, and a type of style change that supports lookup table values.
3. In the Style will be changed to section, select A specified value for a Threshold or Range of rule
basis, and click Edit.
4. Choose whether to define a threshold, range, or specific value:
Option Description
Above, Below Define a threshold by using a number value.
After, Before Define a threshold by using a date & time value.
Equal to Define a specific value.
Between Define a range.
5. Enter numbers in the edit boxes for a numeric attribute value. Alternatively use the date and time
picker to specify dates and times for a date & time attribute.
6. Optional: Specify that the values you entered are included in the range or threshold by selecting
the Inclusive check boxes.
7. Select the style change that you want to apply to the chart by selecting an option.
• Select Shown or Hidden to set Visibility.
• Select Specified Value and choose a style setting from the list to set Font Style, Enlargement,
Icon Frame Margin, Line Width, or Line Strength.
• Select Specified Value and choose a color to set Shade or Icon Frame Color.
• Select Specified Value and click Edit to set an entity or link type.
• Select Leave unchanged if you do not want to change the style of items that match the
condition.
8. Click OK to finish defining the rule.

Using a conditional formatting style rule to change entity or link type

When items are added to a chart, depending on the available charting schemes, you might find that
the items have been classified as a different item type to that which you expect. You can change
conditional formatting rules to modify the item type of specific items on your chart.

About this task

The type of item that is used to describe data can be important for later analysis. You can modify the
type of item using conditional formatting.
Note: Using conditional formatting to change the type of an item will only apply to items on the chart
surface, these changes are not reflected in records.

Procedure
To specify a type:
1. Follow the instructions in “Creating and editing conditional formatting specifications” on page 196
to create or edit a conditional formatting specification.

202 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

2. In the Style to be changed section, select Type, then in the Style will be changed to section,
select Specified value and click Edit.
3. From the Palette list, select the user palette that contains the required entity or link type.
4. From the Type list, select an entity or link type.
5. Click OK to finish defining the rule.

Importing a conditional formatting rule

You can copy rules from a conditional formatting specification into the specification you are currently
defining. All specifications in your Local and Workgroup folders are listed in the top half of the
Conditional Formatting pane.

Procedure
To import a rule:
1. To open the Conditional Formatting Specifications window, click the Style tab, and then click
Conditional Formatting > Saved Specifications.
2. Click Format with new specification, or select an existing specification and click Edit to show the
Edit Conditional Formatting Specification window.
3. Click Import.
4. Locate and select the specification that you want to import from.
All rules in a selected specification are listed in the bottom half of the window.
5. Select the rules that you want to import by selecting the relevant check boxes.
6. Click Import.
The selected rules are copied to the Edit Conditional Formatting Specification window.

Managing conditional formatting specifications

The Conditional Formatting Specifications window can be used to create a specification, apply an
existing specification to the chart, and edit, rename, duplicate, or delete it. You can also manage
where your specifications are saved by specifying folder locations, and copy specifications between
folders, and browse your specifications in Windows Explorer.

Procedure
To open the Conditional Formatting pane, click the Style tab, and then click Conditional Formatting >
Saved Specifications.

Copying specifications between local and workgroup folders

You can copy conditional formatting specifications between folders so that others can use them. For
example, you can share the specification with other members of your workgroup, or copy it to a local
folder.

Before you begin

You must configure a workgroup folder.

Procedure
Right-click the specification, and from the menu, select Copy to Workgroup Folder. The specification
is copied to your Workgroup folder.

Conditional formatting 203

Tip: To make a local copy of a workgroup specification, right-click the specification, and from the
menu, select Copy to Local Folder.

Changing the location of local and workgroup folders

You can specify where your conditional formatting specifications are saved. You might want to save
your specification locally on your computer, or a shared folder.

About this task

A Local folder holds specifications that only you have access to. A Workgroup folder can hold
specifications that are shared by other users.
Any specifications that are held in subfolders of the Local and Workgroup folders are also listed in
the Conditional Formatting Specifications window. You can group specifications by folder.
The Local folder is typically set to My Documents\i2\i2 Analyst's Notebook
8\Conditional Formatting Specifications. The Workgroup folder is not set by default.

Procedure
To change the location of your Local or Workgroup folders:
1. To open the Conditional Formatting pane, click the Style tab, and then click Conditional
Formatting > Saved Specifications.
2. In the Other Tasks area, click Change Local Folder or Change Workgroup Folder to show the
Browse For Folder window.
3. Select a folder or click Make New Folder.
4. Click OK to set the new folder location.

Installing the example material

Example specifications are available so that you can update the appearance of your chart by using
common item characteristics. Although these examples are installed by default, you can opt to
reinstall the examples to remove any customizations you might have made.

Procedure
To install the example specifications:
1. To open the Conditional Formatting pane, click the Style tab, and then click Conditional
Formatting > Saved Specifications.
2. Click Install example material.
The example specifications are shown in the list of conditional formatting specifications.

Live formatting
Live formatting in Analyst's Notebook changes the appearance of chart items, by applying conditional
formatting specifications in real time.
Live formatting extends the capabilities of conditional formatting if your chart items contain i2
Analyze records. You can run specifications automatically when i2 Analyze records are changed,
added, or deleted from the chart. The styles of items change to reflect the changing data. You need
suitable conditional formatting specifications defined before you can set up live formatting and not all
specifications are compatible, depending on your schema. Analyst's Notebook guides you to
information about rules and how they might affect the chart, as you work through the setup process.

204 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

When you run live formatting, changes are applied immediately unless the specification is
incompatible.
The live formatting command is located in the Records bar and is always visible. As you continue to
work with your chart, live formatting can be stopped, edited, restarted, or reset by using a drop-down
menu of commands.

Setting up live formatting

When you set up live formatting, you specify which conditional formatting specifications Analyst's
Notebook uses when live formatting is started, the order they run in, and what other formatting to
override.

About this task

You must have access to suitable conditional formatting specifications before you can set up live
formatting. You can create and edit specifications for your own use or to share with your workgroup.
For more information, see Creating and editing conditional formatting specifications. Live formatting
applies style rules that are created as conditional formatting specifications, to items that meet the
criteria you specify.

Procedure
1. Click Live Formatting > Set Up to open the Live Formatting Set Up window.
2. Select one or more specifications from the Available specifications list and move them to the
Selected specifications list by clicking the right arrow icon. If you see an information or warning
icon next to a specification, hover your mouse pointer over the icon to display the message. For
more information about these icons, see “Live formatting system messages” on page 206.
3. Use the Up and Down commands to change the order that the specifications run. The order of
specifications is significant as they run sequentially from the top of the list. Rules set further down
the list might affect the specifications that you selected to run first.
4. Optional: You can override existing style changes and reset the items already on the chart to their
default style. Click the Reset all chart items to their default appearance before running
specifications check box.
Chart items are reset to the appearance defined by your schema.
Note: If you use the Stop and Reset Formatting command, your chart items are reset to the
appearance defined by your schema and not to any style changes that you applied previously.

Results
Live formatting starts even if your chart surface is empty. The circle icon in the Records Bar changes
color to orange to indicate that live formatting is running. You can see a summary of your selections
by hovering your mouse pointer over the Live Formatting command. Live formatting continues to run
until you select Stop or Stop and Reset Formatting.

Defining a default set of specifications

You can save a set of conditional formatting specifications to use as your default list for running live
formatting. This is useful if you regularly need to run the same specifications.

Before you begin

Ensure the conditional formatting specifications that you want to use in your default list are
compatible with live formatting and are saved in your workgroup or local folder. For more information
about compatibility, see “Live formatting system messages” on page 206.

Conditional formatting 205

About this task
You can save one set of default specifications. If you make changes and save the list as your new
default, it overwrites the previous version.

Procedure
1. Follow the instructions in “Setting up live formatting” on page 205 to select your specifications.
2. Click Live Formatting > Save Current Settings as Defaults.
The list that you selected in Live Formatting Setup is saved as your default list.
3. If you make further changes to live formatting and want to restore your saved list, click Live
Formatting > Use Default Specifications.
4. When you open a new or existing chart, click Live Formatting > Use Default Specifications if you
want to run your saved list as the live formatting setup.

Effects of live formatting

When live formatting runs, it impacts appearance settings and can override some style changes that
you make in Analyst's Notebook. You can work with live formatting effectively by understanding the
impact on other functions.
The default appearance of chart items is defined by your schema. You can reset all chart items to
their default setting during live formatting setup. This clears any existing manual or conditional
changes applied to chart items before you run live specifications.
When you run live formatting, the changes are immediate. At any point after starting live formatting,
you can click Stop and Reset Formatting to return items to their default appearance.
If you add new i2 Analyze records, or expand records while live formatting is running, the
specifications are applied to those items. If you stop formatting and add new items, the changes
occur as soon as you start formatting again.
Live formatting overrides manual style changes if you apply them to any item that is modified by a
conditional formatting specification. If you make manual changes from the Style tab, the affected
chart items revert to the style specified by live formatting when it runs next.
When you copy altered entities and links onto a new chart, they retain their appearance. The style
change that is invoked by formatting specifications persists unless you choose a different style or
reset the style to default settings.
You cannot stop and start live formatting by clicking Undo or Redo. While you might restore or apply
style changes through these actions, they are overridden as soon as you add or expand another
record. You have more control over formatting by using specifications and the live formatting
commands.

Live formatting system messages

Not all conditional formatting specifications are compatible with live formatting. Analyst's Notebook
provides information about specifications that need modifying and why some selections do not affect
the chart appearance.

Information and warnings

When you have available specifications listed in the Live Formatting Setup and no icon is displayed,
the specification is compatible with live formatting. If there is an icon next to the specification, you
can see the full message by hovering your mouse pointer over the icon.

206 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Icon Description
When this icon appears next to available
specifications in Live Formatting Setup, it
means that if you select the specification it will
not run. You can find out specifically why by
reading the tooltip. When this icon appears next
to selected specifications, it has a different
purpose and points to rules in the specification
that might not alter the chart in the expected
way.
If you select a specification that has an
information icon and move it into the selected
list, the icon changes to a warning triangle. The
detailed warning tells you about changes that are
not supported by live formatting and the actions
you need to take if you want the specification to
run.
This icon only appears in the selected
specifications list. It notifies you that a selected
specification has been moved or deleted from
your workgroup or local folder.

Conditional formatting 207

208 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Social Network Analysis
You can examine group structures and communication flows within a network chart by focusing on
the relationships that exist between entities. This type of analysis is called social network analysis.
Organizational theories are combined with mathematical models to help you understand the
dynamics of groups and organizations in which you are interested.
The structure of a network can determine:
• The performance of the network as a whole and its ability to achieve its key goals.
• Characteristics of the network that are not immediately obvious, such as the existence of a smaller
subnetwork operating within the network.
• The relationships between prominent people of interest whose position might provide the greatest
influence over the rest of the network.
• How directly and quickly information flows between people in different parts of the network.

Centrality and centrality measures

A highly centralized network is dominated by one person who controls information flow. A less
centralized network has no single point of failure. People can still pass on information even if some
communication channels are blocked.
Analyst's Notebook calculates betweenness, closeness, degree, and eigenvector centrality measures
to provide different perspectives on the social relationships within the network. You can also
influence the centrality measures by taking into account the direction of links and the weightings that
are applied to them.

Betweenness
Betweenness centrality measures the number of paths that pass through each entity.
This measure might identify entities with the ability to control information flow between different
parts of the network. These entities are called gatekeeper entities. Gatekeepers might have many
paths that run through them that allows them to channel information to most of the others in the
network. Alternatively, they might have few paths that run through them, but still play a powerful
communication role if they exist between different network clusters.
Closeness centrality measures both direct and indirect closeness:
• Direct closeness is when two entities are connected by a link.
• Indirect closeness exists when information can pass only from one entity to another by way of a
path that runs through one or more entities.

Link betweenness
Link betweenness centrality measures the number of paths that pass through each link.
This measure can help to identify key connections of influence within the network. A link through
which many paths pass might be a route for information exchange between entities.

Closeness
Closeness centrality measures the proximity of an entity to the other entities in the social network.
An entity with a high measure of closeness centrality has the shortest paths to the other entities. This
measure allows them to pass on, and receive communications more quickly than anybody else in the
organization. Information travels further to and from an entity on the edge of a network that is
attached to few other entities. They have a lower measure of closeness centrality.

Degree
Degree centrality measures how connected an entity is by counting the number of direct links each
entity has to others in the network.
This centrality measure can reveal how much activity is going on and who are its most active
members.

Eigenvector
Eigenvector measures how connected an entity is and how much direct influence it might have over
other connected entities in the network.
The eigenvector scores of the entities it is connected to, is considered. For example, a person with a
high eigenvector score is likely to be at the center of a cluster of key entities that themselves have
high eigenvector scores. That person can communicate directly with those key entities compared with
a person with a low eigenvector score on the periphery of the network.
Hubs and authorities are the terms that are used to describe the two eigenvector scores that are
calculated in networks that contain directed links. Hubs see the scores for outbound links, and
authorities see the scores for inbound links. A high-scoring hub has many outbound links to high-
scoring authorities, and a high-scoring authority has many inbound links from high-scoring hubs.

Link direction
Directed links can be considered as centrality measures. A link with arrows added to it represents the
directed flow of information between entities; either in a single direction or in both directions. This
measure might have an important bearing on how quickly information is passed from one part of the
network to another. For example, a person might receive information from many others in the
network but send information only to a select few. The centrality measures for an entity where
information is channeled in both directions is higher than the measures for an entity through which
information is channeled one way.

Link weightings
Not all relationships in a network are equal. For example, the link between two people, that are
connected through a family relationship might be stronger than a link between two business
associates.
These links can be weighted so that they represent real-world strengths in social network analysis.
Weighting key paths in the network might also infer that the entities by using them to channel
information have key roles to play. For this reason, centrality measure results are affected by link
weightings.

210 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

K-Core
Coreness is a measure that can help identify tightly interlinked groups within a network. A k-core is a
maximal group of entities, all of which are connected to at least k other entities in the group.
K-Core is a measure that can help identify small interlinked core areas on a network. To be included
in the K-Core, an entity must be linked to at least k other entities in the group. The linked entities are
regardless of how many other entities that they are connected to outside of the group. Maximal in the
definition means that we are interested in the largest set of entities with the required minimum
number of neighbors within the group. The value of k is sometimes referred to as the coreness of the
group.
For example, a group is the two-core if it contains all entities that are connected to at least two other
entities within the group. Similarly, a group is the three-core if it contains all entities that are linked to
at least three other entities within the group.
Any entity in the three-core must have at least three links to all other members of the three-core.
Clearly any such entity must necessarily have at least two links to every other member of the three-
core. Put another way, the three-core is a subset (is contained within) the two-core. More generally,
the K-Core form a nested hierarchy of entity groupings on the chart. The zero-core (entire chart)
contains the one-core, which contains the two-core, which contains the three-core, and so on. As k
increases, the core sizes decrease, but the cores become more interlinked. The K-Cores with the
biggest coreness values (k-values) represent the most cohesive regions of the chart.
The following diagram illustrates the K-Core decomposition of a simple network, and shows a nested
collection of zero, one, two and three-cores. Notice that the three-core actually consists of two
separate groupings on the chart. Technically these groupings are regarded as a single three-core with
two components.

Setting clustering and centrality measures

Changing the centrality measure that is used to analyze a chart provides different information about
your chart items.

Procedure
To change the centrality measure:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Social Network Analysis.
The Social Network Analysis pane opens.

Social Network Analysis 211

2. Click the Options tab.
3. Optional: In the Clustering section, select the K-Core check box to identify clusters of linked
items.
4. In the Centrality section, select the check box for the measures that you want to calculate:
Option Description
Betweenness To find gatekeeper entities that might control information flow. This check box is
selected by default. If betweenness is selected, you can also select
Betweenness for Links to find links that might be the most influential
connections in the network.
Closeness To find entities that might access the rest of the network more quickly than
others.
Degree To find the entities with the highest number of direct links to other entities in the
network.
Eigenvector To find the entities with direct links to the most influential entities in the network.

Note: At least one check box must be selected for analysis to take place.
5. Select the Use Link Directions check box if you want to take directed links into consideration
when you calculate centrality measures. If arrows are not displayed on a link, it is assumed that
information flows in both directions.
6. Optional: Leave the Enhanced Analysis option selected to use the advanced mathematical
algorithms to calculate results. If your chart contains several unconnected networks, or directed
links that block paths between certain entities, Analyst's Notebook takes unconnected networks,
or directed links into account and adjusts the calculations. The results reflect the relative
importance of these entities and paths to those entities and links in the entire chart.
Note: The only time that you clear the Enhanced Analysis option is if it is important that you do
not use the mathematical algorithms that are supported in Analyst's Notebook.
For example, to maintain a consistent set of results. No adjustment is made to take into account
directed links that block paths between entities. The results that are calculated for separate
unconnected networks reflect the relative importance of the entities within each network. The
links are not relative to the entities on the chart.
7. Normalize Results to adjust the calculations and display them as percentages in the Results
table. If you clear this option, no adjustment is made to the calculations and results are displayed
as raw data. Normalizing the results makes it easier to compare the centrality results of items in
different networks and charts. Click Advanced Options and choose between two different
methods of adjustment. The adjustment applies to all the selected centrality measures:
Option Description
Use the standard Results are calculated and then divided by what, in theory, is the highest
method possible result for each centrality measure. They are then expressed as
percentages in the Results table. This method is the standard normalization
method that is most commonly used in social network analysis.
Normalize results Results are calculated and the highest result or actual maximum for each
relative to the centrality measure is determined. This value is displayed as 100% in the
maximum value Results table. Every other value is divided by the actual maximum and
displayed as percentages relative to 100% in the Results table.

212 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Note: The Normalize Results option is not available if you cleared the Enhanced Analysis option.
Your results are calculated and adjusted by using the methods that are supported in Analyst's
Notebook.
8. Use the Actions on Completion section to specify:
a) Whether the results are displayed on your chart by selecting Show Results on Chart
b) Whether the appearance of chart items changes based on the analysis by selecting Apply
Conditional Formatting.

Selecting centrality measures

The Options page is used to select centrality measures and specify how the results are displayed.

Procedure
To select a centrality measure and specify how results are displayed:
1. Click the Analyze tab, and then in the Gain Insight group, click Social Network Analysis.
The Social Network Analysis pane opens.
2. Click the Options tab.
3. Select the centrality measure that you want to calculate.
You can choose to calculate betweenness for entities and links, closeness, degree, and
eigenvector, and take into account the direction of links. You can also carry out enhanced analysis
and normalize your results
4. Select how the results are displayed when calculations are complete.
You can choose to show results and weightings as chart item attributes, and apply conditional
formatting to them.

What to do next
When the Options page is complete, use the Weightings page to set link weightings. Or use the
Results page to calculate and analyze your results.

Adding link weightings

Use the Weightings page to set weightings on links to represent the real-world strengths of
connections between entities. Weightings are added to links as attribute values. You can set
weightings manually, base them on existing custom attributes, and import them from a weightings
file.

Procedure
In the Social Network Analysis pane, click the Weightings tab. Select the Use Link Weightings
check box.
The weightings are added to links as attributes with the following methods in order of priority:

Social Network Analysis 213

Setting link weightings manually
You can select links and add weighting attributes to them manually.

Procedure
To manually add a weightings value:
1. Select the links to which you want to add weighting attributes.
The same weighting attribute value is applied to all links selected.
2. Select the Manually Set Value check box.
3. In the text box, enter the numeric weighting attribute value, and then click Set Weighting for
Selection to. An attribute with the class name Manual Weighting and the manually set value is
added to the selected links.

Weightings files
Use the details stored in a separate file with the special file format .xwgt to add link weightings to
links based on link type or label text.
You create a file or import an existing one. Weighting values can be applied to:
• Links of a certain type, for example Associate links
• Links with a certain value, for example, links labeled "Brother Of"
To use a weightings file, select the From a Weightings File check box.

Edit current weightings

A weightings value is shown on link to represent the real-world strengths of connections between
entities. Once a file is created, this can be edited to allow changes.

Procedure
To edit the weightings in use:
1. Click Edit File. The Edit Weightings window is shown.
• To add or import new weightings, use the methods that describe how to create a weightings file.
• To edit an existing weighting, select the weighting column entry and enter a new numerical
weighting value.
• To delete a weighting, select a row and click Delete.
2. Click OK.

Create a weightings file

A weightings value is shown on links to represent the real-world strengths of connections between
entities. You can create weightings that are based on the link types or link labels that exist on the
chart.

Procedure
To create a weightings file:
1. Click Create a New File to show the Edit Weightings window.
2. Optional: To create a weighting that is based on link type, select Link Type and then click New to
enter edit mode. Enter the link type and numeric weighting value in the relevant columns and click
OK. You can create a weighting that is based on link label with the same method.

214 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

3. Optional: To import weightings from an existing .csv file. Click Import and use the Select Import
File window to browse to and select the file, and then click Open. Details from the .csv file are
added to the Weightings window.
4. Optional: To add weighting that is based on link labels, select Link Label and then click Add from
Chart. The Weightings table is populated with a list of the link labels and weightings that exist on
the chart. By default, links that did not have a weighting value on the chart have a weighting value
of one in the table. You can update this value manually if necessary.
5. Click OK.

Importing existing weightings

A weightings value is shown on a link to represent the real-world strengths of connections between
entities. If you already created a weightings file, it can be imported for use in other charts.

Procedure
To import an existing weighting file:
1. Click Select a File, the Select a Weightings File window is shown.
2. Use the Look in list to go to and select the .xwgt file that you want to use, and then click Open.

Results
The file path for the weightings file currently in use is displayed.

Use link label values

You can select links based on the values in link labels that currently exist on the chart and use their
link label values as weightings.

About this task

These weighting values can influence the centrality measure results for your social network analysis.

Procedure
• Select the Link Label Value check box.

Working with the Results page

The Social Network Analysis page is used to calculate and specify how results are displayed.
Use the Results page to:
• Calculate the centrality measures you selected in the Options page
• Display and analyze results in the Results table and on the chart
• Analyze results further by using the commands in the Actions Pane.
The Calculate command label displays the centrality measures currently selected on the Options
page.
Click Calculate to start generating the social network analysis results. Progress is displayed in the
status bar.
It takes Analyst's Notebook longer to calculate results for large charts. The length of time depends on
the number of items in the chart and the number of centrality measures that need calculating. If a
lengthy calculation is taking place, the chart is unavailable but you can still work with other charts
while the calculation runs in the background. The chart must remain open for background

Social Network Analysis 215

calculations to take place; closing the chart cancels the calculation. The tab of a chart displays a
progress wheel to show that a calculation is taking place. Progress of each centrality measure
calculation is displayed in the Results page and can be canceled individually at any time. If the chart
is not displayed when the calculation is complete, the tab of the chart starts flashing.
When results are calculated, they are displayed in the Results table and added to the chart items as
attributes. A separate attribute class is created for each centrality measure. You can display these
attributes on the chart by using commands in the Action panel. You can also display the attributes in
the attribute classes table of the Attribute instances page. These attributes are displayed in the
attribute classes table in yellow shading to show that they were added automatically by Analyst's
Notebook.
If link weightings are used, an attribute that is called weightings is automatically added to links after
calculation.

Results table columns

The Results table automatically displays results when the calculation is complete. Results for entities
and links are displayed in different tables, with the entity Results table displayed by default. The
format of the displayed results might be the actual numbers that are calculated or the values that are
adjusted and expressed as percentages. These results depend on the Enhanced Analysis and
Normalization options that are selected in the Options page.
The available columns for the entity Results table are as follows (default columns are marked with *):

Column heading Column contents

Entity* The entity icon followed by the label.
Betweenness A value that represents how many of the shortest
paths pass through each entity. An entity with
the lowest betweenness value has the lowest
number of shortest paths that run through it
compared with the other entities in the network.
If
Use Link Direction is selected in the Options
page, the arrow direction determines which
paths can be measured between entities.
Authorities (In) and Hubs (Out) do not have
separate columns for betweenness results
because the number of directed inbound paths
are identical to the number of directed outbound
paths if the arrows are reversed. The same
connecting paths are used for the betweenness
calculation regardless of direction.

216 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Column heading Column contents
Closeness A value that represents how close each entity is
to the others in the network. For example, an
entity with the highest closeness value has the
shortest paths to most other entities in the
network. If Use Link Direction is selected in the
Options page, the closeness result is displayed
in two separate columns:
• Closeness (In): how close an entity is based on
the number of inbound paths
• Closeness (Out): how close an entity is based
on the number of outbound paths

Degree The number of links between an entity to others

in the network. If Use Link Direction is selected
in the Options page, the degree result is
displayed in two separate columns:
• Degree (In): the total number of inbound links
• Degree (Out): the total number of outbound
links
The degree of a result is affected if the links that
connect it are weighted. Examples:
• A link with a weighting of four is classed as four
times more important than a link without a
weighting. It counts as four links, whereas a
link without an assigned weighting counts as
one by default.
• An entity that is connected by two links has a
degree of five, if one link has no weighting and
the other has a weighting of four.

Social Network Analysis 217

Column heading Column contents
Eigenvector A value that represents how connected an entity
is based on its direct links to the other influential
entities in the network. An entity with the highest
eigenvector score is directly connected to many
other entities with high eigenvector scores. If
Use Link Direction is selected in the Options
page, two eigenvector results are calculated and
displayed in two separate columns:
• Authority (In): how connected an entity is
based on its inbound links
• Hub (Out): how connected an entity is based on
its outbound links
An eigenvector score is affected if the links that
connect to other entities are weighted. For
example, a link weighting of three means that the
link is treated as three times more important
than a link with no weighting.
Note: Hub and authority results cannot be
calculated for charts that contain certain
configurations of entities and links. In such
instances, a warning message is displayed. You
might be able to calculate hub and authority
results if you change your configuration, or edit
your link weightings.

K-Core A value that can help identify small interlinked

core areas on a network. An entity with the
highest K-Core is directly connected to many
other entities with high K-Cores. The K-Core
score of an entity is affected if the links that
connect it to other entities are weighted. For
example, a link weighting of three means that the
link is treated as three times more important
than a link with no weighting.

To display results for links, select Links. The available columns are as follows (default columns are
marked with *):

Column heading Column contents

Link* The link icon followed by a summary of the link in
the format:
Entity A label > link label > Entity B label

Betweenness A value that represents how many of the shortest

paths pass through each link. A link with the
highest betweenness value has the highest
number of paths that run through it compared
with the other links in the network.

218 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Column heading Column contents
Weightings The weighting value that is assigned to each link.

Commands to process results

Use the commands at the bottom of the Results page to specify what you want to do with your social
network analysis results.
• Show Results on Chart to display the results as attributes of the entities and links on the chart. If
you previously chose to show weightings and results on the chart in the Actions on Completion
panel of the Options page, the results are displayed on the chart automatically.
• Hide Results on Chart to hide the results that are currently displayed as attributes of the entities
and links on the chart.
• Clear Results to delete results from both the chart and the Results table.
• Select Top Five to select the results with the five highest values in the sorted column of the Results
table. These results are also selected on the chart. Click anywhere on the chart or Results table to
clear.
• Hide Unselected to hide the entities or links that are not selected in the Results table.
• Show All to display the entities or links that were hidden previously by selecting the Hide
Unselected command.
• List Items to display the contents of the Results table in the List Items window. If subsets of
results are hidden or cleared, those results are displayed in List Items.
• Copy Results Table to copy the column headings and contents of the Results table to Windows
Clipboard. If a subset of results is hidden or cleared, those results are not copied.

Social Network Analysis 219

220 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Focus on items of interest
To focus your analysis and visualization on items of interest, you can select them on the charting
surface then remove all other items from view. Or to focus on the selection later, you can save it in a
selection set, then recall the selection when you need it.
Ten selection sets are available. You might save different groups of items to different selection sets.
For example, the results of different searches of your chart.
You can recall the selection that is saved in a selection set. To gather all items of interest for focused
analysis, you can add the members of each selection set to the current selection.
To focus your analysis or visualization exclusively on the items of interest, you can copy the selected
items to a new chart. The new chart does not contain any other items from the original source chart.

Hiding chart items

If you are working on a complex chart, you might want to show or hide subsets of the data. Hiding
chart items is useful if you want to emphasize areas of your chart or temporarily remove data that is
irrelevant or inappropriate for certain audiences.

About this task

Analyst's Notebook typically treats hidden items as if they do not exist on the chart:
• Hidden items are not included in any selection, for example Select All.
• All links to a hidden entity are also hidden.
• Hidden items are unaffected by chart operations, for example layouts.
• Hidden diverted event frames do not cause the theme line to which they are linked to be diverted.
• Hidden items are only listed in the List Items and List Cards windows when the Hidden Items
option is selected.
Hidden items are removed from view, but are not deleted, so you can reveal them on the chart when
required. Revealing hidden items causes them to become visible temporarily, but they retain their
hidden status. You can make items fully visible or visible with a grayed out appearance by using the
Reveal options on the View tab. To remove hidden item status, you must show the items rather than
reveal them.
For some chart operations, for example Visual Search, you can choose to include hidden items and
reveal them as part of the operation by selecting Reveal Hidden in the appropriate window.
Note: Analysis attributes consider hidden items regardless of their reveal hidden status. For example,
if an entity is linked to one visible entity and one hidden entity, the value for its Entity Links analysis
attribute is always 2.

Procedure
To hide items on your chart:
1. Select the items that you want to hide.
The selection might be the result of an analysis operation, such as Find Text, Find Path, or Visual
Search, or as a result of making a selection such as in List Items or List Cards.
2. Click the View tab.

3. If Reveal Fully or Reveal in Gray is selected, you must clear it. In the Show and Hide Items
group, click Reveal.
4. To hide all selected items, in the Show and Hide Items group, click Hide Selected.
To hide all items that are not selected, in the Show and Hide Items group, click Hide Unselected.
To hide items, based on criteria that you specify:
a) In the Show and Hide Items group, click Show and Hide.
The Show and Hide window opens.
b) Select an option, then click Hide.
Option Description
All Hide all chart items.
Selected Hide selected chart items only.
Unselected Hide only chart items that are not selected.
With Any of the Hide all chart items that have attributes of any attribute class that you
Attributes select in the list. Use the Ctrl or Shift keys to select more than one
attribute class. All attributes that are used on the chart are listed.

If hidden items exist on your chart, you can choose to show hidden items that meet the specified
criteria by selecting an option and clicking Show.

Removing hidden items from a chart

If you publish or share a chart, any items that you want to conceal must be deleted. Hiding items does
not prevent others from viewing them by using the Reveal operations.

Procedure
To delete all hidden items:
1. You might want to save a copy of your original chart before you delete all of the hidden items to
publish it.
2. Ensure that all hidden chart items are fully hidden on your chart (not visible). If Reveal Fully or
Reveal in Gray is selected, click the View tab and in the Show and Hide Items group, click
Reveal.
3. Press Ctrl+A to select all the visible items. Then, on the View tab, in the Show and Hide Items
group, click Reveal > Reveal Fully.
All of the hidden items are revealed but not selected.
4. Click the Select tab and in the Select Items group, click Invert.
All previously selected items are unselected and the hidden items that were revealed are now
selected.
5. Press the Delete key to delete the previously hidden items that are now displayed and selected.

222 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Copy items to a new chart
To focus on items of interest or to change the emphasis of your analysis, you can copy selected items
to a new chart. To view the items from a different perspective, you can copy them to an association
chart or to a timeline chart.
For example, during your analysis you might investigate activity over time, which results in a
histogram with a large amount of activity in one particular time period. Selecting the period of interest
in the histogram selects the relevant chart items that you can then copy to a new chart for further
investigation.
The copy to new chart features are on the Analyze tab. When you copy items to a new chart, the new
chart is based on the original chart that you copied the items from. Basing your new chart on the
original chart avoids issues such as differing grading systems, and means that appropriate entity
types, link types, palettes, and so on, are available for you to continue working.
You can copy only selected items or include the direct links between the selected items. To include
direct links, even if they are not selected, use the with Connections version of the relevant option.
For example, after you select telephones on a chart, to copy the telephones and the calls between
them, use Copy to New Chart with Connections.
If you select a link to copy to a new chart, the entities at each end of the link are also copied, even if
they are not selected.
Note: If hidden items are selected as part of your analysis, they are also copied to a new chart. They
retain their hidden status but are revealed in gray.

Copy to New Chart

During your analysis, you might identify a set of chart items that you want to focus on specifically. For
example, you might want to gather further information about specific people and add this new
information to a different chart. Alternatively, you might want to concentrate your analysis on a
subset of your original chart.
When you use the Copy to New Chart feature, the entity representations remain unchanged and the
chart items remain in the same position relative to each other.
Tip: If you copy items that are spread across a large chart, you might want to arrange the chart items
automatically in a more convenient layout. To rearrange chart items automatically, select the Copy to
New Association Chart or Copy to New Timeline Chart feature that corresponds to your chart. The
chart perspective does not change but the items are automatically rearranged on the new chart.

Copy to New Association Chart

If you have a timeline chart, you might identify a set of chart items that you want to focus on from a
network perspective. You can copy the selected items to an association chart. For example, during
your timeline analysis, you might identify a group of individuals and you might want to look at the
relationships and associations between them.
When you copy items to a new association chart, on the destination chart:
• Any entities that have a representation of theme line are changed to icons.
• Controlling status is removed from any items that were set to be controlling. Their status is set to
free.
• Any groups around items are removed and the chart items are arranged in a layout appropriate to
network analysis.

Focus on items of interest 223

• Display and printing of the time bar is turned off.
Note: If you select all of the items on the new association chart and copy them to a new timeline
chart, previous settings such as controlling status are not restored.

Copy to New Timeline Chart

If you are analyzing from a network perspective, you might decide that you want to look at the same
set of data or a subset of that data from a timeline perspective.
This feature is useful if you are working with an association chart that contains many links between
pairs of entities where each link is displayed individually, that is with a multiple connection style. For
example, there might be many transactions between two bank accounts with each transaction
displayed as a separate link.
When you copy items to a new timeline chart, on the destination chart:
• All entities are changed to theme lines, except for:
– Entities with a representation of event frame.
– Labels
– Entities that have data in their date and time properties and have a semantic type that is derived
from the Event semantic type.
• The following chart items are set to controlling when they have data in their date and time
properties:
– Event frames.
– Links between theme lines.
– Entities that have a semantic type that is derived from the Event semantic type.
• Any groups are removed.
• The chart items are arranged in a layout appropriate to timeline analysis.
• Display and printing of the time bar is turned on.

224 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Modify item appearance
After you add an item to the charting surface, you can modify its appearance from the default style
that is specified by the chart. You can emphasize items on the charting surface, and present only the
most crucial data on the charting surface.
To emphasize an item, you might add an icon frame, increase the size of the item, or add a bold or
italic style to the item text.
To present only the most crucial item data on the charting surface, you can select which properties
are displayed. For example, you can choose to display only grades, source type, and the value of
specific attributes.
To remove irrelevant or less important data from view, you might hide those chart items. To place a
lower emphasis on those items instead of removing them, you can reveal the hidden items in gray.

Displaying icon frames

You can add a colored frame around the border of entities that are represented by icons, including the
icons on theme lines. If a picture is displayed on the entity instead of an icon, the frame is added to
the picture in the same way.

About this task

Circular frames are created around icons and theme line icons; square or rectangular frames are
created around pictures. Frames can be used to draw attention to key entities. Frames can highlight
groups of entities and change the appearance of entities that are selected by using analysis tools
such as filtering or Social Network Analysis. Frames can also indicate entities with shared attributes
as a result of applying conditional formatting.

Procedure
To add an icon frame to your selection:
1. Right-click an item, and select Edit Item Properties.
The Edit window is shown.
2. Select Style > Frame.
3. Select Display a Frame. The Preview area contains an example of how the framed icon looks on
the chart. The frame that is created is shaded blue with a margin width of two.
4. To change the color, select a color from the Color bar.
5. To change the width of the frame around the icon, select an option from the Margin bar.
6. Optional: Select Set Default Style to use the current settings as the default for the entity
representation.
7. When you are happy with the icon frame that is shown in the Preview area, click OK
Tip: To remove an icon frame from the selected entity, clear the Display a Frame check box and
click OK.

Setting the font
You can set the font type, size, style, color, and the shading style of the text on the chart.

Procedure
To set the font on an item:
1. Right-click an item, and select Edit Item Properties. The Edit window is shown.
2. Select Style > Font.
3. Select a font to use in the Font area.
4. Select the style of the font in the Font Style area.
For example, you might want to show the font in bold, or italic.
5. Select the size of the font in the Size area.
6. Choose the font effects to use in the Effects area.
7. Set the font color by selecting a color from the Color list.
8. Set the shading style by selecting a shading style from the Shading list.
9. Optional: Select Set Default Style to use the current settings as the default for the link or
particular entity representation.
10. When you are happy with the font that is shown in the Sample box, click OK.

Setting display properties

When items are displayed on a chart surface, you can determine which properties to display. This
allows you to include key information of interest to your investigation.

Procedure
To set display properties:
1. Right-click an item, and select Edit Item Properties.
The Edit window is shown.
2. Select Style > Display.
3. Select the options to use when items are shown:
• Select Default to select the default display options.
• Select Clear All to clear the display options.
4. Select how the date is shown in the "Displayed Date & Time" area. You can choose either:
Option Description
Description Shows the description of date and time that is entered in the Date & Time page.
Formatted Formats how the date and time that is entered in the Date & Time page is shown.
Select a format from the list. When the item has a date and time, a preview of how
the date and time is shown in the Preview box.
5. Optional: Select Wrap Text and set a value to use when you wrap text.
6. Optional: Select Set Default Style to use the current settings as the default for the link or
particular entity representation.
7. Click OK.

226 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Setting the default style
When you add new items to your chart, Analyst's Notebook uses the default style to display the item.
You can set the default style for links and for each different entity representation. For example, you
can set a default appearance for new theme lines or icons.

About this task

The default style is a group of settings that control the appearance of a chart item:
• Font
• Entity or link type
• Display options, such as which items properties are shown on the chart
Setting the default style applies only to new items that you add to your chart. It does not modify the
appearance of existing items. However, if you are editing the appearance of an existing item, you can
choose to make those current settings the default style by selecting the Set Default Style check box
in the Edit Item Properties window.

Procedure
1. Right-click on the background of your chart and select Set Default Styles.
The Set Default Styles window opens. A folder is listed for each entity representation and for
links.
2. Click the folder of the representation whose default style you want to change.
Different style pages are available depending on which entity representation or link you choose.
3. Click to open a style page. The following options are available:
Option Description
Type Settings such as the entity or link types, semantic type, line strength and width,
color, and enlargement. The type options are not available for labels.
Display Settings such as which item properties to display on the chart and how the date and
time are formatted.
Font Font settings such as style, size, and effects.
Frame Settings to choose whether to include a frame around an icon and to set its color
and margin size. The frame options are only available for icons and theme lines.
Connection Settings to determine link multiplicity, fan size, and how theme lines are diverted
through event frames. The connection options are only available for links.
4. Edit the options that you want to change, then click OK.
Related concepts
Style

Modify item appearance 227

To highlight key aspects of your investigation or key pieces of information on your chart, you can
configure the style or appearance of an item.

Displaying an attribute class on the charting surface

You can choose which item attributes are displayed on the charting surface. To show key item
information to chart recipients, display the attribute that it is stored in.

Procedure
1. Click File > Chart Properties > Definitions > Attribute Classes.
2. Select an attribute class, then click Properties.
3. Select Show On Chart, then click OK.
4. In the Chart Properties window, click OK.

Results
If an item contains an instance of that attribute class, the attribute is displayed on the charting
surface.

Changing entity representation

You can change the representation of entities. You might want to change an entity from an icon to a
text block, event frame, or theme line.

About this task

Entities added to the chart surface can change their representation. Changing the representation
changes the appearance, and allows different types of analysis to be carried out.
When you change the representation, you can also change the ordering behavior to follow for entities
that have date & time values.

Procedure
1. Select the chart items that you want to change.
2. Click the Style tab, and then click Change Representation.
The Change Representation window is shown.
3. Select a representation to change the chart items to.
4. Select the order behavior to apply to the chart items.
Option Description
Leave order unchanged Does not change the order and control of the date & time.
Remove order from all chart Sets items to be free - that is not ordered by date & time
items values.
Add order to all chart items with If a date & time is detected, the items are set to be
date and time controlling.
5. Click OK.
Related concepts
Apply layouts to association charts

228 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Layouts can be applied to association charts. You can use a layout to rearrange the chart for better
presentation so that relationships are more visible.
Apply layouts to timeline charts
Layouts can be applied to timeline charts. Applying a layout rearranges your chart so that patterns
might be revealed over a time period.

Resetting style
Reset modified chart items to their default style and appearance by using the Reset Style option.

About this task

You might decide that changes to the style of items are no longer needed and you want to reset their
appearance to the default style specified by the chart. When you reset items, you remove all the
changes whether they are manually applied, modified by live formatting, or conditional formatting
specifications. The option to reset the style is available when you select one or more items on the
chart surface.

Procedure
1. Select the item or items that you want to change.
2. Click the Style tab of the ribbon, and then click Reset Style.
The style of the selected items changes instantly. For example, if you select a Person entity that is
larger than Person entities specified by the chart, the size decreases to match the default size.
Note: You can undo and redo your actions from the Quick Access Toolbar at the top of the
screen.

Modify item appearance 229

230 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Arrange items
You can automatically move chart items so that their presentation suits the data, and so that items
are uniformly positioned. You can improve the clarity of the chart, for example by shaping links so that
they do not obscure other chart items.
To produce a clearer chart and to consistently space items, you can use chart layouts such as the
Minimize Crossed Links layout and the Theme Line layout. Chart layouts automatically arrange chart
items. Other layouts move items so that their presentation suits the data, for example the
Organization layout.
To improve the uniformity of item positioning, you can use the features in the Align and Space group
on the Arrange tab. Uniform positioning can help chart recipients to focus on chart data, rather than
on inconsistent positioning.
To move items manually, you can select several of them on the chart and drag them together. When
you make another selection, Analyst's Notebook discards the temporary group that you created. As
an alternative, you can use the Group feature to create a permanent grouping of items. To move
grouped items manually, drag the handle of the group.
To shape a link so that it does not obscure other items, you can add corners to it. For example, you
can route the link around other chart items rather than over them. You can also add consistency to
link alignment, so that all links run either horizontally or vertically.

Chart layouts
Layouts provide a quick way of automatically rearranging the entities and links on your chart. Layouts
improve the appearance of your chart and to help you analyze the structure of chart data. When a
layout is applied, Analyst's Notebook automatically resizes the chart so that you can see all chart
items without having to adjust your view.
Analyst's Notebook provides two main types of layout, depending on what data your chart contains:
• Layouts for association charts
• Layouts for timeline charts
For new charts, it is a good idea to try different types of layout to determine which provides the best
view for your investigation. When you identify a layout, you can then try experimenting with the
settings for this layout for even better results.
Layouts can be useful when new data is incorporated into the chart. You can rerun a layout on the
whole chart to analyze what effect the new information has on the chart.
Note: After you manually arrange chart items for presentation, if you run a layout you will lose your
changes.

Apply layouts to association charts

Layouts can be applied to association charts. You can use a layout to rearrange the chart for better
presentation so that relationships are more visible.
Note: When you apply a layout: Background and hidden chart items are ignored by all association
chart layouts but might affect timeline layouts, and corners are removed from all links.
None of the layouts are suitable for charts that contain large entities. For example, boxes - often used
to represent organizations - and large OLE objects, for example photographs.
To apply a layout, click the Arrange tab, and then in the Network Layouts group, click the layout.

Related tasks
Changing entity representation
You can change the representation of entities. You might want to change an entity from an icon to a
text block, event frame, or theme line.

Circular layout
The Circular layout does not reveal the structure of your chart data in the same way as the Peacock or
Grouped layout. It might be useful when you want to arrange a number of entities by type in a circular
pattern.
A Circular layout can be used in charts with connected and unconnected entities. If the Blocking
Required check box is cleared in the Setup Layouts window, all entities are arranged into a circle,
even if they are not linked to any other entities.
Note: The entities in a Circular layout are sorted by type and not by the number or destination of links
between them. Therefore, this layout might result in many crossed links inside the circle.
By using a Circular layout, you can:
• Specify the maximum width and height of the rearranged chart.
Note: The height or width of the chart might exceed the height or width that you specify. For
example, if your chart contains grouped items that are spaced far apart. Chart items in a group are
not moved relative to each other.
• Position an entity in the center of the circle.
• Include an inner and outer ring.
• Specify several circles or a single circle.
A Circular layout might not be appropriate for charts that contain:
• Many ordered or controlling items. These items are not moved.
• Many theme lines, for example timeline charts.
• Boxes enclosing other entities. The relationship between the box and the entities within it is lost.

Compact Peacock layout

The Compact Peacock layout is useful when you have many interlinked entities. It groups sets of
entities that are linked to one entity on the chart.
Use the Compact Peacock layout for one of the following options:
• Identify entities at the center of much activity in high volume data, for example telephone data or
financial transactions.
• Discern in more detail the activity within groups of interconnected entities.
The Compact Peacock layout is more flexible than the Grouped layout and the patterns it produces
vary depending on the nature of your data. The chart items in a Compact Peacock Layout are more
spread out than the standard Peacock layout, The Compact Peacock layout makes them much more
legible. When you zoom in to an area of the chart, the links between the main areas of activity are also
shorter. A more compact and legible final chart is provided.
By using a Compact Peacock layout, you can do one of the following options:
• Set the separation distance between entities
• Fix entities on the chart in their original location
• Animate the layout

232 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

A Compact Peacock layout might not be suitable for charts that contain:
• Many ordered or controlling items. These items are not moved.
• Mostly theme lines, for example timeline charts.
• Boxes that enclose other entities. The relationship between the box and the entities within it is lost.

Grouped layout
The Grouped layout is useful when you have many linked entities. You can find out whether there are
certain entities to which a number of other entities are linked. It helps to identify groups of
interconnected entities and the relationships between them.
The Grouped layout is more rigid than the Peacock layout. It always attempts to rearrange your chart
data into a similar pattern. This pattern has a group of interlinked entities at the center, and other
groups 'fanning out' from this central group.
Note: Using a Grouped layout does not display the structure of the network within the groups clearly.
To see more detail in the structure, use a Peacock layout.
By using a Grouped layout, you can:
• Set the maximum width and height of the rearranged chart
• Specify a minimum separation for items
• Position an entity at the center of the chart
A Grouped layout might not be appropriate for charts that contain:
• Many ordered or controlling items. These items are not moved.
• Mostly theme lines, for example timeline charts.
• Boxes that enclose other entities. The relationship between the box and the entities within it is lost.
• Only a few linked entities.

Hierarchy layout
For charts that contain organizational structures, you can use the Hierarchy layout to visualize how
key individuals control different operations. To show the relative status of entities, peers in the
organization are aligned.
To use the hierarchy layout, one or more entities must be identified as root entities. The other items in
the chart are rearranged in relation to the identified root items.
By using a Hierarchy layout, you can:
• Set the separation between entities. The depth is the separation between entities at different levels
in the hierarchy from the root entity or entities. The breadth is the separation between entities at
the same level in the hierarchy.
Note: If the Legacy Mode check box is cleared, sibling entities are grouped closer together, which
might affect the breadth separation.
• Specify whether to arrange the entities from top-to-bottom or left-to-right.
• Choose how to determine the root entities of the hierarchy.
• Specify whether to use corners when you lay out the chart.
• Choose whether to revert to the legacy mode for the layout. Legacy mode does not allow for entity
extents or allow animation. In addition, items on the same level of the hierarchy are not sorted to
reduce crossed links in legacy mode.
• Choose whether to animate the layout. Animation is not available if you select the legacy mode.

Arrange items 233

A Hierarchy layout might not be appropriate for charts that contain:
• Many ordered or controlling items. Ordered and controlling items are not moved.
• Boxes that enclose other entities. The relationship between the box and the entities within it is lost.
• Mainly theme lines, such as timeline charts. Theme lines, and items that are directly connected to
theme lines, are not moved by a hierarchy layout.

Minimize Crossed Links layout

The Minimize Crossed Links layout is useful when you have many linked entities to arrange the
entities into the clearest layout possible.
By using a Minimized Crossed Links layout, you can:
• Specify a minimum separation between chart items
• Set the orientation of the chart
• Select a link to position at the outside of the chart layout

Organization layout
The Organization layout is useful for charts that contain organizational structures, and you can
identify one or more key individuals who control different operations. To ensure that links between
entities are visible, peers in the organization might not be aligned.
You can group and ungroup chart items and apply an Organization Layout. The items in the group are
retained.
By using an Organization layout, you can:
• Set the separation between entities
• Specify the orientation of the chart
• Choose how to determine the root of the chart

Packed layout
The Packed layout is useful for laying out chart items such that empty space is minimized on the
chart. This layout can make your chart more compact to view and print.
A Packed layout can be used for charts that have many connected and unconnected entities. Other
layouts often arrange chart items in a single row across the width of the chart. These layouts make
wide charts that are difficult to see in a single view. When a Packed layout is applied, the items that
have the most connected entities are grouped first on the left side of the chart. The remaining items
are shown next to that group, in descending order of nodes, across and then down. Entities that are
not connected to any other entity are shown in a row at the bottom of the chart
You can customize the behavior of a packed layout in the following ways:
• Specify the group separation value
• Animate the chart as the layout is applied

Peacock layout
The Peacock layout is useful when you have many interlinked entities, because it groups the other
entities that an entity is linked to.
A Peacock layout can be used to:
• Identify entities at the center of much activity in high volume data, for example telephone data or
financial transactions.

234 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

• Discern in more detail the activity within groups of interconnected entities
The Peacock layout is more flexible than the Grouped layout and the patterns it produces vary
depending on the nature of your data.
By using a Peacock layout, you can:
• Set the separation distance between entities
• Fix entities on the chart in their original location
• Animate the layout
A Peacock layout might not be appropriate for charts that contain:
• Many ordered or controlling items. These items are not moved.
• Mostly theme lines, for example timeline charts.
• Boxes enclosing other entities. The relationship between the box and the entities within it is lost.

Apply layouts to timeline charts

Layouts can be applied to timeline charts. Applying a layout rearranges your chart so that patterns
might be revealed over a time period.
Note: None of the layouts are suitable for charts that contain large entities. For example, boxes -
often used to represent organizations - and large OLE objects, for example photographs.
To apply a layout, click the Arrange tab, and then in the Timeline Layouts group, click the layout.
Related tasks
Changing entity representation
You can change the representation of entities. You might want to change an entity from an icon to a
text block, event frame, or theme line.

Ordered layout
The Ordered layout is most useful when you have a chart with a sequence of events. It separates each
event from the next horizontally by a distance you specify in the layout setup to read your data much
more easily. The distance that you specify takes into account the width of chart item labels but not
link labels.
An Ordered layout is useful:
• When you import a volume of data and must apply an initial layout.
• For analysis of high volume data, especially of events with date & time.
• For presentation and printing.
By using an Ordered layout, you can:
• Apply the layout to the entire chart, limit the layout to selected items, or limit the layout to items
that are in a specified date and time range.
• Set the distance between successive items. You can choose to set the distance between all items or
controlling items. For example, by selecting controlling items you can maintain the position of items
such as textual annotation or theme line icons.

Proportional layout
The Proportional layout is most useful when you have a chart with a sequence of events. It displays
an accurate representation of when items occur in relation to each other. This layout can help to gain

Arrange items 235

an understanding of how events occur in real time, but can result in wide charts with items spaced far
apart.
When you import data, for example telephone calls, the Proportional layout provides an initial view of
how the events are spread in time before you apply other layouts.

By using a Proportional layout, you can:

• Apply the layout to the entire chart or just a selection of chart items
• Specify how the chart width is determined

Theme Line layout

The Theme Line layout is useful when you have many theme lines on your chart.
By using a Theme Line layout, you can:
• Sort the theme lines by a particular property, for example to place the theme line with the most
connections at the top of the chart
• Specify the vertical separation between theme lines
• Change the order of the theme lines
• Align the theme line icons and event frames
• Arrange event frames that divert
A Theme Line layout is not appropriate for charts that do not contain controlling items.

Grouped Theme Line layout

The Grouped Theme Line layout is useful when you have many theme lines on your chart and you
want to minimize the number of links that cross the theme lines.
The Grouped Theme Line layout is a proportional layout. It is effective when you target part of a large
network, for example after you filter a chart to find all of the transactions in a particular time period.
By using this layout, you can:
• Sort the theme lines to cluster your chart into groups of highly connected theme lines.
• Minimize the number of links that cross theme lines.
• Minimize the theme line extents.
• Position the theme line icons at the start of the theme lines, just before the first link. When a theme
line has only one link, the theme line icon is placed at the time of the link.
A Grouped Theme Line layout is not appropriate for charts that do not contain controlling items.

Grouped By Time layout

Grouped by Time layout arranges items from left to right across your chart in groups. Items that occur
at similar times are displayed close together. For example, you can group telephone calls that occur
within an hour of each other to find periods of high activity.
The Grouped by Time layout is useful for:
• High volume imported data with dates and times, for example telephone billings or financial
transactions, to find bursts of activity that might be related.
• A timeline chart with many events that take place at irregular intervals.
• Reducing the widths of charts that are too wide when laid out proportionally. This layout preserves
an indication of periods of high activity and periods of low activity.

236 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Using a Grouped by Time layout results in a chart in which the distance between each subsequent
item is defined by you. It is a non-proportional layout, as the gap between items is not equivalent to
the time between them.
A Grouped by Time layout is not appropriate for charts that do not contain controlling items.
By using a Grouped by Time layout, you can:
• Apply the layout to the entire chart, limit the layout to selected items, or limit the layout to items
that are in a specified date and time range.
• Set the maximum time difference between consecutive items to consider them to be in a group.
• Set the distance between groups.
• Set the distance between successive items in a group. You can choose to set the distance between
all items or controlling items. For example, by selecting controlling items you can prevent other
items from being spaced out to the right of each group and therefore produce a more compact
layout. In this more compact layout, the separation between groups is always between controlling
items.

Changing layout settings

Chart layout settings determine how items are positioned when layouts are applied to charts. These
settings can be modified to better match your needs.

Procedure
To modify the layout settings:
1. Click the Arrange tab, and then click Layout Setup.
The Setup Layouts window appears.
2. From the list on the left of the window, select the chart layout to modify.
3. Change the layout settings to suit your requirements:

Arrange items 237

Table 1: Chart layout options

Options Description Applicable layouts

Size Specifies the chart area by dimensions or by Circular, Grouped
minimum separation of entities.
Separatio Specifies the distance between entities or groups of Hierarchy, Minimize Crossed
n entities. Links, Organization, Packed,
Compact Peacock, Peacock,
Grouped by Time, Ordered,
Theme Line
Central Arranges the other entities around a specified Circular, Grouped
Entity entity.
Note: This setting asks for the identity of the entity
to be used. As such it is a chart-specific setting.

Entity Prevents the rearrangement of key entities, either Compact Peacock, Peacock
Constrain based on selection status or a specified attribute.
ts
Double Arranges entities into two rings, one within the Circular
Ring other.
Blocking Arranges groups of related entities into multiple Circular
circles.
Animated Specifies whether the view shows you the steps that Hierarchy, Minimize Crossed
are taken to transform your chart to the selected Links, Organization, Packed,
layout. Compact Peacock, Peacock
Apply To Specifies which items on the chart are grouped. You Grouped by Time, Ordered,
can group all items, the selected items only, or Proportional, Theme Line
items associated with a particular time period.
Group Sets the scale at which items are grouped. Grouped by Time
Items
Within
Root Selects the starting point for grouping within Hierarchy, Organization
hierarchies and organizations.
Orientati Specifies the direction of the layout and the Hierarchy, Minimize Crossed
on alignment of items within the layout. Links, Organization
Add Add corners to the links in a hierarchy so that they Hierarchy
Corners are arranged horizontally and vertically.
Outer Specifies the items to position at the boundary. Minimize Crossed Links
Boundary
Width Specifies how the width of the layout is determined. Proportional
Order Specifies how the order of the theme lines is Theme Line
determined.
Legacy Uses the original Hierarchy layout, which does not Hierarchy
Mode allow for entity extents, order items within layers, or
provide animation.

238 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

4. Click OK to save your changes.

Aligning and spacing chart items

Chart items can be aligned or spaced. You can align and space chart items vertically or horizontally.
Aligning and spacing chart items rearranges them so that they are evenly spaced out or aligned on
your chart. The buttons in the Align and Space group on the Arrange tab move preselected items
around your chart so that they can be aligned with each other or be evenly spaced. You can align or
space any number of selected items from a minimum of two chart items.

Procedure
Click the Arrange tab, and then in the Align and Space group, click one of the following buttons:
Option Description
Align Move selected chart items so that they are aligned vertically without moving each
Vertically chart item up or down.
The center of each chart item is moved to an invisible alignment line. If most of the
selected items are on the same vertical line, the other selected items are centered
on that vertical line. If none of the selected chart items are on the same vertical
line, all selected items are centered on a line that is mid way between all of the
selected chart items.
Tip: You might use Space Vertically after Align Vertically, to space out your
aligned items evenly.

Align Move selected chart items so that they are aligned horizontally without moving
Horizontally each chart item to the left or right.
The center of each chart item is moved to an invisible horizontal alignment line. If
most of the selected items are on the same horizontal line, the other selected
items are centered on that horizontal line. If none of the selected chart items are
on the same horizontal line, all selected items are centered on a line that is mid
way between all of the selected chart items.
Tip: You might use Space Horizontally after Align Horizontally, to space out your
aligned items evenly.

Space Entities Move automatically a number of selected chart items so that an even amount of
> Space white space is placed between them vertically. The chart items are not moved
Vertically horizontally.
For each selected item, an invisible box is drawn around the chart item. This box
includes the height of the item and the full width of any labels and attributes. The
selected chart items are moved to a set vertical distance from the top and bottom
edge of each invisible box.
Note: The File > Chart Properties > Options > Display > Snap to Grid option has
no effect upon chart items that are spaced vertically with this function.

Space Entities Move automatically a number of selected chart items so that an even amount of
> Space white space is place between them horizontally. The chart items are not moved
Horizontally vertically.

Arrange items 239

Option Description

For each selected item, an invisible box is drawn around the chart item. This box
includes the height of the item and the full width of any labels and attributes. The
selected chart items are moved to a set horizontal distance from the left and right
edges of each invisible box.
Note: The File > Chart Properties > Options > Display > Snap to Grid option has
no effect upon chart items that are spaced horizontally with this function.

Grouping items
You can group or ungroup items on your chart. You can also copy groups and paste them into a new
chart or application.

About this task

You can use grouping with the following layouts:
• Grouped
• Circular
• Peacock
• Compact Peacock
• Organization
• Hierarchy
You cannot use grouping with the following layouts:
• Grouped by Time
• Minimize Crossed Links
• Proportional
• Ordered
• Theme Line
Note: Analyst's Notebook tools do not use grouping.

Procedure
To add chart items to a group, clear the group, or select the items in a group, select one of the
following commands:
• Right-click a selection of chart items, and select Group from the menu.
• To clear the group, select the group, and then select Ungroup.
• To select all the items in the group, select the group, and then select Select Grouped Items.
• To delete a group, select the group, and then press Delete.

240 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Prepare a chart for publication
Before you present or publish a chart, you can check it for spelling errors, and remove data records.
To aid understanding of your chart, you can add a legend, which is a key for the conventions that are
used on your chart.
Some items on the charting surface might be displayed differently to chart recipients who use an
earlier version of Analyst's Notebook. If you use visualization features that are not supported in
earlier versions, Analyst's Notebook displays compatibility warnings when you save the chart.

Check spelling
Spelling checks can run automatically as you type. Possible spelling mistakes are highlighted and
suggestions are made for corrections. A spelling check can be run after you create a chart before it is
published. When you finish creating a chart, it is searched for spelling and other errors. When a
possible error is identified, you can correct it and then continue the check.

Checking spelling of the completed chart

Spelling can be checked in a chart that you complete before it is published. The actions that are
taken, might be to ignore, or change a word that is found with a spelling check.

Procedure
To check spelling in a chart:
1. Click the Publish tab, and then in the Prepare group, click Spelling.
The first spelling error is displayed in the Not in Dictionary box.
2. A suggested replacement is displayed in the Change To box. Select one of the following options in
the Suggestions area:
Option Description
Ignore Leaves the error unchanged, but continues to identify any further instances of this
error.
Ignore All Leaves all instances of this error unchanged for the current session.
Change To accept the suggested correction, click Change. To use another of the
suggestions in the list, click the required word then click Change.
If none of the suggestions are the required word, type the correction in the Change
to box and then click Change.
When the selected error is a repeated word, this changes to Delete so you can
easily remove the second instance of the word.

Change All Changes all instances of the word in the Not in dictionary box to the word in the
Change to box. Changes all instances of the error in the active chart only.
Add Adds the word in the Not in Dictionary box to the dictionary. When Analyst's
Notebook encounters this word in future, in this chart or any other charts, it will not
be identified as a misspelling.
Close Closes the Spelling window without making the current suggested change, and
stops checking the chart.
3. A message is displayed when the spelling check is complete. Click OK to close it.

Setting spelling check options
You can set the options to use when you spell check a chart. You might want to ignore or specify
certain types of text.

Procedure
To show the Spelling page:
1. Click File > Options.
2. In the Options window, select the Spelling page.
3. You can choose to spell check entities, links, or both entities and links. Specify chart items to
include in the spelling check, by selecting:
Option Description
Entities and Links Spell check all entities and links.
Entities Only Spell check only entities.
Links Only Spell check only links.
4. You can tell Analyst's Notebook to ignore certain kinds of text in your chart when you check
spelling. You might want to ignore words with numbers. The spelling check can also suggest
similarly sounding or similarly spelled words. Select or clear the following check boxes:
Option Description
Capitalized words For example, Canada.
Uppercase words For example, ASAP.
Words with numbers For example, Windows2000.
Mixed case words For example, AstroTurf.
Domain names For example, www.awebsite.com
HTML markup For example, <p>
Report doubled words For example, the the.
Case-sensitive checking
Suggest similarly sounding words Suggests "whose" and "hoes" for "hoose".
Suggest similarly spelled words Suggests "house" and "choose" for "hoose".
Suggest split words

Checking spelling automatically as you type

You can check spelling automatically as you type information in to chart items. You can add an error
as a word to the dictionary. You can also ignore an error.

Procedure
To check spelling automatically as you type:
1. Select the Check Spelling as You Type check box.
2. When you type text on your chart or in any properties page, Analyst's Notebook uses wavy red
underlining to indicate a spelling error. To correct an error, right-click a word with a wavy
underline, and then click the correction that you want from the menu.

242 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Note: The Coverage settings that are specified in the Spelling page of the Options window do not
apply when spelling is checked as you type.
3. Select Ignore All to skip all instances of this error for the current session of Analyst's Notebook.
When you close the application, the option to ignore this word is reset.
4. Optional: If you do not want to identify the word as an error in all charts, click Add to add the word
to the dictionary. You might want to add a word to the dictionary when it is the name of a person or
organization that you regularly use.

Work with legends

A legend is a key for the conventions that are used on your chart. You can create a legend to explain
the different entity types, link types, attribute classes, line properties, fonts, and time zones on your
chart.
You can specify the shape of the legend and place it at a specific location on your chart.
A legend can have a title, chart summary information, and legend entries for the following items:
• Attribute symbols
• Entity icons (such as Male and Female.)
• Lines (for items such as event frames, theme lines, boxes, circles, and text blocks.)
• Fonts (describing the use of fonts on your chart)
• Links
• Time zones
• Icon frames
You can either populate the legend from the items on your chart, or create a blank legend and
populate it manually.

Populating the legend

Use the Populate Legend window to populate your legend with entries for items that exist on your
chart. You can select which item types are added. If a legend exists for the chart, you can also specify
how any new entries are added.

Procedure
1. To open the Edit Legend window, click the Publish tab, and then in the Prepare group, click
Legend. If your chart does not currently contain a legend, the Legend Population Option window is
displayed.
2. Select the Items page on the Edit Legend window.
3. In the Add Entries For area, select the appropriate check boxes to select entry types you want
included in the legend.
4. In the Action area, select the appropriate option to specify how new entries are added to an
existing legend.

Replace Existing Deletes all of the existing entries in the legend

before populating it
Append to Existing Adds the new entries to the entries already in
the legend even if the legend already contains
identical entries

Prepare a chart for publication 243

Merge with Existing Merges the new entries with the entries already
in the legend
5. Click OK to populate the legend with entries for the chart items, by using the options specified.

Adding legend title entry

Use the Add Legend Title window to specify the contents of the legend title. If the legend is
populated from chart items, 'Untitled' is used as the first title entry that is displayed in the Edit
Legend window.

Procedure
1. On the Edit Legend window, click Title. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish tab,
and then in the Prepare group, click Legend. If your chart does not currently contain a legend, the
Legend Population Option window is shown.
a) To populate the legend from the items on the current chart, click Yes on this window. A legend
is created by using the default settings for each entry.
b) To populate the legend manually, click No on this window. A blank legend is created.
2. In the Text box, enter the information that you want to include in the legend title such as name,
date.
3. You can enter more than one line of text, by pressing the Enter key or by creating extra title
entries. By default, each new title entry is added below any existing entries.
4. To change the font of the title, click Font. Use the Font window to select the font.
Tip: If you are editing an existing legend, the legend text box is populated with any previously
created title (and other) entries. Use the Edit Legend Title window to edit title entries.

Adding or editing a legend attribute entry

Procedure
1. On the Edit Legend window, click Attribute. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish
tab, and then in the Prepare group, click Legend. If your chart does not contain a legend, the
Legend Population Option window is shown.
a) To populate the legend from the items on the chart, click Yes. A legend is created by using the
default settings for each entry.
b) To populate the legend manually, click No. A blank legend is created.
2. In the Description box, enter the text to appear in the legend for that attribute.
3. Select the attribute symbol from the list that is displayed in the Symbol box. This list contains all
available attribute symbols. You can use the scroll bar or use the up and down keys to access the
attribute you require. If you know the name of the attribute, then click in the symbol list and type
the name.
4. Click OK to confirm the entry and return to the Edit Legend window.
Tip: To edit an existing entry, either double-click the entry to be edited or select it and click Edit.
The Edit Legend Attribute Entry window is shown. Edit the entry.

244 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Adding or editing a legend icon entry

Procedure
1. On the Edit Legend window, click Icon. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish tab,
and then in the Prepare group, click Legend. If your chart does not currently contain a legend, the
Legend Population Option window is displayed.
a) To populate the legend from the items on the current chart, click Yes on this window. A legend
is created by using the default settings for each entry.
b) To populate the legend manually, click No on this window. A blank legend is created.
2. In the Description box, enter the text to appear in the legend for that icon.
3. Select the icon from the list that is displayed in the Icon box. This list contains all icons available.
You can use the scroll bar or use the pointer up and down keys to access the icon you require. If
you know the name of the icon, then click in the icon list and type the name.
4. Click OK to confirm the entry and return to the Edit Legend window.
Tip: To edit an existing entry, either double-click the entry to be edited or select it and click Edit.
The Edit Legend Icon Entry window is shown, in which you can edit the entry.

Adding or editing an icon frame entry

The chart legend can contain icon frame entries that match the colors of icon frames on the chart. You
can add descriptions to the legend entries to explain what the icon frame colors represent.

Procedure
To add or edit a icon frame legend entry:
1. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish tab, and then in the Prepare group, click
Legend.
a) To populate the legend from the items on the current chart, click Yes. A legend is created by
using the default setting for each entry.
b) To populate the legend manually, click No. A blank legend is created.
2. Click Icon Frame to add a new icon frame entry or double-click an existing icon frame entry to edit
it.
3. Enter the description for the legend entry.
4. Select the color to use for the icon in the legend entry.
5. Click OK to confirm the entry and return to the Edit Legend window.

Adding or editing a legend line entry

Event frame styles and theme segments styles can be added to the legend as line entries.

Procedure
1. On the Edit Legend window, click Line. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish tab,
and then in the Prepare group, click Legend. If your chart does not currently contain a legend, the
Legend Population Option window is shown.
a) To populate the legend from the items on the current chart, click Yes on this window. A legend
is created by using the default settings for each entry.
b) To populate the legend manually, click No on this window. A blank legend is created.
2. In the Description box, enter the text to appear in the legend for the line.

Prepare a chart for publication 245

3. From the Strength list, select the strength (line style) of the line. The list includes solid, dashed,
and dotted lines.
4. From the Color list, select the color from the displayed palette.
5. From the Width list, select the thickness.
6. Click OK to confirm the entry and return to the Edit Legend window.
Tip: To edit an existing entry, either double-click the entry to be edited or select it and click Edit.
The Edit Legend Line Entry window is shown. Use this window to edit the entry.

Results
You create entries for each convention you are using in your chart.

Adding a legend font entry

If you use fonts to highlight the importance of information on your chart, the meanings can be added
to the chart legend.

Procedure
To add font details to the legend:
1. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish tab, and then in the Prepare group, click
Legend.
2. Select Font
The Add Legend Font Entry window opens.
3. In the Description box, enter the text to show in the legend for that font.
4. To change the font, click Font.
5. Click OK to confirm the entry and return to the Edit Legend window.
Tip: To edit an existing entry, either double-click the entry to be edited, or select it and click Edit.
The Edit Legend window is shown in which you edit the entry.

Adding or editing a legend time zone entry

Short time zone names on the chart (PST, BST, GMT, and so on) can be displayed in the legend in their
full form: Pacific Standard Time, British Summer Time, Greenwich Mean Time. The Populate button
on the Edit Legend window adds any short time zone names that are displayed on the chart to the
legend automatically. Extra time zones can be added if required.

Procedure
To add or edit a legend time zone entry:
1. On the Edit Legend window, click Time Zone. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish
tab, and then in the Prepare group, click Legend. If your chart does not currently contain a legend,
the Legend Population Option window is shown.
a) To populate the legend from the items on the current chart, click Yes on this window. A legend
is created by using the default settings for each entry.
b) To populate the legend manually, click No on this window. A blank legend is created.
2. From the Time Zone list, select a time zone to add. The long names of the selected time zone are
shown in the Description box.
3. To change the font of the legend entry, click Font. The Font window is shown, in which you can
select the font.

246 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

4. Click OK to confirm the entry and return to the Edit Legend window.

Adding or editing a legend link entry

You can populate a legend and add it to your chart by using one of the following steps.

About this task

Legend entries can be added and edited for legend link entries.

Procedure
On the Edit Legend window, click Link. To show the Edit Legend window, click the Publish tab, and
then in the Prepare group, click Legend.
• To populate the legend from the items on the current chart, click Yes. A legend is created by using
the default settings for each entry.
• To populate the legend manually, click No. A blank legend is created.
Tip: To edit an existing entry, either double-click the entry to be edited, or select it and click Edit.

Setting legend display properties

Use the Edit Legend Properties page to specify how the legend appears on your chart and to specify
its location.
To display the legend on the chart, select the Show on Chart check box.

Setting the legend shape

In the Shape area, select the appropriate option to specify the shape of the legend:

Tall The legend is arranged in a rectangular box taller

than it is wide
Square The legend is arranged in a square box
Wide The legend is arranged in a rectangular box wider
than it is tall

Positioning the legend

The legend is positioned relative to the currently defined pages of the chart, as specified in the Page
Setup window. You might need to adjust the page setup before positioning the legend to achieve the
wanted result.
In the Horizontal Chart Location area, select the appropriate option to specify the horizontal position
of the legend:

Left The legend box is placed on the left of all the

currently defined pages, as specified in the Page
Setup window.
Free The legend box can be freely moved horizontally
(by dragging it)
Right The legend box is placed on the right of all the
currently defined pages, as specified in the Page
Setup window.

Prepare a chart for publication 247

Similarly, in the Vertical Chart Location area, select the appropriate option to specify the vertical
position of the legend box:

Top The legend box is placed at the top of all the

currently defined pages, as specified in the Page
Setup window.
Free The legend box might be freely moved vertically
(by dragging it)
Bottom The legend box is placed at the bottom of all the
currently defined pages, as specified in the Page
Setup window.

Note: The default Horizontal Chart Location and Vertical Chart Location options are Free. You can
drag the legend anywhere on the chart.

Setting the legend font

In the Description Text area, click Font to select the font to be used for descriptions. This font is also
used as the default font for other textual entries such as titles and time zones. The Font workspace is
displayed for you to select the required font. The panel to below the Font button displays sample text
in the chosen font.
Note: If you specify a font for a particular legend entry, this font overrides the default font.

Compatibility warnings
Support for the following features depends on the version of Analyst's Notebook that you are using. In
versions earlier than Analyst's Notebook 8.5, icon frames, displaying pictures on entities, and setting
icon options are not supported.

Handling compatibility warnings

When you save a chart in this version of Analyst's Notebook, it is checked for any significant
compatibility issues with earlier versions. A warning is shown so that you can see more information
about the warnings.

Procedure
To see more information about compatibility warnings:
1. In the Compatibility Warning window, select one of the following options:
Option Description
Details Displays a summary of the affected features.
Full Report Generates a comma-separated value (CSV) file that contains further information.
2. Click OK to save the chart.
Tip: If you do not want to be warned about compatibility issues in the future, clear the Show this
Warning when Saving check box. To see warnings again when you save, select the compatibility
warning option in the Setting saving application options page.

248 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Analyst's Notebook version 6 compatibility warnings
Some features added to Analyst's Notebook 7 are not supported in Analyst's Notebook 6.
The following features that were added to Analyst's Notebook 7 are not supported in charts that are
saved as Analyst's Notebook 6:
• Unicode text that is typically used to support multiple character sets in the same chart are
converted to ANSI encoding.
• Changing the shading color of the icon is not supported, and revert to their default display settings.
• Database keys that link chart items to their source database items are deleted.
• When printing, headers and footers are deleted from page setup details.
• Cover sheet custom properties might be deleted.
• Time zones that were introduced at version 7, are replaced by the local time zone.
• The information that is stored in chart item SDK property bags is deleted.
• OLE objects might be removed if there is no version later than Analyst's Notebook 6 installed.
• Entity type properties that are created by users are deleted.
• Unicode

Removing data records

For chart items that have database identities, you can choose to remove any associated data records.
For example, if you want to clean the chart of sensitive or unwanted information.

About this task

You can remove the data records for a selection of chart items or for all chart items with associated
data records. Removing data records removes all of the data on the Data Records pages, but leaves
the database key and database instance intact.
Note: If you redact a chart to remove data records, the database key and database instance is no
longer intact.

Procedure
• To remove data records for a selection of chart items, click the Publish tab, and then in the Redact
and Purge group, click Purge Data Records.
• To remove all data records, click the Publish tab, and then in the Redact and Purge group, click
Purge All Data Records.
Note: You can undo the deletion of data records from your chart items by clicking the Undo button
in the Quick Access Toolbar.
Related tasks
Displaying data records
Depending on the data source, data records are attached to items when you add data from a data
source. Data records contain data that is copied from the source record, so that you can view any
copied data that is not displayed on the charting surface.

Prepare a chart for publication 249

250 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help
Present and publish charts
To present the data on your chart effectively, you can build a sequence of chart items to step through,
and you can zoom into multiple areas of the chart. If you publish the chart, you can save the chart in a
format that is appropriate for the recipients, and you can print the chart.
When you present a chart to an audience, you can use the Pan through Selection pane to build and
step through a sequence of chart items. Or, you can take snapshots to capture the appearance of a
chart at particular points in time, then sequentially present the snapshots to show how your chart
developed.
To focus attention on multiple areas of a large chart simultaneously, you can split the chart into two
or four panes, then zoom each pane to a different area. To create the largest possible area to display
the chart, you can enter full screen mode.
You can publish the .anb file that you are working on, if all the content is suitable for the audience. If
the chart contains sensitive data, you can save a redacted copy of the chart in which sensitive
information is removed. If recipients do not have Analyst's Notebook, you can publish your chart as a
PDF file or as an image.
To publish chart data in text format, you can export chart information to a report.

Presenting charts
There are several ways to change your view of a chart so that it is easy to present. If the whole chart
does not fit in the application window, you can move around your chart with a keyboard or a mouse.
Alternatively, you can zoom in or out to see more or fewer items.

Splitting your chart window into panes

You can split the display of the chart into two or four panes. Splitting into panes means that you can
work with smaller, more manageable areas of the chart.

About this task

You can display a different region of your chart in each of the panes, and zoom in and out or scroll in
each pane independently. Splitting your chart into panes can make it easier to link entities that are far
apart. You can display each of the remote entities in its own pane, then drag a link that crosses panes.

Procedure
To split a chart window into panes:
1. Click the View tab, and then in the Window group, click Split.
Two-gray lines that cross at right angles are displayed on your screen, which you can move around
by using the pointer.
To split your window into just two panes, drag the pointer to one edge or the bottom of the screen.
2. Double-click the split intersection in the middle of the panes to remove the split.
When the pointer is over the intersection, it changes to four small arrows. The currently selected
pane fills the entire window.
3. To move the position of the split, click Split and drag the split to a new location.
Note: You can click the vertical or horizontal split line to move the split along just one axis (left-
right or up-down).

4. Click any of the panes to work with them.

Moving between selected items on the chart

You can use the Pan through Selection pane to view a sequence of items without manually scrolling
from one to the next. You can present a sequence of events to focus on each event in turn, or to
compare each item to the next.

Procedure
To define a list of items to browse:
1. Click the View tab, and then in the Show group, click More Panes > Pan through Selection.
2. Select the items that you want to browse. This selection might result from using one of the
following analysis tools:
• List Items
• Visual Search
• Find Linked
Note: You can select the items manually. If you have a theme line with many event frames
attached to it, select all of the event frames that are attached to the theme line.
3. In the List Options list on the Pan through Selection pane (the second list), select one of the
following options:
Option Description
Replace List with Selection Removes any existing items in the browse list before you add the
current selection.
Add Selection to List Adds the current selection to items already in the browse list.
4. Click Apply Command, next to the List Options list. Items are added to the browse list in the
order in which they were selected, for example in the List Items window. The item that is added
last is selected in the browse list.
Tip: To directly add items to the browse list when you click them on the chart surface, set Lock/
Unlock List to off.
5. Optional: To sort the browse list, select an option from the Sort Options list, then click Apply
Command next to the Sort Options list.
The list is sorted.
6. To move between items in the browse list, click the following buttons:
Option Description
Browse to Next Item Moves to the next item in the list.
Browse to Previous Item Moves to the previous item in the list.

The item is centered in the chart window. Its label is shown in the browse list. Entities are
displayed by using their label. Links are displayed by using the link summary.
7. To clear the browse list, select Clear List from the List Options list (the second list), then click
Apply Command next to the List Options list.

Using snapshots
A snapshot is a view of your chart at a particular stage in its development. It captures the position and
number of all visible chart items. The display settings, such as level of zoom and position of chart in

252 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

the window are also captured. Snapshots freeze the appearance of your chart at a particular moment,
for subsequent viewing.

About this task

You can take any number of snapshots of your chart as you build it and then later view each snapshot
in turn. This snapshot shows how information is added to the chart over time. Snapshots are also a
useful way of focusing on certain areas of your chart, for example a particular group of entities, or a
particular period.
Note: Avoid scrolling and zooming your chart when you take a sequence of snapshots. Each snapshot
saves the zoom level and current view of the chart. Also, avoid changing existing entities and links in
later snapshots. A change might be changing the font style and size, as these changes are reflected in
earlier snapshots.
Snapshots are saved with your chart.
Snapshots are taken, viewed, and maintained by using the Snapshots window.

Procedure
To open the Snapshots window, click the Publish tab, and then in the Snapshots group, click Take
Snapshots.

Publish a chart
Analyst's Notebook provides a range of publication formats for a chart, and provides ways to ensure
that chart recipients do not receive sensitive data.
When you are ready to publish your chart, you can take one of the following actions:
• Publish the .anb file.
• Save the chart in alternative formats such as an image or a PDF file.
• Produce printouts of the chart.
• Save a redacted copy of the chart in which sensitive information is removed.
Note: You can purge data records at any time, such as when you prepare a chart for publication.

Saving as a picture
You can save a chart as a picture so that you can use it, for example, in documents or reports and
publish them. You can save the entire chart, or a portion of a chart that displays chart items of
interest.

Procedure
To save a chart as a picture:
1. Click the Publish tab, and then in the Save as Picture group, click one of the following buttons:
• To save the view that is displayed by the current window, click Current View.
• To save the entire chart, click Entire Chart.
Note: When you save a chart as a picture, the following elements of the chart are also saved in the
picture:
• Time bar

Present and publish charts 253

• Theme line icon bars
2. In the Save as Picture window, navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3. Enter a file name for the picture and select a picture file type, then click Save.
You can save your chart as one of the following types of picture file formats:
• GIF (.gif)
• JPEG (.jpg)
• PNG (.png)
• TIFF (.tif)
• BMP (.bmp)
Note: Saving a chart as a BMP can produce large files. If the file is large, a prompt opens
confirming that you want to save it as a BMP. If you select No you are returned to the format
selection.

Saving as a PowerPoint slide

You can save a snapshot of a chart as a PowerPoint slide so that you can use it in presentations. You
can save multiple snapshots to show the process of your investigation.

Before you begin

You must create a snapshot before you can save it as a PowerPoint slide.

Procedure
1. To save a snapshot as a PowerPoint slide, in the Snapshots window, select a snapshot and click
Export to PowerPoint. The Save As window opens.
2. In the Save As window, navigate to the directory in which you want to save the file.
3. In the File name box, enter a name for the file to be saved.
4. Click Save. Analyst's Notebook saves the file, then displays the snapshot in a PowerPoint slide.
Note: If you do not want to view the snapshot in a PowerPoint slide, clear the Open the
Powerpoint file check box.

Printing to PDF
You can print a chart as a PDF document. To protect the document, you can set PDF security options.

Procedure
1. Optional: Set security options for the PDF document.
2. To print the chart as PDF, click the Publish tab, and then in the Print group, click the arrow below
Print to PDF. In the menu, click Print to PDF.
The Save As window opens.
3. In the Save As window, navigate to the directory in which you want to save the file.
4. In the File name box, enter a name for the file to be saved.
5. Click Save. Analyst's Notebook saves the PDF file, then displays options for next steps.
Note: If you specified any passwords, you are asked to confirm those passwords in the Confirm
Passwords window.
6. Select the next steps, then click OK.
For example, you can open the PDF file.

254 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Setting PDF security options
When you print a chart as a PDF document, you can protect the document. You can password protect
it, and control whether recipients of the PDF can print it, modify it, copy its contents, or add and edit
notes.

Procedure
1. Click the Publish tab, and then in the Print group, click the arrow below Print to PDF.
2. In the menu, click PDF Security Options. The PDF Security Options window opens.
3. Optional: In the Document Open Password field, type the password that the reader must enter to
open the PDF document.
Note: Do not rely on PDF password protection to secure sensitive documents.
4. Optional: To control what the reader can do with the document, you must enter a permissions
password then select which actions are permitted. If you do not enter a permissions password, all
the actions in the Permissions group are permitted.
a) In the Permissions Password field, type the password that the reader must enter, and then
modify which actions are permitted to the reader.
b) In the Permissions group, select actions.
5. To save the settings, click OK.

Printing charts
Analyst's Notebook provides various options for printing an open chart, such as choosing the printer
to use, and selecting which chart information to include in page headers and footers.

Procedure
To print an open chart:
• Click the Publish tab, and then in the Print group, click Print > Print. You can pick a printer and
choose how many copies to print.
Alternatively, if you would like to change the content that is printed:
• Click the Publish tab, and then in the Print group, click Page Setup.
The Page Setup options are displayed. Modify the page setup and click Print.
Option Description
Page Controls the size and layout options of the chart.
Margins Add a margin to frame the items on the chart.
Borders Add a visible border to the chart and determine whether background colors
are included in the output.
Annotation For timeline charts, you can specify where the time bar and theme line
names are displayed.
Header and Footer Add chart summary and custom property information to your chart. For
example, page numbers, and a title.

Present and publish charts 255

Saving a redacted copy of a chart
Redaction can be used to remove items, cards, and data records from a copy of your chart.

About this task

Sensitive information is removed from a redacted copy of a chart. As the redacted version of the chart
is saved separately, you can run the redaction multiple times to tailor the redaction level for different
audiences.

Procedure
To specify a method to use:
1. Click the Publish tab, and then in the Redact and Purge group, click Save a Redacted Copy.
The Save a Redacted Copy Options window opens.
2. Click Add to show the Add a Redaction Method window.
3. Select the methods to be used to redact the chart:
Option Description
Data Records To remove data records from a specific data source, specify the name of
based on their data the data source to which the data records are attached.
source
Items and Cards To remove items and cards that are based on their grading:
based on their
a. Select the items to remove. Items can be chart items and cards, only
Grading
chart items or only cards.
b. From the "Based On" list, select a grade.
c. In the "For Values" area, select one or more values.

Items based on a To remove items that are based on Flag attribute classes:
specified Flag
a. From the "Remove items when" list, select the attribute class.
Attribute
b. Select the condition to use with items that have the attribute class
assigned.
For example, a condition might be that the attribute is present or absent,
or has a value of Yes, or No.
Items based on a To remove items that are based on Text attribute classes:
specified Text
a. From the "Remove items when" list, select an attribute class.
Attribute
b. Select a condition from the list. For example, a condition can be: equal
to, contains, starts with, or ends with.
c. Enter the value for the attribute.
4. Click OK to close the Add a Redaction Method window.
5. Optional: To remove entities that no longer have links, select the Remove entities which have all
their links removed check box.
6. Click OK. In the Save as window, navigate to the directory in which you want to save the file. Enter
a name for the redacted chart and click Save. The chart is saved as a redacted copy, and a Cover
Sheet window is shown.
7. Click OK to close the Cover Sheet window.

256 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

8. A summary of the redacted chart is shown. Select the next steps, then click OK. For example, you
can open the redacted chart.

Report about charts

You can export chart information about entities, links, attributes, and cards to a report. Report
specifications are useful if you want to create a report that contains the information in all or part of
your chart. The generated report is created as a text file that can be then pasted into another
application.
You define the items that you want to include in your report by using a report specification. A report
specification is a series of settings that tells Analyst's Notebook what report to create and what you
want to include in it. Use report specifications to define the items, content, and destination of your
report. The report specifications are stored in a file called Reporter.rep.

Opening the Reporter

You can open the Reporter to create, edit, delete, duplicate, and run report specifications.

Procedure
To open the Reporter:
1. Click the Publish tab, and then click Reports.
2. In the Report On window, select one of the following options.
Option Description
New Create a report specification.
Duplicate Duplicate the selected report specification.
Edit Edit the selected report specification. For example, you might want to change the
title, destination, content, and format of the specification.
Delete Delete the selected report specification.
Load Load a report specification.
Run The selected report specification runs. You might be prompted for a file name and
location. A report is generted by using the criteria that you selected.

Creating report specifications

When you create a report specification, you can run it to report on data in your chart. You can choose
whether to create a report that is based on the entire chart or one based on only selected chart items.

Procedure
To create a report specification:
1. Click New.
2. The Edit Report Specification window is shown. Specify the destination, content, and format of
the specification in the pages of the window.
3. In the Report on area, select one of the options for the generated report.
4. Click OK.

Present and publish charts 257

Duplicating a report specification
You can duplicate a report specification. For example, to edit a copy of an existing report
specification.

Procedure
To duplicate a report specification:
1. Select a report specification to duplicate, and click Duplicate. An exact copy of the currently
selected report specification is created. You might edit the duplicated report specification to
change the title.
2. Optional: The duplicate report specification is added to the list of specifications. You can change
the order of report specifications, select one, and drag it up or down in the list.
3. Click Edit. The Edit Report Specification window for the duplicated specification is shown where
you edit the required properties.

Editing report specifications

When you edit a report specification, you might change the destination, content, and format of it. You
can edit the location of the generated output. You can specify the content of the output file, such as
the chart items to include. You can also specify the format of the report.

Procedure
To edit a report specification:
1. Click Edit.
2. Edit the name, destination, content, and format of the generated report.

Default report specifications

Default report specifications are available. You can duplicate, edit, delete, and load these report
specifications.
The following table describes the available default report specifications:

Option Descriptions
Full Report Contains a list of entities and links, with the following information for each:
• Identity
• Label
• Ends (for links only)
• Type
• Strength
• Date and time
• Description
• Grades
• Source type
• Source reference
• Attributes
• Cards

258 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Descriptions

Note: Empty fields remain blank.

List of Entities and Contains a list of entities and links, with the Type, Label, and Ends (for links
Links only) information for each.
List of Entities and Contains a list of entities and links, with the Type, Label, and Ends (for links
Links (Tabbed) only) information for each. Tabs are included between each field of
information to make the report suitable to be pasted into a spreadsheet
Entity, Link and Card Contains a list of entities, links, and cards with their Grade information.
Grades (Tabbed) Tabs are included between each field of information to make the report
suitable to be pasted into a spreadsheet.
Entity, Link and Card Contains a list of entities, links, and cards with their Label, Ends (for links
Descriptions only), and Description information. Cards are listed directly under the entity
or link to which they belong.
All Cards Contains a list of cards, with the following information for each:
• Chart item (the chart item to which the card belongs)
• Summary
• Time
• Grade
• Source type
• Source reference
• Contents

Loading report specifications

You can load report specifications, by selecting a report specification in the Report On window.

Procedure
In the Edit Report Specification window:
1. Select Load.
2. Browse to the location of the report specification file.
Report specifications are stored in a file named Reporter.rep. This file is typically found in:
C:\Users\IBM_ADMIN\Documents\i2\i2 Analyst's Notebook 8\Report
Specifications\Reporter.rep.
3. Select the required report specification and click OK.
Note: You can select more than one report specification by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. The Select
Specifications window closes and you are returned to the Report On window where the loaded
report specifications are listed. If a report specification exists with the same name as the one
being loaded, it is not overwritten and both specifications are displayed in the list. For clarity, you
might want to rename specifications to provide unique names.

Present and publish charts 259

Specify the content of a report specification
The item information that you specify in your report might include all item information or just the
information that is held in cards.

Selecting chart items to include in your report

You can specify the chart items to include in your report. This information might include all the item
information or just the information that is held in cards.

Procedure
In the Chart Items area of the Content page of the Edit Report Specification window, select one of
the following check boxes:
• Icons
• Theme Lines
• Event Frames
• Boxes
• Circles
• Text Blocks
• OLE Objects
• Labels
• Links
Tip: To select all chart items in the list click Select All. To clear the selected chart items, click Clear
All.

Selecting card information to include in your report

You can select card information for grades and keywords that can be included in your report.

Procedure
In the Card Detail area, select one of the following check boxes:
Option Description
Minimum A specific minimum grade for any (or all) of the grades.
Grade
Select the Minimum Grade check box and select the values that are required for the
three grade types from the appropriate lists.
The values that are available for the grades are defined in the grading system that is
used for your chart.
Maximum A specific maximum grade for any (or all) of the grades.
Grade
Select the Maximum Grade check box and select the values that are required for
the three grade types from the appropriate lists.
The values available for the grades are defined in the grading system that is used for
your chart.
Keywords Contain specific keywords. Select the Keywords check box and enter the required
keywords in the box. Separate multiple keywords by commas or spaces. The
keywords might be contained in the card summary, source type, source reference,
or description.

260 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Sorting card information in your report
You can sort the content of cards in your report by specifying the grade to sort on.

Procedure
To sort card information by grade:
1. In the Sorted by list select one of the following options:
Option Description
Unsorted Cards are displayed in the order that they are included in the chart item.
Grade 1 Cards are sorted alphabetically by the value of Grade 1.
Grade 2 Cards are sorted alphabetically by the value of Grade 2.
Grade 3 Cards are sorted alphabetically by the value of Grade 3.
2. Click OK to save your changes and close the window.

Selecting chart item information to include in your report

You can specify the item information to include in your report. This information might include all the
item information or just the information that is held in cards.

Procedure
In the Output area of the Content page of the Edit Report Specification window, select one of the
following options:
Option Description
Everything All the item information (such as identity and label) and the card information that
is associated with each item.
Card Detail Only Only the card information.

Defining the format of the generated report

You can enter the title of the report so that it describes what the report might be used for. The name
of the chart can be included in the title.

Procedure
Enter the title of the report in the Title box.
Tip: To include the file name of the chart in the report title enter @chart in this box.
For example, for a chart that is named 'Account Transactions', the title format: Report on @chart
generates a report with the title 'Report on Account Transactions'.

Chart item parameters

Information that is stored in chart items can be used when you create a report specification. For
example, you might use this information to add a label or description property that can be displayed
in the generated report.
The following entity parameters are available on the Format page of the Edit Report Specification
window:

@itemDate The date property of the chart item.

Present and publish charts 261

@itemDateTimeDescription The date & time description of the chart item.
@itemDescription The description of the chart item.
@itemGrade1 The Grade 1 information of the chart item.
@itemGrade2 The Grade 2 information of the chart item.
@itemGrade3 The Grade 3 information of the chart item.
@itemGrades All Grades (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3) of the
chart item.
@itemIdentity The identity of the chart item.
@itemLabel The label of the chart item.
@itemLabel1 The label of the entity at the first end of the link.
@itemLabel2 The label of the entity at the second end of the
link.
@itemProfile The identity of the entities at each end of the link
and an arrow that shows the direction of the link
between them.
@itemSemanticType The semantic type that is assigned to the chart
item.
@itemSourceRef The reference of the source of the information
that is represented by the chart item.
@itemSourceType The type of the source of the information that is
represented by the chart item.
@itemStrength The line strength of the entity . For example,
confirmed, unconfirmed, tentative.
@itemTime The time of the chart item.
@itemTimeZoneLong The long name of the time zone of the chart item.
@itemTimeZoneShort The short name of the time zone of the chart
item.
@itemType The type of the chart item. For example, Male,
Female, Child, Transaction, and Telephone Call.
@tab A tab character.

Attribute parameters
Information that is stored in attributes can be used when you create a report specification.
Attribute parameters are used to report on the attributes that are associated with the entities and
links in your chart, and as such they are entered in the Entities and Links boxes of the Format page.
You enter attribute parameters in the Entities box when you want to report on attributes for entities,
and similarly, you enter attribute parameters in the Links box when you want to report on the
attributes for links.
The @attributes parameter is always used to report on your attributes and can be entered in one of
three forms:

262 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Description
@attributes Use this form of the parameter to report on all your attributes by using a default
format of Name Prefix Value Suffix.
@attributes Use this form of the parameter to report on a specific attribute but by using the
{nameParam} default format Name Prefix Value Suffix. You must replace the nameParam
placeholder with the name of the attribute you want to report on, for example
@attributes {Previous Convictions}.
@attributes Use this form of the parameter to report on either a specific attribute or all
{nameParam | attributes but with a specific format. You must replace the nameParam
formatParam placeholder with either the name of a specific attribute, or the wildcard character
* to report on all attributes. You must also replace the formatParam placeholder
with any of the dedicated attribute format parameters. These parameters can be
entered in any order (with no space) and with your own text additions, for
example @attributes{Previous Convictions|No.@Value@Suffix}
where No. is your entered text.
If you want to use format parameters, they must always be entered in the syntax:
@attributes{nameParam|formatParam}
@attributes{formatParam} is invalid

Card parameters
Information that is stored in cards can be used when you create a report specification.
The following card parameters are available on the Format page of the Edit Import Specification
window:

@cardDate The date of the card.

@cardDateTimeDescription The date & time description of the card.
@cardDescription The description of the card.
@cardGrade1 The Grade 1 information of the card.
@cardGrade2 The Grade 2 information of the card.
@cardGrade3 The Grade 3 information of the card.
@cardGrades All Grades (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3) of the
card.
@cardSourceRef The reference of the source of the information
that is represented by the item to which the card
is attached.
@cardSourceType The type of the source of the information that is
represented by the card.
@cardSummary The summary of the card.
@cardTime The time of the card.
@cardTimeZoneLong The long name of the time zone of the card.
@cardTimeZoneShort The short name of the time zone of the card.

Present and publish charts 263

@itemLabel The label of the item to which the card is
attached.
@itemProfile The profile of the link to which the card is
attached.
@tab A tab character.

Inserting page breaks

You can insert page breaks and commas, spaces, carriage returns, or other punctuation characters
between parameters.

Procedure
Depending on how page breaks are displayed in the report, select the following check boxes:
Option Description
Page Break After Each Item Insert a page break after each entity or link that is included in the
report.
Page Break After Each Card Insert a page break after each card that is included in the report.

Note: You can also separate information in the report by inserting the tab character (by using the
@tab parameter), or by the use of commas, spaces, carriage returns, or other punctuation between
parameter names in the Entities, Links, or Cards boxes.

264 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Accessibility
Accessibility features help users who have a disability, such as restricted mobility or limited vision, to
use information technology products successfully.

Users can change some elements in the user interface by customizing Analyst's Notebook and
aspects of chart items. For example, color blind users and users with limited vision might want to
change the following elements:
• Color of invalid data
• Color aspects of item type definitions
• Font of the text on the chart
Related concepts
Customize Analyst's Notebook
You can customize Analyst's Notebook. You can set application options, and manage files and plug-
ins. You can also set up keyboard shortcuts and use utilities such as Series Import to import more
than one data file.
Modify item appearance
After you add an item to the charting surface, you can modify its appearance from the default style
that is specified by the chart. You can emphasize items on the charting surface, and present only the
most crucial data on the charting surface.
Related tasks
Changing the color of invalid data
When you enter invalid data into a field, the data is displayed in a specific color. You can choose which
color is used.
Related reference
Setting display options
Display options control the appearance of the chart surface. You can control the size of the grid,
background color, and link separation.
Item type definitions
Entity types and link types categorize the information on your chart and are part of a chart's
properties. If the existing item types are not suitable for your data, you can add or edit entity types
and link types.

Accessibility features
Analyst's Notebook uses standard Microsoft Windows navigation keys. There are multiple ways to
move around the user interface by using the keyboard.
Use the Tab and arrow keys to move through the interface and change focus.
You can also press Alt to activate keyboard shortcuts. When you press Alt, the application displays
keytips to indicate what keyboards shortcuts are currently available. Press Alt and then the
corresponding keyboard shortcut to complete an action.
The following table describes some common default keyboard shortcuts.

Action Keyboard shortcut

OK Press Enter

Action Keyboard shortcut
Cancel Press Esc
Delete Press Del
Move between items Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow
in a list, scroll down
a menu, or select
radio buttons
Display the right- Press Shift+F10
click menu
Select check box Press the Space bar

A list of more default keyboard shortcuts is given in the help. You can choose to customize these
shortcuts to your own preference.
Related reference
Keyboard shortcuts
Analyst's Notebook provides a set of default keyboard shortcuts for performing common tasks. You
can use the shortcuts to reduce the time you spend navigating the ribbon.

Keyboard shortcuts
Analyst's Notebook provides a set of default keyboard shortcuts for performing common tasks. You
can use the shortcuts to reduce the time you spend navigating the ribbon.
The shortcuts in Analyst's Notebook are:

Key Command
F1 Opens Help contents window
F2 Rename the selected chart item
F3 Find next text
F4, Ctrl+F Find text
Ctrl+F4 Close the current chart
Alt+F4 Exit Analyst's Notebook
F5 Visual Search
F6 Go to the next pane of a split window
Shift+F6 Go to the previous pane of a split window
Ctrl+Shift+F6 Go to the previous window of the current chart
F7 Check spelling
F8 Full Screen mode
F10 Display ribbon keytips
F11 List items

266 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Key Command
Ctrl+N New standard chart
Ctrl+Shift+N New from template
Ctrl+O Open chart
Ctrl+P Print chart
Ctrl+S Save chart
Ctrl+T Next snapshot
Ctrl+Shift+T Previous snapshot
Alt+Enter View properties of selected chart items
Page Up Zoom in
Page Down Zoom out
Right arrow Pan right
Left arrow Pan left
Up arrow Pan up
Down arrow Pan down
Shift+right arrow Page right
Shift+left arrow Page left
Shift+up arrow Page up
Shift+down arrow Page down
End Fit chart in window
Shift+End Fit height in window
Ctrl+End Fit selection in window
Home View at actual size
Ctrl+Tab, Ctrl+F6 Go to the next window
Ctrl+Shift+Tab Go to the previous window
Ctrl+A Select all
Ctrl+C Copy
Ctrl+Shift+C Copy with connections
Ctrl+D Duplicate
Ctrl+V Paste
0-9 Select members of set (0 - 9)
Ctrl+0-9 Define selection set (0 - 9) as the currently
selected items
Ctrl+Alt+0-9 Add current selection to set (0 - 9)

Accessibility 267
Key Command
Shift+0-9 Add members of set (0-9) to the selection

Related reference
Accessibility features
Analyst's Notebook uses standard Microsoft Windows navigation keys. There are multiple ways to
move around the user interface by using the keyboard.

Assigning a shortcut to a command

In addition to the default keyboard shortcuts that are available, you can assign shortcuts manually.
Assigning a shortcut can change any default shortcut that uses that key combination.

Procedure
To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command:
1. Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click Customize > Keyboard.
2. In the list of tabs, expand a tab name to view a list of all the commands in that tab.
3. Select a command in the list. A description of the command is displayed beneath the list. Any
existing keyboard shortcuts are shown in the Shortcuts area.
4. Type the key in the Press New Shortcut Key box. As you press Ctrl or Shift, this part of the
keystroke is automatically added.
You cannot assign:
• The Alt key as part of the shortcut (except when it is combined with Ctrl). Alt is reserved for
access keys.
• The numbers 0 - 9, or Shift+, Ctrl+, Alt+ combinations with these numbers, as shortcuts. These
numbers are reserved for Selection Sets commands.
5. Click Add.
Note: If you type a key or key combination that is already used by another command, the
command to which this key is already assigned is displayed. You can continue to add this
keystroke, but ensure that you remove it from the original command.
6. Click OK.

Results
The shortcut can now be used. If you no longer require a particular shortcut, you can use Remove.
Alternatively use Reset All to revert to the default shortcuts.

268 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Customize Analyst's Notebook
You can customize Analyst's Notebook. You can set application options, and manage files and plug-
ins. You can also set up keyboard shortcuts and use utilities such as Series Import to import more
than one data file.

Infotips
When you hover over a chart item, an Infotip provides a summary of item data. You can configure
Infotips to display the information that is of greatest interest to you.
You can choose which properties Infotips display, and you can configure the order of some of the
information. For example, if you work with bank account data you might configure Infotips in the
following way:
• Display the Account Type attribute at the top of the attribute list.
• Sort the Linked To list of accounts by the value of their transactions with the account that you
hovered over.
If the item properties that you choose to display in Infotips contain hyperlinks, a small button appears
in the Infotip. You can click this button to open a single hyperlink. If multiple hyperlinks are contained
in the item properties, clicking the button opens a list for you to choose which hyperlink to open.
If you do not want to use Infotips, you can disable them and display tooltips instead. Tooltips contain
the item label. For links, tooltips also contain the labels of the linked entities and an indication of the
link direction.

Data records in Infotips

You can choose to display data records in Infotips.
If multiple data records are attached to the item, click the left and right arrows to step through them.
For some source databases, you can
• Click the source icon to open the source record.
• Click the source label to open the data record in chart item properties.

Configuring Infotips
You can configure Infotips to display the information that is of greatest interest to you. You can
choose which properties Infotips display, and you can configure the order of some of the information.

About this task

The configuration applies to every Infotip that Analyst's Notebook displays.

Procedure
To configure Infotips:
1. Hover over an item on your chart to display an Infotip.
2. Click Configure in the lower right of the Infotip.
3. Select which properties to display in Infotips:

Option Description
Attributes Displays attributes that have a value. To choose which attributes to
display and to configure their order, click Select.
Analysis Attributes Displays analysis attributes that have a value. To choose which analysis
attributes to display and to configure their order, click Select.
Date & Time Displays the item's date and time.
Line Strength Displays the item's line strength.
Description Displays the item's description.
Grades and Source Displays the grade and source information about the item. Grade and
source information from cards is not displayed.
Linked Items Displays a reference for each link to an entity. Clicking a reference pans
to the linked item and centers it in the window.
Use the Sort By list to choose how the linked items are sorted, and the
Order list to choose ascending or descending order.

Cards Displays a summary and link for each card that is attached to the item.
Clicking the link displays the card.
Data Record Source Displays a list of the sources of the data records that are attached to the
Names item.
Data Record Displays the properties of each data record that is attached to the item.
Properties
4. Click OK to save your changes.

Selecting Infotip attributes

You can choose which attributes and analysis attributes that Infotips display. To give prominence to
the most important information, you can configure the order of attributes in the Infotip.

Procedure
To choose and order attributes:
1. Follow the appropriate step according to whether you want to configure attributes or analysis
attributes:
• To configure attributes, in the Configure Infotips window, click Select below the Attributes
check box.
• To configure analysis attributes, in the Configure Infotips window, click Select below the
Analysis Attributes check box.
A configuration window opens.
2. Click the arrows to move the selected attributes into the appropriate columns:
Option Description
Show these If a value for an attribute in this list is present on an item, the attribute
attributes first displays on the Infotip. To change the order of this list use Move Up and
Move Down.

270 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Option Description
Show these Attributes in this list will display after attributes moved into the Show
attributes next these attributes first list, but only if the check box in the heading is
selected.
Don't show these Attributes in this list are not displayed as part of an Infotip.
attributes
3. Click OK to save your selection.

Disabling Infotips
The Infotips displayed on the chart can be replaced with tooltips.
To disable Infotips and revert to tooltips, click the View tab, and then in the Show group, clear the
Infotips check box.

Custom icons
You can use your own images to supplement the icons that are provided with Analyst's Notebook. You
can assign custom icons to entity types and attribute classes.
Images must meet the following specification:
• Bitmap (.bmp) format
• 8-bit color depth
• Size as specified in Table 1
Pixels that are colored magenta (RGB 255,0,255) are rendered transparent.
To make your custom icons available for use, copy the images to the appropriate folders specified in
Table 1, then restart Analyst's Notebook.

Table 10. Custom icon image sizes and folders.

Type of icon Use Size (pixels) Folder
Entity type Screen 32x32 C:\Users\<username>\Documents\i2\i2
Shared\Custom Images\Screen\Icons
Print 120x120 C:\Users\<username>\Documents\i2\i2
Shared\Custom Images\Printer\Icons
Attribute class Screen 12x8 C:\Users\<username>\Documents\i2\i2
Shared\Custom Images\Screen\Attribs
Print 45x30 C:\Users\<username>\Documents\i2\i2
Shared\Custom Images\Printer\Attribs

Screen and print icons

Screen icons are displayed in the Analyst's Notebook window. Print icons are higher definition
versions of screen icons and are used in printouts.
Creating custom print icons is optional; if a screen icon does not have a corresponding print icon, the
screen icon is used in printouts. A print icon must have the same file name as the corresponding
screen icon.

Customize Analyst's Notebook 271

Related tasks
Embedding and extracting custom icons
You can embed your custom icons into the charts that use them, so that recipients of the charts can
see the icons on the charting surface. You can extract the custom icons that are embedded in charts
that you open, so that the icons become available for you to use.

Custom semantic types

You can derive custom semantic types based on the ones in the IBM i2 Semantic Type Library, then
use them in other charts and share them with colleagues. Deriving a custom semantic type is
appropriate when you need a more accurate classification of your data than the standard type library
provides.
When you derive custom semantic types and assign them to items on your chart, they are saved as
part of your chart. You cannot delete the standard types from the IBM i2 Semantic Type Library, but
you can delete any custom semantic types that are not in use on the chart. After you remove all
assignments of a custom semantic type, to access the Delete command you must first close and
reopen the Chart Properties window.
Note: When you delete a custom semantic type, all descendants of the custom semantic type are also
deleted.
Related reference
Item type definitions
Entity types and link types categorize the information on your chart and are part of a chart's
properties. If the existing item types are not suitable for your data, you can add or edit entity types
and link types.
Attribute definitions
Attribute classes categorize the information that is stored as attributes on chart items and are part of
a chart's properties. If the existing attribute classes are not suitable for your data, you can add or edit
attribute classes. Attribute entries are preset values for attributes of a specific attribute class. For
values that you reuse regularly, define attribute entries and add them to the appropriate palettes.

Deriving custom semantic types

You can derive custom semantic types from semantic types that are stored in the standard library to
provide more accurate classification of the data that you assign them to.

Before you begin

Search carefully for an available semantic type before you derive your own custom one. Defining a
custom semantic type when the library already contains an appropriate semantic type can cause
problems with information retrieval and matching.

About this task

Typically, you might derive a custom semantic type when you define an entity type, link type, or
attribute class. You can also derive custom semantic types wherever you can assign a semantic type.
For example, you can assign a semantic type to a single entity on the chart surface.
When you derive a custom semantic type, it is important to choose the correct parent semantic type,
so that Analyst's Notebook interprets the data correctly. Some semantic types are used by Analyst's
Notebook for entity matching. The Find Matching Entities feature uses semantic types that are
assigned to entities, links, and attributes as part of its smart matching behavior.

272 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Procedure
To derive a custom semantic type:
1. In any window where you can select a semantic type, such as when you are defining an item type
or attribute class, click the Semantic Type browse button. The Select Semantic Type window
opens.
The Semantic Types pane shows the entity, link, or property semantic type hierarchy.
2. Expand the hierarchy to find the semantic type from which you want to derive your custom
semantic type. Right-click the semantic type, then click New.
Note: You cannot derive a custom semantic type from the Abstract Binary property semantic type.
This special category of semantic type is reserved for IBM internal use.
3. Enter a name for the custom semantic type in the Name box.
The name must be unique within the semantic type hierarchy.
4. To improve your ability to search for this semantic type, add synonyms in the Synonyms box.
For example, synonyms for the semantic type Mail in the i2 Semantic Type Library are Letter,
Parcel, and Post.
Use commas to separate the synonyms.
5. Describe what this semantic type is used for in the Description box.
You can also include hyperlinks to further information.
6. Click OK to save the custom semantic type and assign it to the entity type, link type, or attribute
class.

Results
Custom semantic types are saved with your chart. Any custom semantic types that are not assigned
to chart items, chart item types, and attribute classes are lost when you save and close your chart. To
reuse custom semantic types in a new chart:
• Create a template based on your current chart and base your new chart on this template.
• Save your current set of custom semantic types in a new library file (.mtc file) which other Analyst's
Notebook users can load and use.

Share custom semantic types

You can share custom semantic types between Analyst's Notebook charts by saving them in a custom
library file (.mtc file). Loading the file into another chart makes the custom semantic types available.
When you create a custom semantic type, it is saved with the current chart, but not in the IBM i2
Semantic Type Library. Therefore, when you create a new chart, your custom semantic type is not
available for you to use. You can, however, save the custom semantic types that you create in a
custom library file with the file extension .mtc. The custom library file contains only the custom
semantic types and the hierarchy of semantic types to which the custom types belong.
You can load a custom library file into a blank chart, which you can then save as a template. The
custom semantic types are available for use in any new charts that you create from the template. You
can also share your custom semantic types with your colleagues by sending them your custom library
file, which they can then load into an Analyst's Notebook chart. When the file is loaded, any custom
semantic types that the file contains are available for them to use.
To save a custom library file, click File, point to Chart Properties, and then click Save Custom
Semantic Types to File.
To load a custom library file, click File, point to Chart Properties, and then click Load Custom
Semantic Types from File.

Customize Analyst's Notebook 273

You might want to load your custom semantic type file into your standard template. Your custom
semantic types are then available whenever you create a chart based on your standard template.
Note: You cannot edit the IBM i2 Semantic Type Library. It is maintained by IBM.

Using Drag Chart

By default, you can use the scroll bars (or overview pane) to see different areas of a chart, and use
dragging to select items on the chart surface. To navigate more quickly around a large chart, you can
put the application in drag mode.
When the application is in drag mode, the cursor changes from an arrow to a hand symbol. You can
pan to bring different parts of the chart into view by dragging on its surface. Drag mode is enabled in
the following ways:

From the right mouse button Click and hold the right mouse button.
From the bottom menu bar Click the Drag Chart option from the bottom
menu bar.
From the Ribbon menu Select the View tab and highlight the Drag Chart
option with the cursor. Left-click to activate.
From the chart surface Right-click on the chart surface and select Drag
Chart from the menu.
From the space bar Press the space bar to toggle Drag Chart on and
off.
From the mouse wheel Press the mouse wheel to toggle Drag Chart on
and off.

Selecting the user interface language

You can manually select which language Analyst's Notebook displays the user interface in. By default,
Analyst's Notebook automatically selects a language, but you can override that selection.

About this task

By default, the Analyst's Notebook user interface language corresponds to the current Format
setting, in your workstation's Region and Language settings. The Format setting determines the
format of date, time, and numerical data. For example, if the current setting is French (Canada), then
the Analyst's Notebook user interface is displayed in French. Translated templates, user help, and
example materials are installed.
If you change the Format setting, the Analyst's Notebook user interface language changes when you
next start the application. Alternatively, you can use the Analyst's Notebook language selector to
manually select a language.

Procedure
To manually select the user interface language:
1. If Analyst's Notebook is running, close the application.
2. From the Start menu, run the Analyst's Notebook language selector.
3. In the Language Selector window, select a language, then click Select.

274 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

The window closes.
4. Run Analyst's Notebook.
The Analyst's Notebook user interface is displayed in the selected language.

Setting general application options

Use the General page of the Options window to specify general application options. Application
options might be enabling and changing the color of hyperlinks, and error text color, and displaying
the theme line icon bar.

Procedure
Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click Options > General.
Note: These options are global application settings and are not saved as part of a chart or template.
They persist until changed, regardless of what chart you are working on.

Cut, copy, and paste chart items

When you cut or copy charts or parts of charts onto the clipboard, you can choose to make them
available to another application in various forms.
Select one of the following options:

Option Description
Chart as OLE Copies a picture of the chart to the clipboard. You can then paste it into another
Object application and still open and edit it in Analyst's Notebook
Picture as Copies a picture of the chart to the clipboard as a Windows metafile (.wmf). When
Metafile you paste the copied chart into another application, it is no longer 'live'. It shows a
picture of the chart when it was copied, but cannot be edited or opened as a chart.
Metafiles contain both vector and bitmap information. Vector information is a series
of instructions that tell the computer how to re-create the graphic. Bitmap
information stores the graphic as a series of pixels.

Picture as Copies a picture of the chart to the clipboard as a bitmap (.bmp). It no longer
Bitmap behaves as a chart but displays a picture of the chart when it was copied.
Most applications can handle bitmaps without problem, but might not handle
metafiles.

Enabling hyperlink creation

You can enable the creation of a hyperlink and change the color that is used to display it.

Procedure
To enable the creation of a hyperlink:
1. Select the Enable check box to enable the automatic hyperlink creation feature.
2. From the Color list that is displayed beneath the Enable check box in the Hyperlinks area, select
the color to use to display a hyperlink.

Customize Analyst's Notebook 275

Enabling the theme line icon bar
You can choose whether to display the icon for a theme line as you move across a chart. As standard
the theme line icon bar is displayed. It remains displayed as you pan across a chart so that theme
lines can be quickly and easily identified.

Procedure
Clear the Enable check box in the theme line icon bar area.
You can specify the color of the theme line icon bar. Select the color to use from the color picker.

Enabling advanced analysis

Enable advanced analysis to use analysis attributes.

Procedure
Select the Advanced Analysis check box to make analysis attributes available in:
• Visual Search
• List Items
• Find Path
• Combine Attributes

Changing zoom effect behavior

By default, Analyst's Notebook animates the zoom effect when you zoom in and out of areas on the
chart surface. You can change the option to remove the animated effect.

Procedure
1. Click File > Options to open the Options window.
2. Click General and look for the check box next to Animated Zoom Effect.
3. If the box is checked, you must clear it to turn off animated zooming.
4. Click OK.

Results
The animated effect is removed from the zoom option on all charts. This setting persists until
changed, regardless of the chart you are working on.

Enable drag hand throws chart

You can select a chart and use the drag hand to drag and throw the chart.

Procedure
Select the Drag Hand Throws Chart check box.

Enabling high-quality drawing mode

You can enable high-quality drawing mode. High-quality drawing mode might be used when you print
a chart to PDF or use it in a presentation. It can also be used if you share the chart with other users.

Procedure
Select the High Quality Drawing Mode check box so that the drawing uses a high quality.

276 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Changing the behavior of drag selection
By default, you can select items in Analyst's Notebook by touching them with the rectangle that
opens when you drag on the chart surface. You can change this behavior so that items are selected
only when the rectangle fully encloses them.

Procedure
1. Click File > Optionsto open the Options window.
2. Click General and look for the check box next to Drag Selects Only Fully Enclosed Items.
3. If the check box is clear, you must select it to change the behavior of drag selection.
4. Click OK.

Results
The behavior of drag selection changes for all charts. This setting persists until changed, regardless of
the chart you are working on.

Setting user interface options

Use the User Interface page of the Options window to change the color in which invalid values are
displayed and to control the display of ribbon tooltips.

Procedure
Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click Options > User Interface.
Note: These options are global application settings and are not saved as part of a chart or template.
They persist until changed, regardless of the chart on which you are working.

Changing the color of invalid data

When you enter invalid data into a field, the data is displayed in a specific color. You can choose which
color is used.

About this task

Invalid data might be an identity that is already in use on the chart. Other invalid data might be a
textual character in a numerical field, or a numerical value that is too large or too small. To move the
cursor to a different field, or save the data or setting, you must correct the invalidity.

Procedure
To change the color that invalid data is displayed in, select a color from the Error Text Color list.

Changing auto hide animation

By default, when you auto hide panes in Analyst's Notebook they open and close quickly as you place
the cursor over them. When you turn animated auto hide on, the panes slide open and closed more
slowly.

Procedure
1. Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click User Interface.
2. Look for the check box next to Animate Auto Hide. You must select the check box to activate
animated auto hide or clear it to remove the animated effect.

Customize Analyst's Notebook 277

3. Click OK.

Results
The change takes effect immediately and persists until you change it again, regardless of the chart
you are working on.

Ribbon tooltip display options

When you hover over a button or command in the Analyst's Notebook ribbon, tooltips that provide
help on the feature are displayed by default. You can choose to show the full tooltip, just their name,
or turn them off.
Note: When you choose an option, to apply the change you must restart Analyst's Notebook.
Select one of the following options:

Option Description
Show names and Displays the entire tooltip, including the name, enhanced information,
descriptions and any contextual links to the help.
Show names Displays only the name that describes the feature. Enhanced
information and contextual links to the help are not shown.
Do not show No tooltips or links to the help are displayed.

Setting icons application options

Use the Icons page of the Options window to select the icon that is set to use for every new and
existing chart that is opened in Analyst's Notebook.
Select one of the following application-level options:

Option Description
New Icons New and existing charts use the latest, high-quality icons.
Legacy Icons New and existing charts use the icon set available in releases before Analyst's
Notebook v8.5
As Saved in Chart By default, existing charts use the icon set that is selected in the chart last time
it was saved. New charts use the latest, high-quality icons.

Note: You might want to override the application-level setting for the chart you are currently working
on. To do this step, select As Saved in Chart and then change the icon set that is selected in the
Icons page of the Options window.
You can open charts that contain new icons in earlier versions of Analyst's Notebook. The new icons
cannot be displayed and are represented by legacy icons, but the new icons are not overwritten if you
save the chart in versions later than Analyst's Notebook 6.
Note: If you save a chart that contains new icons in Analyst's Notebook 6, they are replaced and
saved as legacy icons.

278 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Embedding and extracting custom icons
You can embed your custom icons into the charts that use them, so that recipients of the charts can
see the icons on the charting surface. You can extract the custom icons that are embedded in charts
that you open, so that the icons become available for you to use.

Procedure
• To save custom icons so that they are embedded within the charts that use them, select the Save
Custom Icons in Charts check box. If you clear this check box, other users see default icons
instead of the custom icons. By default, this option is selected.
• To extract custom icons from charts that you open, select the Extract Custom Icons from Charts
check box. By default, this option is selected.
Related concepts
Custom icons
You can use your own images to supplement the icons that are provided with Analyst's Notebook. You
can assign custom icons to entity types and attribute classes.

Displaying, hiding, and resetting panes

You can display or hide any Analyst's Notebook pane from the Options window. If you repositioned or
resized any panes during your analysis, you can set a single pane or all of them back to their default
visibility, position, and size.

Procedure
Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click Customize > Panes. Change the visibility
or reset the visibility, position, and size of panes:
• To display or hide a pane, select or clear the check box next to the relevant pane. When you display
a pane, it appears at the size and position it was last displayed.
• To set the visibility, size and position of a single pane back to its default setting, select the pane and
click Reset.
• To set the visibility, size and position of every pane back to their default settings, click Reset All.

Attention: You cannot undo the outcome of the Reset functions. Before you click Reset All,
make sure that you want to reset every pane.

Setting saving application options

Use the Save page of the Options window to specify options when you save a chart. Saving options
might be enabling and displaying the Cover Sheet, and setting the interval that is used for
automatically saving a chart.

Procedure
Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click Options > Save.
Note: These options are global application settings and are not saved as part of a chart or template.
They persist until changed, regardless of what chart you are working on

Customize Analyst's Notebook 279

Display the cover sheet when you save a chart
The cover sheet describes the content and purpose of the chart so that other users can read this
information before a chart is opened. A version is displayed when you save your chart, and can be
used to change the description.
There are one of three options you can set to determine how often the editable version of the cover
sheet is shown:

Option Description
Do not Display When Prevents the cover sheet from being displayed every time that you
Saving save a chart.
Displays on First Save Displays the cover sheet on the first save of a new chart. This option is
the default.
Display on Every Save Displays the version of the cover sheet every time you save a chart.

This option displays the read-only version of the cover sheet on opening a chart. It is set only on the
editable version of the cover sheet, which is displayed by using either these options or by clicking File
> Cover Sheet.

Automatically saving charts

You can choose to automatically save the charts you are working on, and specify the time interval at
which the auto save occurs.

Procedure
1. Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click Options > Save
2. Select the Auto Save check box and enter the time period in minutes. The default auto save option
is set to save every five minutes.
3. Select the folder in which you want Analyst's Notebook to keep the temporary files. Preferably
choose a folder on your local hard disk, typically the C: drive.
4. Click OK.

Results
All your open charts are saved automatically at the time interval you specified.
Note: Automatically saving your chart does not display the Cover Sheet. It is displayed only when you
click File > Save or File > Save As, or the On Save check box is selected in the Chart Properties
window.
The auto save files are only restored when you start Analyst's Notebook after a failure. They are
deleted when you close Analyst's Notebook normally. If you want to keep these charts, you must save
them normally before you close Analyst's Notebook.

Archiving charts
For backup and record-keeping, you can configure the Analyst's Notebook archiving feature to make a
separate copy of your chart every time you save it. You can decide how many copies to retain, and
whether the application monitors their integrity.

Procedure
1. Click File > Options, and then in the Options window click Options > Save

280 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

2. Select the Archive on Save check box.
3. Choose the number of copies of each chart you want to retain. The default option is set to five
charts.
4. Optional: Select the Test Archives for Corruption check box to verify your archived files. Analyst's
Notebook runs a background check and alerts you if the archive fails.
5. Click OK.

Results
Every time that you save an open chart, a backup copy is saved in an i2 Chart Archives folder, up to
the maximum number you specified.

Display compatibility warnings

When you save a chart in this version of Analyst's Notebook, the chart is checked to see if there are
any significant compatibility issues with earlier versions and a relevant warning is displayed. For
example, new icons, pictures on icons and icon frames are not supported in versions earlier than
Analyst's Notebook 8.5.
By default, the Warn About Compatibility when Saving in Current Format check box is selected.
Check warnings regularly to ensure that you do not encounter unexpected incompatibility issues
when you open charts in earlier versions. If you are familiar with the compatibility warnings when you
save charts and no longer want to see them, clear the check box.

Managing files and file locations

For a new installation of Analyst's Notebook, a set of template and specification files is installed to
default locations on your computer.

Types of files that are installed with Analyst's Notebook

Templates and specifications that are installed with Analyst's Notebook are used to create charts that
can be used for different audiences.
The main template and specification files are:

Template Description
Standard template The template that is used as the basis for a new chart when you click File
(Standard.ant) > New > New Standard Chart.
Flag template A local template that contains only flag icons. Local templates are
(Flag.ant) selected in the New From Template window, which opens when you
click File > New > New from Template.
Report specification This file contains six standard specifications for generating reports by
(Reporter.rep) using the Reporter. The report specifications in this file can be used when
you click the Publish tab and then click Reports.

As you use Analyst's Notebook you might update the template files. For example, you, might add new
entity types, or when you want to create new report specifications. You might also move the location
of some files. For example, to create central server copies for regular backups, or when you want to
share templates and specifications with other users in your group.
Managing your files means that:

Customize Analyst's Notebook 281

• Some key templates and specifications can be moved to new folder locations
• All files can be updated automatically at installation when there are newer versions, or where you
edited the original versions
• You can choose to accept or reject an update where a 'notify' feature is selected
• The Standard template and Report specification file can be restored later where you either edit the
original file or rejected an update at installation.

Maintaining file versions

When you upgrade Analyst's Notebook to the latest version, old files are overwritten and new files are
installed automatically.
If you changed the contents of your original installed templates or specification between versions, a
Replace window is shown when you first start Analyst's Notebook.
You must select one of two options before you can use Analyst's Notebook:

Option Description
Use the updated Creates a backup copy of your edited file with the name Backup <n> of
<file name> (the <file name> in a Backup directory (for example, for templates,
old file is backed C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Templates\Backup), and
up) overwrites your edited file with the latest version.
Keep the existing Ensures that your edited version of the template or specification file is not
<file name> overwritten and remains available for use with your latest version of Analyst's
Notebook. If you choose this option while you update the Standard template or
Report specification, you can reset these files with the installed versions later
by using the Templates and Reporter pages of the Options window.

Standard template file

When you click File > New > New Standard Chart, the template that is specified in this path is used.

Procedure
To reset the current Standard template with the installed version of the template:
1. Click Reset in the Standard Template File area. The Reset Standard Template File window is
shown. Note Reset is only available when either a more recent version of the template is installed
(but you chose not to use it) or you edited the current installed version.
2. You can click Details on the Reset Standard Template File window to read a description of what
happens when you reset the file.
3. Click OK. The latest version of the Standard template is installed to its default location.

Local Template folder

The Local Template folder contains templates that are in the list of local templates when you click
File > New > New from Template.
To reset the local template folder to the default local template folder, click Reset in the Local
Template Folder area.
Note: Reset is only available if the default local template folder is changed.

282 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Workgroup Template folder
The Workgroup folder contains templates that are in the list of workgroup templates when you click
File > New > New from Template.

Using the Reporter page

You can use the standard installed report specification Reporter.rep to create and modify reports.

About this task

This specification is typically at C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\My Documents
\i2\i2 Analyst's Notebook 8\Report Specifications.
You can create your own .rep files, or revert to using the original installed Reporter.rep file if you
changed it.
Use the Reporter page to specify the location of the report specification (*.rep) file that you want to
use in Analyst's Notebook, and to restore the original installed version of the Reporter.rep file.
To change the location of your report specification file, enter the path or click Browse to specify a
different location.

Procedure
To change the location of your report specification:
1. Click Reset. The Reset Specifications File window is shown. Reset is only available when either a
more recent version of the specification file is installed (but you chose not to use it) or you edited
the original copy.
2. You can click Details on the Reset Specifications File window to read a description of what
happens when you reset the file.
3. Click OK. The latest version of the specification file is installed to its default location.

Updating files
When you upgrade Analyst's Notebook to the latest version, old files are overwritten, and new files
are installed automatically. However, if you change the contents of your original installed templates
or specifications between versions, a Replace window is shown when you first start Analyst's
Notebook.
You must select one of two options before you can update a file:

Option Description
Use the updated Creates a backup copy of your edited file with the name Backup of <file
<file name> (the old name>, and overwrites your edited file with the latest version.
file is backed up)
Keep the existing Ensures that your edited version of the template or specification file is not
<file name> overwritten and remains available for use with your latest version of Analyst's
Notebook. If you select this option when you update the Standard template
or Report specification, you can reset these files with the installed versions
later by using the Options window that opens when you click File > Options.

Customize Analyst's Notebook 283

Managing plug-ins
Analyst's Notebook is an application that can be extended with more functions which are part of a
plug-in. A plug-in is a software component which might provide commands and ribbon buttons in
addition to those commands provided as standard in Analyst's Notebook.
There are two types of plug-in:

Component Description
Standard Standard components are provided by IBM and are present as part of the standard
Analyst's Notebook software. Standard components are identified in the Author box
by the phrase:
Component authored by IBM

Some standard components are by loaded when the application starts. Others are only
loaded when required, such as the Visual Search component.

Extensions Extensions are third-party plug-ins that are not part of the standard Analyst's
Notebook product. For more details about an extension, select it in the list and read
the information in the License box.

Specifying available plug-ins

To list the installed plug-ins, expand either the Standard or Extension sections, and use the scroll bar
to view the list of plug-ins for each type. The list of plug-ins for each type are grouped under the
subsections Loaded and Unloaded showing those plug-ins that are successfully loaded or failed to
load

Procedure
To specify available and unavailable plug-ins:
• To enable a plug-in, select the plug-in in the displayed list, and select the Load on Startup check
box.
• To disable a plug-in, select the required plug-in and clear the Load on Startup and Protect
against Plug-in Failure check boxes
• You also select the Protect against Plug-in Failure check box to allow Analyst's Notebook to load
properly even if the plug-in fails to load. The plug-in can then be reported in the Failed area when
Analyst's Notebook is up and running.

284 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Glossary
This glossary includes terms and definitions for IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook.
The following cross-references are used in this glossary:
• See refers you from a term to a preferred synonym, or from an acronym or abbreviation to the
defined full form.
• See also refers you to a related or contrasting term.

A
abstract semantic type
A semantic type that only serves as the parent of other semantic types. Abstract semantic types
categorize their child semantic types, but are never associated with real data.
aligned value
A value that is used to interpret equivalent native values from different data sources. For example,
the value Male can be used to align the native values M or Ma.
analysis attribute
A characteristic or trait pertaining to a chart item. Analysis attributes are never displayed on
charts.
association chart
A chart that highlights the relationships between entities, rather than a chronology of events, by
arranging data in a manner that emphasizes particular associations.
attribute
A piece of information that is associated with a chart item, such as a date of birth or an account
number. An attribute is represented by a symbol, or a value, or both, that is displayed with the
chart item.
attribute class
A descriptor of the characteristics of an attribute, including the type of its values, how its values
are displayed, and the treatment of its values when they are merged or pasted on a chart.
attribute entry
An attribute with a preset value that can be associated with a chart item.
attribute instance
A single use of an attribute on a chart item.
authority
A measure of how well-connected an entity is, based on its inbound links. Authority is one of two
eigenvector centrality measures used in social network analysis. See also centrality, eigenvector.
automatic attribute
An attribute that is created automatically by the application and added to a chart item.

B
betweenness
A measure of how important an entity is, based on the number of paths that pass through it on an
association chart. Betweenness is one of the centrality measures used in social network analysis.
See also centrality, gatekeeper.
binding strength
A measure of the strength of a relationship between two entities that are directly or indirectly
linked. See also common neighbor.
box
An entity representation that can indicate an organization or group on a chart. A box is often used
to enclose other entities. See also circle, representation.

C
card
A record of information attached to an item. An item can have multiple cards.
centrality
The relative importance of one entity compared to other entities in social network analysis, as
determined by its relationships. See also authority, betweenness, closeness, degree, eigenvector,
hub, social network analysis.
chart
A visual representation of real-world objects, such as organizations, people, events, or locations,
and the relationships between them.
chart fragment
A view of a chart that highlights particular items of interest.
chart property
A characteristic of a chart, such as its summary description, time zone, grid size, background
color, or merge and paste rules. Chart properties are saved with the chart. See also chart
template.
chart template
An object that is used for chart creation that contains preconfigured chart properties, and lists of
permitted entity types and link types. See also chart property.
child
In a generalization relationship, the specialization of another element, the parent. See also
parent.
circle
An entity representation that can indicate an organization or a group on a chart. A circle is often
used to enclose other entities. See also box, representation.
circular layout
A layout in which entities are arranged by type around the circumference of a circle. See also
layout.

286 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

closeness
A measure of how quickly an entity can use links to get access to other entities on an association
chart. Closeness is one of the centrality measures used in social network analysis. See also
centrality.
cluster
A group of entities that have more connections to each other than to entities outside the group.
common neighbor
An entity that is directly connected to at least two other entities. For example, if C is connected to
A and B, then C is a common neighbor of A and B. See also binding strength, connection.
compact peacock layout
A layout in which complex groups of linked entities are arranged to highlight the structure of
associations. It is most suitable for charts with many linked entities. See also layout.
condition
A specified property, a value, and an operator that defines a comparison relationship between
them. One or more conditions can be used to create a query or a conditional formatting
specification.
conditional formatting
The process of defining and applying rules to change the appearance of chart items automatically,
based on their properties. See also conditional formatting specification.
conditional formatting specification
A collection of conditional formatting rules. See also conditional formatting.
connection
A direct relationship between a pair of entities on a chart, represented by one or more links. See
also common neighbor, connection multiplicity, directed connection.
connection multiplicity
A setting that controls whether multiple links between the same items are displayed as a single
line, as directed lines, or as multiple lines. See also connection.
controlling item
A chart item whose position on the chart is defined by its date and time, and whose position
affects the positions of other timed items. See also free item, ordered item.
cover sheet
A page on which the user can view and edit the summary and custom properties of a chart.

D
degree
A measure of how many direct relationships an entity has with other entities on an association
chart. Degree is one of the centrality measures used in social network analysis. See also
centrality, root entity.
directed connection
A connection between entities in which links that are in the same direction are represented as a
single link on a chart. See also connection.

Glossary 287
diverted theme line
A theme line that is attached to an event frame such that when the event frame is moved, the
theme line maintains its vertical position with respect to the frame. See also event frame, theme
line.

E
eigenvector
A measure of how well-connected an entity is, based on its inbound and outbound links.
Eigenvector is one of the centrality measures used in social network analysis. See also authority,
centrality, hub.
end
An entity that is attached to a link. See also end constraint.
end constraint
A constraint on the types of entities that can be the end of a particular link. See also end, valid end
type.
entity
A set of details that are held about a real-world object such as a person, location, or bank
account. An entity is a kind of item.
entity semantic type
A semantic type that can be assigned only to an entity or an entity type. See also semantic type.
entity type
A descriptor of the characteristics of an entity, including the properties it can contain and its
appearance in visualizations.
event frame
An entity representation that emphasizes date and time information. An event frame is often used
in conjunction with theme lines. See also diverted theme line, representation.
expansion
A process that searches for entities within a data source that are directly related to some selected
entities.

F
free item
A chart item that is not ordered. Free items can be moved anywhere on the chart. See also
controlling item, ordered item.

G
gatekeeper
An entity with a high measure of betweenness that may control the flow of information among
other entities on an association chart. See also betweenness.

288 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

grade
A rating that indicates the accuracy of a piece of information or the reliability of an intelligence
source.
grading system
A rating scale that is used to classify information in a data store or on a chart. A grading system is
a measure of reliability and accuracy.
grouped layout
A layout in which entities are arranged to show groups of interconnected entities. See also layout.

H
heat map
A graphical representation of data values in a two-dimensional table format, in which higher
values are represented by darker colors and lower values by lighter ones.
hierarchical layout
A layout in which entities are arranged to show organizational structures. See also layout.
histogram
A graphical display of the distribution of values for a numeric field, in the form of a vertical bar
chart in which taller bars indicate higher values. See also histogram filter.
histogram filter
A filter that changes the appearance of a chart. When a histogram bar is selected, items that
match the conditions defined by that bar are selected, while items that do not are hidden. See
also histogram.
hub
A measure of how well-connected an entity is, based on its outbound links. Hub is one of two
eigenvector centrality measures used in social network analysis. See also centrality, eigenvector.

I
icon
An entity representation that consists of a stylized image and an optional label. See also
representation.
import design
A specification of how data from an external source will be transformed into chart or repository
items during an import procedure.
item
An entity or a link. Items are characterized by the values of their properties. See also merged
item, ordered item.

Glossary 289
L
layout
The arrangement of items on a chart. See also circular layout, compact peacock layout, grouped
layout, hierarchical layout, minimize crossed links layout, peacock layout.
line strength
An indication of confidence in the information underlying a particular link. Line strength is
represented as a solid, dashed, or dotted line on a chart.
link
An association between two entities, such as an ownership relationship between a person and a
vehicle.
link direction
An indication that the meaning of a link is different for each of its ends. For example, the direction
of a telephone call makes one end the caller and the other the recipient. Link direction can
influence the centrality measures used in social network analysis.
link semantic type
A semantic type that can be assigned only to a link or a link type. See also semantic type.
link separation
The distance between adjacent links in a connection on a chart.
link type
A descriptor of the characteristics of a link, including the properties it can contain and its
appearance in visualizations.

M
match
The part of a result that met a condition during a search operation. A search can yield a perfect
match or a partial match.
merged item
An item that is created by merging the information held in two or more items. See also item.
minimize crossed links layout
A layout in which entities are arranged in a configuration where the fewest number of links
overlap. See also layout.
multiplicity
See connection multiplicity.

N
network chart
See association chart.

290 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

O
ordered item
A chart item whose position is maintained within a sequence. The movement of an ordered item is
restricted such that it cannot be dragged beyond neighboring ordered items. See also controlling
item, free item, item.

P
parent
In a hierarchy or auto-level hierarchy, a member that has one or more child members at the level
immediately below.
path
A route on a chart between two entities. A path may include intermediate entities.
peacock layout
A layout where complex groups of linked entities are arranged to show the structure of
associations. It is most suitable for charts with many linked entities. See also layout.
property
A container for a single piece of information about an item.
property semantic type
A semantic type that can be assigned to a property type, a property in a data record, or an
attribute class. See also semantic type.
property type
A descriptor of the characteristics of a property, including the type of information it can contain.
proportional
Pertaining to an area of a chart in which the horizontal distances between items have a linear
relationship with the time differences between them.

R
representation
The form in which an entity is represented on a chart. See also box, circle, event frame, icon,
theme line.
root entity
An entity in a grouped layout that has the highest degree centrality in its group. Depending on the
data, there can be more than one root entity. See also degree.

S
semantic type
A category that defines the real-world meaning of data, and therefore how applications should
interpret that data. For example, Person is a semantic type that could be assigned to entity types

Glossary 291
such as Male, Victim, and Witness. See also entity semantic type, link semantic type, property
semantic type.
snapshot
A stored version of a chart that preserves its contents and layout at a particular stage of its
development.
social network analysis
A method of analyzing the structure of social relationships that uses mathematical metrics to
make claims about social organization and social dynamics. See also centrality, weight.
style segment
A section of a theme line between adjacent items to which color and strength can be applied.

T
theme line
An entity representation that shows the interactions of an entity over time. A theme line can be
used with event frames. See also diverted theme line, representation.
theme line extent
The distance between the beginning and end of a theme line
theme line wiring
The manner in which a theme line diverts from a horizontal trajectory in order to pass through and
travel between event frames.
timeline chart
A chart or a portion of a chart that shows a chronology of events. For example, a series of
meetings that occur over several days, or a set of transactions that occur over a period of time.

V
valid end type
An entity type that conforms to the end constraints of a particular link. See also end constraint.

W
weight
A value that is added to a link on an association chart, to represent its importance relative to other
links. Weight can influence the centrality measures used in social network analysis. See also
social network analysis.
weightings file
A file that contains information that can apply weighting values to links on a chart.
wiring segment
The section of a theme line between adjacent diverting event frames.

292 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.
Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available
in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply
that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead.
However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product,
program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can
send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer
of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the
publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s)
described in this publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not
in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not
part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate
without incurring any obligation to you.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this
one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM United Kingdom Limited Hursley House Hursley Park Winchester, Hants, SO21 2JN UK
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some
cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are
provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License
Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the
results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may
have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements
will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the
applicable data for their specific environment.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their
published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and
cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM
products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of
those products.
All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without
notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To
illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies,
brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses
used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate
programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these
sample programs in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using,
marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface
for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been
thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability,
serviceability, or function of these programs. The sample programs are provided "AS IS", without
warranty of any kind. IBM shall not be liable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample
programs.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names might
be trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at
"Copyright and trademark information" at www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both.
Java™ and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle
and/or its affiliates.
ArcGIS, EDN, StreetMap, @esri.com, and www.esri.com are trademarks, registered trademarks, or
service marks of Esri in the United States, the European Community, or certain other jurisdictions.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. Other company, product, and service
names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

294 IBM i2 Analyst's Notebook: User Help

IBM®

Product Number: 5725-G22

Complete Download Sport, Physical Activity, and Anti-Colonial Autoethnography: Stories and Ways of Being (Qualitative Research in Sport and Physical Activity) 1st Edition Jason Laurendeau PDF All Chapters
100% (3)
Complete Download Sport, Physical Activity, and Anti-Colonial Autoethnography: Stories and Ways of Being (Qualitative Research in Sport and Physical Activity) 1st Edition Jason Laurendeau PDF All Chapters
35 pages
WD515G 2.0 en WD5152LSG
No ratings yet
WD515G 2.0 en WD5152LSG
114 pages
IBM I2 Ibase 8 Quick Satrt Guide
0% (1)
IBM I2 Ibase 8 Quick Satrt Guide
69 pages
IBM I2 Analyst'S Notebook: Financial Analysis
No ratings yet
IBM I2 Analyst'S Notebook: Financial Analysis
4 pages
Data Power Course
No ratings yet
Data Power Course
357 pages
IBM I2 Analyst Notebook Premium Datasheet
No ratings yet
IBM I2 Analyst Notebook Premium Datasheet
4 pages
Analyst Notebook 6 Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
Analyst Notebook 6 Quick Start Guide
38 pages
The Security Intelligence Graph: White Paper
No ratings yet
The Security Intelligence Graph: White Paper
14 pages
Intro To Fisheries Intelligence
No ratings yet
Intro To Fisheries Intelligence
24 pages
Wb82811course PDF
No ratings yet
Wb82811course PDF
612 pages
Bitronics Areva
No ratings yet
Bitronics Areva
8 pages
BSC6900 UMTS Performance Counter Reference (V900R016C00 - 09) (PDF) - EN PDF
No ratings yet
BSC6900 UMTS Performance Counter Reference (V900R016C00 - 09) (PDF) - EN PDF
3,770 pages
I2 Analyst's Notebook 9.4.1
No ratings yet
I2 Analyst's Notebook 9.4.1
281 pages
I2 Analyst's Notebook 7 User Guide - ISS Africa - Investigation PDF
No ratings yet
I2 Analyst's Notebook 7 User Guide - ISS Africa - Investigation PDF
403 pages
IBM I2 Analyst'S Notebook: To Importing
No ratings yet
IBM I2 Analyst'S Notebook: To Importing
4 pages
Autonomous Security
From Everand
Autonomous Security
Dr. Valarian Couch
No ratings yet
What's New in I2 Analyst's Notebook 6.0.55 (UK)
No ratings yet
What's New in I2 Analyst's Notebook 6.0.55 (UK)
21 pages
Digital Open Sourceintelligence
No ratings yet
Digital Open Sourceintelligence
29 pages
Next-Gen Cybersecurity
From Everand
Next-Gen Cybersecurity
Dr. Valarian Couch
No ratings yet
Rosoka General 2015
No ratings yet
Rosoka General 2015
20 pages
Social Network Analysis
No ratings yet
Social Network Analysis
37 pages
Intelligence Sense Making
No ratings yet
Intelligence Sense Making
15 pages
Security Monitoring with Wazuh: A hands-on guide to effective enterprise security using real-life use cases in Wazuh
From Everand
Security Monitoring with Wazuh: A hands-on guide to effective enterprise security using real-life use cases in Wazuh
Rajneesh Gupta
No ratings yet
Threat Intelligence Platform Complete Self-Assessment Guide
From Everand
Threat Intelligence Platform Complete Self-Assessment Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Merging Charts and Entities: IBM I2 Analyst'S Notebook
No ratings yet
Merging Charts and Entities: IBM I2 Analyst'S Notebook
4 pages
Digital Forensics Framework A Complete Guide
From Everand
Digital Forensics Framework A Complete Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
OSINT Overview
100% (1)
OSINT Overview
4 pages
Airtight: Security Solutions for the New Millennium
From Everand
Airtight: Security Solutions for the New Millennium
Clint Kirkwood
No ratings yet
Gallaghers I2 Guidebook
100% (1)
Gallaghers I2 Guidebook
176 pages
Threat Intelligence Platforms A Clear and Concise Reference
From Everand
Threat Intelligence Platforms A Clear and Concise Reference
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Cyber-security regulation Third Edition
From Everand
Cyber-security regulation Third Edition
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Email Security 4
No ratings yet
Email Security 4
9 pages
Certified Ethical Hacker: Reconnaissance, Vulnerability Analysis & Social Engineering
From Everand
Certified Ethical Hacker: Reconnaissance, Vulnerability Analysis & Social Engineering
Rob Botwright
No ratings yet
Shamoon 2 Malware Analysis Logrhythm Labs Threat Intelligence Report
100% (1)
Shamoon 2 Malware Analysis Logrhythm Labs Threat Intelligence Report
32 pages
Red team The Ultimate Step-By-Step Guide
From Everand
Red team The Ultimate Step-By-Step Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Security Intelligence: Driving Security From Analytics To Action
No ratings yet
Security Intelligence: Driving Security From Analytics To Action
17 pages
Ultimate Cyberwarfare for Evasive Cyber Tactics
From Everand
Ultimate Cyberwarfare for Evasive Cyber Tactics
Chang Tan
No ratings yet
Zzd03126usen PDF
No ratings yet
Zzd03126usen PDF
4 pages
IBM I2 Analyst's Notebook: What It Can Do For Your Business
No ratings yet
IBM I2 Analyst's Notebook: What It Can Do For Your Business
4 pages
I2 Analyst - S Notebook 8 Release Notes
No ratings yet
I2 Analyst - S Notebook 8 Release Notes
17 pages
IBM I2 Analyst's Notebook
No ratings yet
IBM I2 Analyst's Notebook
4 pages
Wb 846 Notebook
No ratings yet
Wb 846 Notebook
238 pages
SAAI3-AI Analyst 2022-Course Guide
No ratings yet
SAAI3-AI Analyst 2022-Course Guide
709 pages
0A057 Course Guide
No ratings yet
0A057 Course Guide
232 pages
0A057 Course Guide DES
No ratings yet
0A057 Course Guide DES
152 pages
I2 Analyze 4.3.5
100% (1)
I2 Analyze 4.3.5
489 pages
Lab Guide - Create Guardium Reports With Drill-down
No ratings yet
Lab Guide - Create Guardium Reports With Drill-down
20 pages
System Security
No ratings yet
System Security
372 pages
Wb 8451 Notebook
No ratings yet
Wb 8451 Notebook
103 pages
Report Authoring Guide
No ratings yet
Report Authoring Guide
178 pages
Reference data collections and custom rules PDF
No ratings yet
Reference data collections and custom rules PDF
21 pages
DB2
50% (2)
DB2
125 pages
content
No ratings yet
content
29 pages
Course 2 - Intro To Data Science
50% (2)
Course 2 - Intro To Data Science
113 pages
1.0 - Welcome
No ratings yet
1.0 - Welcome
13 pages
SAWS3-Big Data Engineer 2021-WatsonStudio-Course Guide - High
No ratings yet
SAWS3-Big Data Engineer 2021-WatsonStudio-Course Guide - High
131 pages
Newsletter Edition 11 (5382)
No ratings yet
Newsletter Edition 11 (5382)
6 pages
03-i2 8.9 帮助（2014年）
No ratings yet
03-i2 8.9 帮助（2014年）
344 pages
1.0 - Welcome
No ratings yet
1.0 - Welcome
13 pages
Welcome DB2 9.7 Academic Workshop: Information Management
No ratings yet
Welcome DB2 9.7 Academic Workshop: Information Management
13 pages
Wa5901course Secured
No ratings yet
Wa5901course Secured
508 pages
Platform Architecture Whitepaper External PDF
No ratings yet
Platform Architecture Whitepaper External PDF
24 pages
Lab Guide Create a Guardium Query and Report
No ratings yet
Lab Guide Create a Guardium Query and Report
23 pages
Juno Batistis vs. People of The Philippines, G.R. No. 181571 December 16, 2009
No ratings yet
Juno Batistis vs. People of The Philippines, G.R. No. 181571 December 16, 2009
2 pages
Quick Change Mount Plate Application Spotlight
No ratings yet
Quick Change Mount Plate Application Spotlight
4 pages
Didger5 Users Guide Preview
No ratings yet
Didger5 Users Guide Preview
100 pages
case-ih-tractor-3210-3220-3230-4210-4220-4230-and-4240-operators-manual_9-24844
No ratings yet
case-ih-tractor-3210-3220-3230-4210-4220-4230-and-4240-operators-manual_9-24844
20 pages
bussiness lawJournal 19-22 (2)
No ratings yet
bussiness lawJournal 19-22 (2)
5 pages
DG33BU SpecUpdate04 PDF
No ratings yet
DG33BU SpecUpdate04 PDF
6 pages
Free Access to Test Bank for Human Resource Management, 12th Edition, Raymond Noe, John Hollenbeck, Barry Gerhart, Patrick Wright Chapter Answers
100% (24)
Free Access to Test Bank for Human Resource Management, 12th Edition, Raymond Noe, John Hollenbeck, Barry Gerhart, Patrick Wright Chapter Answers
50 pages
A Companion to Popular Culture 1st Edition Gary Burns - Quickly download the ebook to never miss any content
100% (1)
A Companion to Popular Culture 1st Edition Gary Burns - Quickly download the ebook to never miss any content
57 pages
Start Here. Go Anywher E.: KPMG Law
No ratings yet
Start Here. Go Anywher E.: KPMG Law
21 pages
User Manual
No ratings yet
User Manual
45 pages
SNMP Northbound Interface Variance (NetNumen U31 R07 V12.11.20-Netnumen U31 R07 V12.12.20.P02)
No ratings yet
SNMP Northbound Interface Variance (NetNumen U31 R07 V12.11.20-Netnumen U31 R07 V12.12.20.P02)
14 pages
PD42-1270 Hardware Manual: Simplified Block Diagram
No ratings yet
PD42-1270 Hardware Manual: Simplified Block Diagram
24 pages
Faberge, Inc. v. Intermediate Appellate Court, G.R. No. 71189, November 4, 1992 (215 SCRA 316)
No ratings yet
Faberge, Inc. v. Intermediate Appellate Court, G.R. No. 71189, November 4, 1992 (215 SCRA 316)
2 pages
AMBA CXS Streaming Protocol Specification
No ratings yet
AMBA CXS Streaming Protocol Specification
54 pages
ZXMP6A17G: 60V P-Channel Enhancement Mode Mosfet
No ratings yet
ZXMP6A17G: 60V P-Channel Enhancement Mode Mosfet
8 pages
[FREE PDF sample] Practical Oracle SQL: Mastering the Full Power of Oracle Database 1st Edition Kim Berg Hansen ebooks
100% (4)
[FREE PDF sample] Practical Oracle SQL: Mastering the Full Power of Oracle Database 1st Edition Kim Berg Hansen ebooks
50 pages
Harke Polii - Intellectual Property
No ratings yet
Harke Polii - Intellectual Property
4 pages
10 Sem Syllabus
No ratings yet
10 Sem Syllabus
8 pages
Servicenow Rome Employee Service Management Enus
No ratings yet
Servicenow Rome Employee Service Management Enus
3,211 pages
Instant download Non discrimination in Tax Treaty Law and World Trade Law The Ive and Subjective Approaches (Series on International Taxation) pdf all chapter
100% (1)
Instant download Non discrimination in Tax Treaty Law and World Trade Law The Ive and Subjective Approaches (Series on International Taxation) pdf all chapter
25 pages
Manual UserManual en
No ratings yet
Manual UserManual en
45 pages
README
No ratings yet
README
2 pages
CPQ 23D ResolvedKnownIssues
No ratings yet
CPQ 23D ResolvedKnownIssues
12 pages
RMPLAN
No ratings yet
RMPLAN
2 pages
Diodo Bat54 - A - C - S (Kl1 - Kl2 - Kl3 - Kl4)
No ratings yet
Diodo Bat54 - A - C - S (Kl1 - Kl2 - Kl3 - Kl4)
5 pages
Case Digests On Trademarks
No ratings yet
Case Digests On Trademarks
10 pages